Protool Gop

SIMATIC HMI ProTool V6.
0 Service Pack 2 How to configure graphicsbased units

Printout of the Online Help
Release 12/02
Safety Guidelines
This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as well as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are marked as follows according to the level of danger:
Danger
indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
Warning
indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.
Caution
used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
Caution
used without safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may.
Attention
indicates that unwanted events or status can occur if the relevant information is not observed.
Note
draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a particular part of the documentation.
Qualified Personnel
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work with this software. Qualified personnel within the meaning of the safety notices of this documentation are persons capable of giving due consideration to safety engineering standards when using this software on systems..
Trademarks
The registered trademarks of the Siemens AG can be found in the preface.
Impressum
Editor and Publisher: A&D PT1
Copyright Siemens AG 2002 All rights reserved The transmission and reproduction of this documentation and the exploitation and communication of its contents are not allowed, unless expressly granted. Violators are liable for damages. All rights reserved, especially in the case of the granting of a patent or registration by GM. Siemens AG Bereich Automation & Drives Geschftsgebiet SIMATIC HMI Postfach 4848, D-90327 Nuernberg Siemens Aktiengesellschaft
Exclusion of liability We have checked the content of this publication for compliance with the described hard and software. However, discrepancies cannot be excluded, with the result that we assume no guarantee for total compliance. The information in this publication is checked regularly, and any necessary corrections are included in the following editions. We would be grateful for any suggestions for improvement.
Siemens AG 2002 Technical data subject to change.
Preface
Release 12/02
1Preface
Purpose
This document forms part of the documentation package for the ProTool CS configuration software. It provides all information required for the creation and configuration of projects.
Notation
Different font formats simplify orientation within the text: Output File > Edit Names of dialog boxes, fields and buttons are shown in quotation marks. Menu items are shown in quotation marks. Successive submenus/options are separated by arrows. The complete route to the menu option in question is always shown.
Trademarks
The following names are registered trademarks of the Siemens AG: SIMATIC SIMATIC HMI SIMATIC Multi Panel SIMATIC Multifunctional Platform SIMATIC Panel PC HMI ProAgent ProTool ProTool/Lite ProTool/Pro
The remaining trademarks in this publication may be trademarks, whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
ProTool V6.0 Service Pack 2 How to configure graphics-based units Printout of the Online-Help
Preface
Release 12/02
Customer and Technical Support

Available round the clock, worldwide:
Nuremberg Johnson City Singapore
SIMATIC Hotline
Worldwide (Nuremberg) Technical Support (FreeContact) Local time: Mon.Fri. 8:00 to 17:00 Telephone: +49 (180) 5050-222 Fax: E-Mail: GMT: +49 (180) 5050-223 techsupport@ ad.siemens.de +1:00
Worldwide (Nuremberg) Technical Support (fee-based, only with SIMATIC Card) Local time: Mon.Fri. 0:00 to 24:00 Telephone: +49 (911) 895-7777 Fax: GMT: +49 (911) 895-7001 +01:00
Europa/Africa (Nuremberg) Authorization Local time: Mon.Fri. 8:00 to 17:00 Telephone: +49 (911) 895-7200 Fax: E-Mail: GMT: +49 (911) 895-7201 authorization@ nbgm.siemens.de +1:00
America (Johnson City) Technical Support and Authorization Local time: Mon.Fri. 8:00 to 19:00 Telephone: +1 423 461-2522 Fax: E-Mail: GMT: +1 423 461-2289 simatic.hotline@ sea.siemens.com -5:00
Asia/Australia (Singapore) Technical Support and Authorization Local time: Mon.Fri. 8:30 to 17:30 Telephone: +65 740-7000 Fax: E-Mail: GMT: +65 740-7001 simatic.hotline@ sae.siemens.com.sg +8:00
The languages spoken by the SIMATIC Hotlines are generally German and English the Authorization Hotline is also provided in French, Italian and Spanish.
ii
Preface
Release 12/02
SIMATIC Customer Support Online Services

The SIMATIC Customer Support team offers you substantial additional information about SIMATIC products via its online services: General current information can be obtained
In the Internet under http://www.siemens.com/simatic
Current Product Information leaflets, FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions), Downloads, Tips and Tricks can be obtained
In the Internet under http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support
Training Center
Siemens offers a number of training courses to familiarize you with the SIMATIC S7 automation system. Please contact your regional training center or our central training center in D 90327 Nuremberg, Germany for details. Telephone: Internet: E-Mail: +49 (911) 895-3200 http://www.sitrain.com info@sitrain.com
Other Sources of Assistance

In case of technical queries, please contact the Siemens representatives in the subsidiaries and branches responsible for your area. The addresses can be found: In the Siemens Catalog ST 80 In the Internet under http://www.siemens.com/automation/partner In the Interactive Catalog CA01 http://www.siemens.com/automation/ca01
iii
Preface
Release 12/02
iv
Release 12/02
Contents
Contents
1 What is ProTool? ........................................................................................ 1-1
1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 Online support ..................................................................................1-3 How to work with ProTool online Help ................................................1-5 How to work with direct Help..............................................................1-8 Overview of the documentation..........................................................1-9 ProTool for the whole SIMATIC HMI device family ............................1-10 ProTool for Windows-based systems ...............................................1-11 ProTool for graphics displays...........................................................1-13 ProTool for text-based displays........................................................1-15
First steps in ProTool................................................................................ 2-1

2.1 2.2 2.3 Starting ProTool................................................................................2-2 Configuring graphics displays ............................................................2-3 Notes on the configuration computer ..................................................2-4
ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 ................................................ 3-1

3.1 3.2 How to start ProTool in SIMATIC STEP 7...........................................3-3 How to restore the symbolic tag connections ......................................3-1
Creating and editing projects ................................................................. 4-3

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.10.1 4.10.2 4.10.3 4.10.4 4.10.5 4.11 4.11.1 4.11.2 4.12 4.12.1 4.12.2 4.12.3 4.12.4 4.13 4.13.1 4.13.2 Fundamental considerations when creating a project ..........................4-4 Defining an operating philosophy .......................................................4-6 Components of a ProTool project.......................................................4-8 Objects in the project window ............................................................4-9 Steps to be taken when creating a project ........................................4-10 PLC drivers ....................................................................................4-11 Area pointers ..................................................................................4-12 Screen partitioning on the operating unit...........................................4-14 Configuration notes for touch panels ................................................4-17 Editing projects...............................................................................4-19 Convertible projects ........................................................................4-20 Copying objects: Between projects and within a project.....................4-21 Undoing and redoing actions ...........................................................4-24 Undoing the last action....................................................................4-26 Redoing the last action....................................................................4-27 Retrieving project information...........................................................4-28 Display in "Cross-Reference" window...............................................4-29 Display at "Project Information" ........................................................4-30 Instructions for editing projects ........................................................4-32 How to create a new project ............................................................4-33 How to open an existing project .......................................................4-34 How to set up area pointers .............................................................4-35 How to display cross-references ......................................................4-36 Example of creating projects............................................................4-37 How to create an OP 37 project .......................................................4-38 How to convert an OP 25 project......................................................4-39
Configuration techniques ........................................................................ 5-1

5.1 Screens............................................................................................5-2
Contents
Release 12/02
5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 5.1.3.1 5.1.3.2 5.1.3.3 5.2 5.2.1 5.2.2 5.2.3 5.2.4 5.2.5 5.2.6 5.2.7 5.2.8 5.2.8.1 5.2.8.2 5.2.8.3 5.2.8.4 5.2.8.5 5.2.8.6 5.2.8.7 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.3.5 5.3.6 5.3.6.1 5.3.6.2 5.3.6.3 5.3.6.4 5.3.6.5 5.3.6.6 5.3.6.7 5.3.6.8 5.3.6.9 5.3.6.10 5.3.6.11 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.3.1 5.4.4 5.4.4.1 5.4.4.2 5.4.5 5.4.5.1 5.4.5.2 5.5 5.5.1 5.5.2
Screen objects in ProTool ................................................................. 5-5 Custom project user interface in ProTool............................................ 5-7 Instructions for creating screens ........................................................ 5-8 How to set a screen as the start screen:............................................. 5-9 How to work with grouped screen objects ........................................ 5-10 How to work with several screen objects.......................................... 5-11 Display elements............................................................................ 5-13 What is static text?......................................................................... 5-14 What are character graphics?.......................................................... 5-15 Graphics........................................................................................ 5-16 What are output fields?................................................................... 5-18 What are trend views?.................................................................... 5-19 What are bar graphs?..................................................................... 5-20 What are light indicators?................................................................ 5-21 Instructions for configuring display elements .................................... 5-22 How to configure static text............................................................. 5-23 How to configure character graphics................................................ 5-24 How to configure output fields for alphanumeric values ..................... 5-25 How to configure output fields for symbolic values ............................ 5-26 How to configure bar graphs ........................................................... 5-27 How to configure trend views .......................................................... 5-28 How to configure light indicators ...................................................... 5-29 Controls......................................................................................... 5-30 What are input fields?..................................................................... 5-31 What are combined input/output fields?............................................ 5-32 What are function keys? ................................................................. 5-33 What are buttons?.......................................................................... 5-35 Using buttons as direct keys ........................................................... 5-38 Instructions for configuring controls.................................................. 5-40 How to configure input fields for symbolic values .............................. 5-41 How to configure input fields for numeric or alphanumeric values ...... 5-42 How to configure combined input/output fields .................................. 5-43 How to assign function keys globally................................................ 5-44 How to assign function keys (soft keys) locally ................................. 5-45 How to work with function keys (soft keys) ....................................... 5-46 How to configure buttons ................................................................ 5-47 How to configure the Select Screen button....................................... 5-48 How to configure the Set/Reset Bit button ........................................ 5-49 How to configure direct keys ........................................................... 5-50 How to configure the PROFIBUS Screen Number function................ 5-51 Tags .............................................................................................. 5-52 Properties of tags ........................................................................... 5-55 Updating tags................................................................................. 5-57 Instructions for configuring tags ....................................................... 5-58 How to configure a tag .................................................................... 5-59 Examples of configuring tags .......................................................... 5-60 How to set the acquisition cycle and the standard clock pulse ........... 5-61 Tag scaling .................................................................................... 5-62 Details on configuring tags .............................................................. 5-64 Decimal places with tags................................................................. 5-65 Address and type of a tag ............................................................... 5-66 Multiplexing.................................................................................... 5-67 Multiplexing a bar graph.................................................................. 5-68 Multiplexing trends ......................................................................... 5-69
vi
Release 12/02
Contents
5.5.3 5.5.4 5.5.5 5.5.5.1 5.5.5.2 5.5.5.3 5.5.5.4 5.5.6 5.5.6.1 5.6 5.7 5.7.1 5.7.1.1 5.7.1.2 5.7.1.3 5.7.1.4 5.7.1.5 5.8 5.8.1 5.8.1.1 5.8.2 5.8.2.1 5.8.2.2 5.8.2.3 5.9 5.9.1 5.9.2 5.9.3 5.9.4 5.9.5 5.9.6 5.9.7 5.9.8 5.9.9 5.9.10 5.9.11 5.9.12 5.9.13 5.9.14 5.9.15 5.9.15.1 5.9.15.2 5.9.15.3 5.9.15.4 5.9.15.5 5.9.15.6 5.9.15.7 5.9.15.8 5.9.15.9 5.9.15.10 5.9.15.11 5.9.16 5.9.16.1 5.9.16.2
Multiplexing trend tags ....................................................................5-70 Multiplexing input/output fields .........................................................5-72 Instructions for multiplexing .............................................................5-73 How to multiplex bar graphs ............................................................5-74 How to multiplex trends ...................................................................5-75 How to multiplex trend tags..............................................................5-76 How to multiplex input/output fields ..................................................5-77 Examples of multiplexing.................................................................5-78 How to multiplex bar graphs ............................................................5-79 Text or graphic lists.........................................................................5-80 Creating Graphics...........................................................................5-81 Instructions for configuring graphics .................................................5-82 How to configure graphics ...............................................................5-83 How to create distortion-free graphics ..............................................5-84 How to change the size of vector graphics........................................5-85 How to edit bitmaps.........................................................................5-86 How to change the size and section of OLE objects ..........................5-87 Trends ...........................................................................................5-88 Instructions for configuring trends ....................................................5-90 How to configure trends...................................................................5-91 Details for configuring trends ...........................................................5-92 How a bit trigger works....................................................................5-93 Array tags for history trends .............................................................5-94 Interrupting the recording of trend data.............................................5-95 Messages.......................................................................................5-96 Displaying operating and process states ..........................................5-97 The components of a message ........................................................5-98 Message properties....................................................................... 5-100 Acknowledging messages ............................................................. 5-102 Driving a port/relay ........................................................................ 5-103 Settings for message classes ........................................................ 5-104 System messages ........................................................................ 5-105 Logging messages ........................................................................ 5-106 Configuring printers for the operating unit ....................................... 5-107 Displaying messages on the operating unit..................................... 5-108 Contents of message buffers ......................................................... 5-109 Type of message view (message window or message line)!............. 5-111 What does the message indicator show?........................................ 5-112 Communication areas for messages .............................................. 5-113 Message procedures:.................................................................... 5-114 Message bit procedure.................................................................. 5-115 Message number procedure ALARM_S.......................................... 5-117 Display classes............................................................................. 5-119 Setting the message procedure and selecting the display classes.... 5-121 Configuring ALARM_S messages .................................................. 5-124 Incorporating ALARM_S messages................................................ 5-125 Updating the operating unit............................................................ 5-126 Resource consumption of messages .............................................. 5-127 Communication sequence in the event of ALARM_S messages....... 5-128 Acknowledging ALARM_S messages............................................. 5-130 Printing ALARM_S messages ........................................................ 5-131 Instructions for configuring messages............................................. 5-132 How to configure messages........................................................... 5-133 How to copy messages ................................................................. 5-134
vii
Contents
Release 12/02
5.9.16.3 5.9.16.4 5.9.16.5 5.9.17 5.9.17.1 5.9.17.2 5.9.17.3 5.9.17.4 5.9.17.5 5.9.17.6 5.9.17.7 5.9.17.8 5.10 5.10.1 5.10.2 5.10.3 5.10.4 5.10.5 5.10.6 5.10.6.1 5.10.7 5.10.7.1 5.10.7.2 5.11 5.11.1 5.11.2 5.11.3 5.11.3.1 5.11.3.2 5.12 5.12.1 5.12.2 5.12.3 5.12.4 5.12.5 5.12.6 5.12.7 5.12.8 5.12.8.1 5.12.8.2 5.12.8.3 5.12.8.4 5.12.8.5 5.12.8.6 5.12.8.7 5.13 5.13.1 5.13.2 5.13.3 5.13.4 5.13.5 5.13.6 5.13.7 5.13.8
How to select display classes for diagnostics ................................. 5-135 How to configure a printer for the operating unit.............................. 5-136 How to import and export message text ......................................... 5-138 Examples of configuring messages................................................ 5-139 How to configure alarm messages ................................................. 5-140 "Edit Message" standard screen on the TP 27................................ 5-142 Message areas for SIMATIC S5 .................................................... 5-144 Message areas for SIMATIC S7 .................................................... 5-145 How to move alarm messages to the background........................... 5-146 How to select a printer on the operating unit................................... 5-147 Example of a system message...................................................... 5-148 Event messages export file ........................................................... 5-149 Functions ..................................................................................... 5-151 Events for triggering functions ....................................................... 5-153 Function parameters..................................................................... 5-155 Combining multiple functions......................................................... 5-157 Buttons with fixed functions ........................................................... 5-159 Displaying date and time............................................................... 5-160 Guide to configuring functions ....................................................... 5-161 How to configure functions ............................................................ 5-162 Example of configuring a function .................................................. 5-164 How to change the operating mode with a current display ............... 5-165 How to display and change the date on the operating unit............... 5-170 Recipes ....................................................................................... 5-172 Configuring a recipe...................................................................... 5-175 Transferring data records .............................................................. 5-178 Instructions for configuring recipes................................................. 5-180 How to create a recipe .................................................................. 5-181 How to transfer data records ......................................................... 5-187 Prompting the operator ................................................................. 5-189 Help information on the operating unit............................................ 5-190 Icons for local function keys .......................................................... 5-191 Showing and hiding objects........................................................... 5-192 Dynamic attributes........................................................................ 5-193 Evaluating key operation............................................................... 5-194 Light-emitting diodes on the operating unit ..................................... 5-195 Assigning operator permissions ..................................................... 5-196 Operator prompting instructions..................................................... 5-198 How to provide Help text............................................................... 5-199 How to hide an object ................................................................... 5-200 How to configure dynamic attributes .............................................. 5-201 How to evaluate key operation....................................................... 5-202 How to drive light-emitting diodes .................................................. 5-203 How to assign icons to local function keys...................................... 5-204 How to assign operator authorization ............................................. 5-205 Configuring in foreign languages ................................................... 5-206 System requirements for foreign languages.................................... 5-207 Languages in ProTool................................................................... 5-208 Languages of standard projects and system messages .................. 5-211 Language dependent fonts............................................................ 5-213 Language dependent keyboard assignment ................................... 5-214 Reference text ............................................................................. 5-215 Steps to creating a multilingual project........................................... 5-216 Exchanging text with translators .................................................... 5-218
viii
Release 12/02
Contents
5.13.9 5.13.10 5.13.11 5.13.11.1 5.13.11.2 5.13.11.3 5.13.11.4 5.13.11.5 5.13.11.6 5.13.11.7 5.13.11.8 5.13.11.9 5.13.11.10
Requirements for configuring in Asian languages ............................ 5-220 Constraints on projects in Asian languages..................................... 5-221 Instructions for configuring on foreign languages............................. 5-223 How to choose project languages .................................................. 5-224 How to delete a project language ................................................... 5-225 How to select online languages for the operating unit ...................... 5-226 How to change the editing language............................................... 5-227 How to work with the reference language ....................................... 5-228 How to enter foreign-language special characters ........................... 5-229 How to export text from ProTool..................................................... 5-230 How to import text into ProTool ...................................................... 5-232 How to configure a language change.............................................. 5-233 How to print special characters on the operating unit printer............. 5-235
Testing projects.......................................................................................... 6-1

6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.5 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.5.4 6.5.5 Transferring the executable project file ...............................................6-2 Peculiarities of MPI download ............................................................6-4 Directly accessing values on the PLC (Status/Force tag).....................6-5 Troubleshooting................................................................................6-6 Error messages during compilation ....................................................6-7 Error messages while downloading....................................................6-8 Instructions for testing projects ........................................................6-10 How to compile the project ..............................................................6-11 How to localize screen objects.........................................................6-12 How to download the executable project file......................................6-13 Serial transfer .................................................................................6-14 MPI download.................................................................................6-15
Documenting and managing projects .................................................. 7-1

7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.5.1 7.5.2 7.5.3 7.5.4 7.5.5 7.5.6 7.5.7 7.5.8 7.6 7.6.1 Printing project data..........................................................................7-2 Project management with integrated operation....................................7-4 Managing projects in stand-alone operation........................................7-5 Constraints with printing ....................................................................7-8 Instructions for documenting and managing projects ...........................7-9 How to print selected data ...............................................................7-10 How to determine the degree of detail on a printout...........................7-12 How to define the layout of a printout ...............................................7-13 How to create your own printed reports ............................................7-14 How to work with Project Manager ...................................................7-15 How to back up a project .................................................................7-17 How to restore a project ..................................................................7-18 How to delete a project....................................................................7-19 Example of documenting a project ...................................................7-20 How to create a customized printout.................................................7-21
Tips for efficient configuration............................................................... 8-1

8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 Optimizing performance ....................................................................8-2 Making optimum use of graphics........................................................8-3 Creating graphics..............................................................................8-4 Libraries in ProTool...........................................................................8-5 Using a tag in several fields ...............................................................8-7 Tags with configured decimal places ..................................................8-8 Tips on touch panels .........................................................................8-9
ix
Contents
Release 12/02
Reference......................................................................................................9-1
9.1 9.1.1 9.1.2 9.1.3 9.1.4 9.1.5 9.1.6 9.1.7 9.1.8 9.1.9 9.1.10 9.1.11 9.1.12 9.1.13 9.1.14 9.1.15 9.1.16 9.1.17 9.1.18 9.1.19 9.1.20 9.1.21 9.1.22 9.1.23 9.1.24 9.1.25 9.1.26 9.1.27 9.1.28 9.1.29 9.1.30 9.1.31 9.1.32 9.1.33 9.1.34 9.1.35 9.1.36 9.1.37 9.1.38 9.1.39 9.1.40 9.1.41 9.1.42 9.1.43 9.1.44 9.1.45 9.1.46 9.1.47 9.1.48 9.1.49 9.1.50 9.1.51 9.1.52 Functions Reference......................................................................... 9-2 Configurable Events ......................................................................... 9-3 Functions, thematically ..................................................................... 9-6 Functions, alphabetically................................................................. 9-12 Acoustic Signal (function)................................................................ 9-15 Adjust Contrast (function)................................................................ 9-17 Alarms - Delete Buffer..................................................................... 9-18 Alarms - Display First/Last (function)................................................ 9-19 Automatic Graphics Printing (function)............................................. 9-21 Backup/Restore (function)............................................................... 9-22 Blank Screen (function)................................................................... 9-25 Buffer Overflow Warning (function).................................................. 9-27 Change AM Page/Buffer (function) .................................................. 9-29 Change EM Page/Buffer (function) .................................................. 9-30 Clean Screen (function) .................................................................. 9-31 Date and Time (function)................................................................. 9-32 Date Display/Edit (function)............................................................. 9-33 Direct Key (function)....................................................................... 9-34 Display Alarm Messages (function).................................................. 9-36 Display Event Messages (function) .................................................. 9-37 Display Help Text (function) ............................................................ 9-38 Display Messages (function) ........................................................... 9-39 Dynamic Screen Selection 1 (function)............................................. 9-41 Dynamic Screen Selection 2 (function)............................................. 9-42 Events - Delete Buffer (function)...................................................... 9-44 Event Window (function)................................................................. 9-45 Graphics Mode for Print Screen List (function).................................. 9-47 Initialize Bit in Startup (function) ...................................................... 9-48 Language (function)........................................................................ 9-49 Message Filters (function) ............................................................... 9-51 Message Log ON/OFF (function) ..................................................... 9-54 Mode (function).............................................................................. 9-56 Operate Message Screen (function)................................................. 9-58 Print Messages (function)................................................................ 9-60 Print Messages with Filter 1 (function).............................................. 9-61 Print Messages with Filter 2 (function).............................................. 9-63 Print Screen List (function) .............................................................. 9-65 PROFIBUS Screen Number (function)............................................. 9-67 Reset Bit (function) ......................................................................... 9-69 Reset Bit in Word (function)............................................................. 9-70 Reset BOOL Tag (function)............................................................. 9-72 Scaling Linear 1 (function)............................................................... 9-74 Scaling Linear 2 (function)............................................................... 9-76 Scaling Square 1 (function)............................................................. 9-78 Scaling Square 2 (function)............................................................. 9-80 Scroll DOWN (function)................................................................... 9-82 Scroll UP (function)......................................................................... 9-83 Select Previous Screen (function).................................................... 9-84 Select Screen (function).................................................................. 9-85 Set Bit (function)............................................................................. 9-86 Set Bit in Word (function) ................................................................ 9-87 Set Bit When Key Is Pressed (function)............................................ 9-89 Set BOOL Tag (function)................................................................. 9-92
Release 12/02
Contents
9.1.53 9.1.54 9.1.55 9.1.56 9.1.57 9.1.58 9.1.59 9.1.60 9.1.61 9.2 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.2.3 9.2.4 9.2.5 9.2.6 9.2.7 9.2.8 9.2.9 9.2.10 9.2.11 9.2.12 9.2.13 9.2.14 9.2.15 9.2.16 9.2.17 9.2.18 9.2.19 9.2.20 9.2.21 9.2.22 9.2.23 9.2.24 9.2.25 9.2.26 9.3 9.4 9.4.1 9.4.2 9.4.3 9.4.4 9.4.5 9.5 9.5.1 9.6
Set Initial Tag Value (function).........................................................9-94 Set/Reset Bit (function)....................................................................9-96 Set/Reset Bit in Word (function).......................................................9-97 Short Message Page Screen (function) ............................................9-99 Start/Stop Print Screen (function)................................................... 9-101 Tag: Set Value (function)............................................................... 9-102 Tag: Value Minus/Plus (function).................................................... 9-103 Time Display/Edit (function) ........................................................... 9-105 Touch Calibration (function)........................................................... 9-106 PLC jobs reference ....................................................................... 9-107 PLC jobs in alphabetical order ....................................................... 9-108 PLC jobs in numerical order........................................................... 9-110 Alarm Message Display Mode (PLC job No. 21).............................. 9-111 Alarm Message Overflow Warning ON/OFF (PLC job No. 38).......... 9-111 Alarms - Delete Buffer (PLC job No. 50) ......................................... 9-111 Blank Screen (PLC job No. 2) ........................................................ 9-112 Drive Port/Set Relay (PLC job No. 4).............................................. 9-112 Event Message Overflow Warning ON/OFF (PLC job No. 37).......... 9-113 Events - Delete Buffer (PLC job No. 49) ......................................... 9-113 Fetch Acknowledgement Area from PLC (PLC job No. 45)............... 9-113 Fetch Alarm Message Area from PLC (PLC job No. 44)................... 9-113 Fetch Event Message Area from PLC (PLC job No. 43)................... 9-114 Fetch LED Area from PLC (PLC job No. 42) ................................... 9-114 Language (PLC job No. 13) ........................................................... 9-114 Message Logging ON/OFF (PLC job No. 12) .................................. 9-115 Password Logout (PLC job No. 24) ................................................ 9-115 Position Cursor on Current Screen (PLC job No. 72) ....................... 9-115 Print Screen (PLC job No. 3).......................................................... 9-116 Select Screen (PLC job No. 51) ..................................................... 9-116 Set Date (BCD-Coded) (PLC job No. 15) ........................................ 9-116 Set Password Level (PLC job No. 23)............................................. 9-117 Set Time (BCD-Coded) (PLC job No. 14)........................................ 9-117 Transfer Date/Time to PLC (PLC job No. 41) .................................. 9-118 Transfer LED Area Directly to Operating Unit (PLC job No. 47) ........ 9-118 Transfer Recipe Data Record from PLC to TP/OP (PLC job No. 69) . 9-119 Transfer Recipe Data Record from TP/OP to PLC (PLC job No. 70) . 9-119 Standard screens reference........................................................... 9-120 Communication areas for non-SIMATIC PLCs ................................ 9-122 Structure of the interface area for non-SIMATIC PLCs..................... 9-123 Control and acknowledgement bits for non-SIMATIC PLCs.............. 9-125 Data areas in the interface area for non-SIMATIC PLCs .................. 9-129 Keyboard assignment of the operating unit for non-SIMATIC PLCs .. 9-131 LED assignment of the operating unit for non-SIMATIC PLCs .......... 9-134 Libraries in ProTool....................................................................... 9-136 How to work with the SIMATIC HMI Symbol Library ........................ 9-138 Abbreviations................................................................................ 9-140
xi
Contents
Release 12/02
xii
Release 12/02
What is ProTool?
What is ProTool?
Configuring graphics displays ProTool is an innovative configuration software package for the whole SIMATIC HMI family. You use the same configuration software to configure all the devices in the family. Regardless of the device for which you are creating your project, ProTool always presents you with the same, familiar user interface.
Example of the structure:
Example of PC as configuration computer and OP 37 as operating unit
ProTool is easy to use ProTool is a Windows application for Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows 2000 and Windows NT. The fully graphical user interface allows you to create objectoriented, symbol-based projects easily by mouse click. No special programming knowledge is required. You can continue to use the Windows applications with which you are familiar to transfer graphics to your project, for example.
1-1
What is ProTool?
Release 12/02
ProTool is versatile The editors provided in ProTool can be called simultaneously. You can also open different projects, even those of different devices, simultaneously and transfer data via the clipboard from one project to another. ProTool can also be integrated in the SIMATIC STEP 7 configuration software, thus allowing you to select SIMATIC STEP 7 symbols and data blocks as tags in ProTool. This not only saves you time and money but also eliminates the possibility of errors made when entering the same data several times. You fill find more information about the configuration of ProTool with SIMATIC STEP 7 at "Configuring with ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7".
Offline configuration With ProTool you create and edit your projects offline. The device need not yet be available at this time. The configuration computer displays the configured project data as displayed later on the device. On completion of configuration you can download the executable project file from the configuration computer to the device.
1-2
Release 12/02
What is ProTool?
1.1
Online support
ProTool online information ProTool supports you in your work with wide-ranging and flexible Help information. Depending on the current situation and your personal requirement for information, decide whether you want detailed background information, specific instructions on what to do, examples or merely a brief note on how a control element functions.
Information on the status bar The status bar is the bar at the bottom border of the ProTool window. It contains general and editor-specific information. General information includes, for example, the operating unit you have set and the current editing language. Editor-specific information relates, for example, to details concerning area pointers in the message editor, on the current screen area in the screen editor or on the selected report in the editor for headers and footers. The status bar also displays information on menu commands and buttons on the toolbars.
Information on menu commands and buttons You obtain brief information on menu commands and buttons on the toolbar by holding the mouse pointer over the corresponding element (refer to the figure). At the same time, a brief description of the function is displayed on the status bar.
The ProTool information system The ProTool information system provides access to the whole range of ProTool documentation at all times while you are configuring. It contains the following component: Complete documentation for ProTool, for all device classes Documentation for option packs, add-ons and drivers, to the extent installed Access to different pdf documents that are supplied with ProTool The "Release Notes" More user manuals such as "Getting Started".
The ProTool information system contains two sections: in the navigation section on the left side, several tabs feature access options to the Help topics. The subject section, on the right, displays the different Help topics. You open the ProTool information system from the Start bar of the PC: "Start" > "SIMATIC" > "ProTool CS" > "ProTool Information System".
1-3
What is ProTool?
Release 12/02
ProTool direct Help ProTool direct Help contains detailed information about buttons, icons, windows and dialog boxes in ProTool. When you select direct Help, a Help window opens. The figure shows an example.
In the Help window you can call on further Help from the ProTool information system, should you require more information. ProTool presents you with the following types of information: Background and background information With this you select background information about a topic - for example, definitions and concepts. Guidance With this you retrieve specific instructions on what to do. Examples Use this to open application examples and sample cases.
1-4
Release 12/02
What is ProTool?
1.1.1
How to work with ProTool online Help
Opening online Help Menu command "?" > "Help Topics" "Contents" tab: On this tab you can see the graphic contents of the online documentation. They show all the available topics, sorted into categories. You go directly in one step from direct Help to the topic.
From direct Help
Tabs in navigation section The navigation section is located in the left of online Help. Your tabs provide you with access options for the Help topics: "Contents" Contains a hierarchical overview of all Help topics that you retrieve directly from here. "Index" Here you can search through indexed terms for Help topics and display the topics you find. "Find" Here you can perform a full-text search in the documentation and display in Help the topics containing the search term "Favorites" Here you can store topics which you will always need. You can then select them without having to search for them first.
Navigating with the mouse After opening online Help, you have the following options with the featured buttons: Buttons at top Click this button to hide the navigation section of the information system with its "Contents", "Index" and "Find" tabs. The information system will then take up less space on the screen. When the navigation area is hidden, you can display it again by clicking this button. If the navigation section is hidden, the contents display is not updated upon a change of topics. Click this button to scroll back to the previous page. Click this button to scroll forward to the next page.
1-5
What is ProTool?
Release 12/02
Click this button to open the glossary. The "Download File" window appears. Select "File" from your present location to open the glossary in a separate window. Navigation on the "Contents" tab Click this button to view the lower-levels in the hierarchy of a book. Double-click on the illustrated button to open a Help topic and simultaneously display the lower levels in the hierarchy. Double-click the symbol illustrated to open a Help topic. Navigation on a Help page Click this button to retrieve more information about a topic, such as definitions and concepts or details. Click this button to open step-by step instructions on what to do. Click this button to retrieve application examples and sample cases. Instructions on what to do contain specific values. Navigating with the keyboard You have the same navigation options when working with the keyboard as you have with the mouse. ALT + RIGHT ALT + LEFT LEFT RIGHT UP DOWN CTRL + TAB Arrow keys ENTER Scroll forward one page. Scroll back one page. Move the scroll bar in the active window to left. Move the scroll bar in the active window to right. Move the scroll bar up in the active window. Move the scroll bar down in the active window. Switch from one tab to another (Contents, Index, Find and Favorites). Navigate in Contents. View a topic you have selected on one of the tabs in the navigation section. Trigger a previously selected button. F6 TAB Toggle between the navigation section and the subject section. Switch between the buttons in the subject section.
1-6
Release 12/02
What is ProTool?
Full-text search on the "Find" tab On the "Find" tab, there are various options for making your search as efficient as possible: Use quotation marks to search for compound expressions such as "configure graphic". Use asterisks if you are not certain about the precise wording; for example, the query *messages information retrieves event messages, process messages, etc. The last search terms you entered are saved in a list and can be retrieved again.
Click the arrow next to the input field to make your search more specific with operands; for example, "graphic" AND "configure". Search in result: If you select the "Search Previous Results" check box after a search operation, you can search the pages found with a new term to define your search strategy more precisely. Make sure that you deselect the check box before performing the next global search. Sort your search results by clicking the "Title" or "Position" button of the results list. Titel: Search results are sorted in alphabetical order. Position: This function is very useful when you are searching in the ProTool Information System. You can then sort your results by hits in Help for Windows-based devices, textbased devices, graphics devices, ProSave etc. Select the "Look in title only" check box if you only want to search in the titles of the different topics and not perform a full-text search.
1-7
What is ProTool?
Release 12/02
1.1.2
How to work with direct Help
Press F1 to open When configuring, you can open direct Help at all times by pressing "F1".
Open by clicking a button Procedure: 1 Open direct Help by clicking one of the following buttons: On the ProTool toolbar to obtain help with buttons, icons and windows in ProTool. On the title bar of an open dialog box to obtain help for this dialog box. The mouse pointer is transformed into a question mark. 2 3 Click the dialog element on which you require help. Direct Help opens. Use the colored navigation aids in direct Help to go to the ProTool information system and obtain further information, step-by-step instructions or examples. Depending on the icon, you obtain the following types of information:
1-8
Release 12/02
What is ProTool?
1.2
Overview of the documentation

The SIMATIC HMI documentation is made up of a combination of manuals, instructions and online Help in keeping with the range of target groups. This chapter provides a broad outline.
1-9
What is ProTool?
Release 12/02
1.2.1
ProTool for the whole SIMATIC HMI device family
The SIMATIC HMI device family The SIMATIC HMI device family is a complete family of text displays, operator panels, touch panels and Windows-based systems for efficient machine operation and monitoring. The performance and convenience of the devices are finely tuned to suit the individual demands made of them.
SIMATIC HMI operating units The great advantage is that you configure all the devices with the same configuration software.
1-10
Release 12/02
What is ProTool?
1.2.2
ProTool for Windows-based systems
Devices The "ProTool - Configuring Windows-Based Systems" documentation tells you how to configure the following devices: Panels TP 170A TP 170B TP 170B Color TP 270 (6" and 10") OP 170B OP 270 (6" and 10") Mobile Panels Mobile Panel 170 Multi Panels MP 270B MP 270B TOUCH MP 270 MP 370 MP 370 TOUCH MP 370 15 TOUCH Panel PCs FI 25 FI 45 PC 670 10 PC 670 12 PC 670 15 PC 670 12 TOUCH PC 670 15 TOUCH PC 870 12" PC 870 15" PC 870 15" TOUCH PC IL 70 12" TOUCH PC IL 70 15" TOUCH SINUMERIK Panels OP 010 OP 012 OP 015 SIMOTION Panels PC
1-11
What is ProTool?
Release 12/02
Example: MP 370
1-12
Release 12/02
What is ProTool?
1.2.3
ProTool for graphics displays
Devices The "ProTool - Configuring Graphics Displays" documentation tells you how to configure the following operating units: Graphics-oriented operator panels OP 27 OP 37 Touch panels TP 27-6 TP 27-10 TP 37 C7 devices
C7-626 (OP 25 with integrated S7-CPU)
Example: TP 37
1-13
What is ProTool?
Release 12/02
1.2.4
ProTool for text-based displays
Devices The "ProTool - Configuring Text-Based Displays" documentation tells you how to configure the following operating units: Text-oriented operator panels OP 3 OP 7 OP 17 Text displays TD 17 C7 devices C7-621 (OP C7-623 (OP C7-624 (OP C7-633 (OP C7-634 (OP 3 with integrated S7-CPU) 5 with integrated S7-CPU) 15 with integrated S7-CPU) 7 with integrated S7-CPU) 17 with integrated S7-CPU)
Example: OP 7
1-14
Release 12/02
First steps in ProTool

Here you learn how to start ProTool, configure graphics-based systems, and what you should look out for while you are configuring.
2-1
Release 12/02
2.1
Starting ProTool
Starting ProTool After ProTool has been installed, you will find a folder on the Start menu called Simatic, containing the following icons: ProTool Pro CS v. 6.0 Calls online Help. Starts the configuration software. Shows late-breaking information on the configuration software. Starts Setup in order, say, to change the ProTool language or to add a component. ProTool Pro RT v. 6.0 Copies the compiled project file in compressed form. Starts the runtime software. Shows late-breaking information on the runtime software. Starts the simulation software. Starts the Loader.
ProSave v. 6.0 Opens ProSave as a stand-alone application.
2-2
Release 12/02
2.2
Configuring graphics displays
Getting Started If you are not all that familiar with the ProTool visualization software, we would recommend you read the short guide and get started with ProTool with the help of the example. The printed version is enclosed with the manual. You will find a print-compatible version of the short guide by clicking the button alongside.
Requirements for working with the brief introduction To do the exercises for ProTool in this brief introduction, you require a PC as a configuration computer The ProTool software package An operating unit, such as the OP 27 or TP 37
Other documents on ProTool You will find the electronic manuals on the installation CD at: Docs\..\UsersManual_Graph. pdf You can find all the information contained in this manual in ProTool's online Help.
2-3
Release 12/02
2.3
Notes on the configuration computer
Notes on the configuration computer So that you can work as efficiently as possible when you are configuring, give due consideration to the following notes for your configuration computer: Close applications Close all other programs. In this way more main memory will be available for ProTool. Configurations on a local drive Do not start projects from networks, but from your local drive. Network access times are frequently too long. Available disk storage Your drive should have free disk storage space. Take note of Microsoft'srecommendations for the Windows system in this respect. More working memory Memory requirements rise in proportion to the number and size of the screen objects you are using. An increase in available main memory reduces processing times considerably. System resources Make sure when you are working with ProTool that you have 20 to 40 MB of main memory available and at least 65% free system resources. You will find information on this topic in Explorer by choosing "Help" > "About". Increase the size of your main memory with additional RAM or virtual memory, as necessary. Additional system resources are released by closing other applications. Environment tag TEMP In Windows, a temporary file is created for files when they are opened and processed. You decide where this temporary file is stored by means of the TEMP environment tag. The path of the TEMP environment tag is normally set in the autoexec.bat file. If the TEMP environment tag is not placed in the autoexec.bat system file, the temporary file is stored in the local Windows directory. If an error message is issued by ProTool that indicates an error upon write access, the storage space on the drive might be too small for the temporary file. In Windows 2000, the environment variable "TEMP" is set at "Start" > "Settings" > "Control Panel" > "System" > "Advanced" tab > "Environment variables" button. In Win NT 4.0, you set it at "Start" > "Settings" > "Control Panel > "System", "Environment" tab.
2-4
Release 12/02
ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7
Requirements If the PLC you are using is a SIMATIC PLC and you have installed STEP 7 configuration software on your system, you can integrate ProTool in SIMATIC STEP 7.
Advantages of STEP 7 integration With integrated configuration, you access the database that you created when you configured the PLC in SIMATIC STEP 7. You then have the following advantages: You can use SIMATIC Manager as a central point for creating, editing and managing ProTool projects. The communication parameters of the PLC are created as default values when you create your ProTool project and reset when SIMATIC STEP 7 is changed.
Example of the "Driver Parameters" dialog box with STEP 7 integration: network parameters and parameters of the peer are set as default values.
3-1
Release 12/02
When configuring tags and area pointers, you can directly access the STEP 7 data in ProTool. Simply select the STEP 7 icon in the ProTool tag dialog box to which you wish to connect a tag. Changes to the symbol table in SIMATIC STEP 7 are updated in ProTool. You assign symbolic names once only and use them in SIMATIC STEP 7 and ProTool. For this purpose, you must assign as name to a DB (data block) in the SIMATIC STEP 7 symbol table. If this is not the case, this DB is not offered for selection in the ProTool "Tags" dialog box.
ALARM_S messages configured in SIMATIC STEP 7 are supported by ProTool and can be output to the operating unit.
Switching STEP 7 integration from ProTool When you have integrated your ProTool installation in SIMATIC STEP 7, you can choose "File" from the ProTool menu and then the option "ProTool-Integration in STEP 7". This means that you can integrate ProTool to SIMATIC STEP 7 or operate it on its own. ProTool is automatically restarted following a change of the integration mode. Integration of ProTool in SIMATIC STEP 7 is still possible in "ProTool Setup", irrespective of this. In integrated mode, you can also make a copy of individual projects outside STEP 7 so that they be processed on their own (stand-alone) in ProTool (for example, on a different configuration computer).
Integrating individual ProTool projects and copy outside STEP 7 Stand-alone ProTool projects cannot be opened directly in SIMATIC Manager. To include projects like this in a STEP 7 project, they have to be integrated. To do this, choose in ProTool the "File" > "Integrate in STEP 7-Project" option from the menu. If, conversely, you wish to edit projects that were integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 as stand-alone projects in ProTool without SIMATIC STEP 7 being available, you must first unintegrate the projects. To do this, choose in ProTool the "File" > "Copy outside STEP 7-Project" option from the menu. Note When you open a stand-alone project, there can no longer be automatic synchronization of the database between SIMATIC STEP 7 and ProTool. You therefore have to ensure that the shared database is resynchronized (for example, by re-integrating) if changes are made to the STEP 7 program.
3-2
Release 12/02
3.1
How to start ProTool in SIMATIC STEP 7
General There are two ways in which you can start ProTool in SIMATIC STEP 7: By means of SIMATIC Manager Directly in Windows
Starting ProTool with SIMATIC Manager Procedure: 1 2 3 4 Start SIMATIC Manager. Select a STEP 7 project, or create a new STEP 7 project. Choose the "Paste" > "Station" > "SIMATIC OP" option from the menu, and enter a name for the ProTool project. Start ProTool by double-clicking the ProTool project. Then select the operating unit for the project.
Starting ProTool in Windows Start ProTool directly under Windows. Choose "File" > "New" from the menu to open a dialog box in which you can select a STEP 7 project and create a ProTool project in it. You then select the operating unit.
Example of the "New" dialog box for integrating STEP 7
3-3
Release 12/02
3-4
Release 12/02
3.2
How to restore the symbolic tag connections
Background The connection between a S7-CPU and a ProTool PLC might be lost. This means that there is then no conenction between the STEP 7 symbols and ProTool tags, either. The following causes are possible for this: 1. Reuse of a ProTool project in another STEP 7 project. Note If the S7-CPU is copied together with the ProTool project within STEP 7 to a new STEP 7 project, the connections are retained. 2. Integration of a ProTool project into a STEP 7 project. 3. Replacement of an S7-CPU in the STEP 7 project. The CPU swop within STEP 7 HWCONFIG is not normally affected by this. Note The ProTool tags concerned are reported in the output window when the project is opened. Procedure: Perform the following steps to restore the connections between ProTool tags and STEP 7 symbols. Procedure: 1 In ProTool CS, in the "Properties" dialog box, connect the ProTool PLC to the corresponding STEP 7 CPU by means of the "Parameters" button. When doing so, you receive a message to the effect that the connection of the tag to the STEP 7 symbols has been restored. 2 3 In ProTool CS, choose "Edit" > "Restore Symbols". From then on, the following cases are possible for the STEP 7 symbol used in the ProTool tag: 1. A STEP 7 symbol that is used is present 2. A STEP 7 symbol that is used is present but the address in the S7 program is different 3. A STEP 7 symbol that is used is not present in the STEP 7 symbols, but another STEP 7 symbol having the same address is present 4. A STEP 7 symbol that is used is not present and there is no other STEP 7 symbol that has the same address In case 1, the ProTool tag is linked to the STEP 7 symbol. In case 4, an error message is issued, and the ProTool tag cannot be linked and has to be corrected manually.
3-1
Release 12/02
Procedure: 4 In case 2 and 3, you have the following options: "Connect" button: The ProTool tag is linked to the STEP 7 symbol. "Disconnect" button: The ProTool tag is identified as not being symbolically linked. "Jump" button: This can be used to postpone the decision to a later run The ProTool tag remains in the error state and is not connected.
After ProTool Tag Management is executed, the symbolic connection is restored to the extent possible.
Note The ProTool tags that could not be successfully connected gain are read out to the output window. Tag connection for SIMOTION
Note The connection to symbols is normally lost as a result of renaming objects in SIMOTION SCOUT. You will find more information in the section "Process communication" > "SIMATIC S7" > "SIMOTION".
3-2
Release 12/02
Creating and editing projects

Here you obtain an overview over: the ProTool project structure the procedure for creating a project copying objects displaying project information
4-3
Release 12/02
4.1
Fundamental considerations when creating a project
Objective You want to operate and monitor a machine or process. To do this, you map the machine or process on the operating unit as accurately as is necessary.
System configuration Communication takes place between the operating unit and the machine or process by means of "tags" via the PLC. The value of a tag is written to a memory area (address) on the PLC, from where it is read by the operating unit. The following diagram provides an overview of the fundamental structure:
A typical structure
Before you begin If you are creating a project for the first time, note the following recommendations: Use the standard screens from the standard projects. When creating a new project, you can select a "standard project" for your system (operating unit and PLC) in the "project assistant". At ...\ProTool\Samples you will also find the example project "Quickmix", which is implemented for various operating units and PLCs. Consider also whether you can use parts of existing projects. Message text and graphics are suitable for this, for example. In the case of operating units from a single device family, it is also possible to copy entire project sections via the Clipboard. The fixed window in the source and destination projects should be the same size.
4-4
Release 12/02
Note The prerequisite for successful copying between projects is that the system limits of the operating unit for which you want to use the copied sections must not be exceeded.
Note Disable the "Cyclic operation" option for the following CPUs of distributed systems in the PLC dialog box: - IM151 (ET200 S CPU) - BM147 (ET200 X CPU) In this way you avoid possible communication problems.
4-5
Release 12/02
4.2
Defining an operating philosophy
Basic procedure Consider which process values or states of the machine you want to display on the operating unit or work with and which object types you will have to configure for the purpose.
1. Create a user interface Screens are the central components of the project, with which you visualize the states of the machine or process and create the prerequisites for operating the machine or process.
Example of screen creation You can create a number of screens with display elements and controls - for switching between screen,for example - for the user interface with which the operator is subsequently faced on the operating unit.
2. Process data entry and transfer In order to enter process data or set new values, you configure input/output fields, for example. This is also possible as a symbolic display.
3. Report process states To acquire and log process and operating states on the operating unit or to archive them, configure messages.
4-6
Release 12/02
4. Defining communication areas A defined address area on the PLC for data interchange with the operating unit is addressed by means of an area pointer. The number of area pointers available varies depending on the selected operating unit
4-7
Release 12/02
4.3
Components of a ProTool project
What objects are there in ProTool? When you open a new or an existing project, the project window opens. The project window displays the object types you can configure on the left and the different objects on the right. The objects that you can configure depend on the type of the operating unit. The various objects are linked directly in ProTool with the tool required to edit them.
What is displayed in the project window? The project data of a ProTool project is stored in the form of objects. The objects in a project are arranged in a tree structure. The "Project" window displays object types that belong to the project and you can configure for the selected operating unit. The project window is comparable with Windows Explorer. The object types contain objects with properties that can be set. The project window is structured as follows: The title bar contains the project name. Depending on the operating unit, the configurable object types are displayed in the left half of the window and the objects you create in the right half.
Example of a project window with tags
Note If you maximize the project window, tabs are displayed for the open windows along the bottom border to enable you to change easily from one window to another.
4-8
Release 12/02
4.4
Objects in the project window
Object symbol
Object type ProTool project Screens Messages Recipes Tags PLCs Text or graphic lists Graphics Trends Area pointers
Object name (default) PRO1 PIC_1 "---" STRUCT_1 VAR_1 PLC_1 LIST_1 GRAPHIC_1 CURVE_1 ---
4-9
Release 12/02
4.5
Steps to be taken when creating a project
Basic procedure 1. Create a new project ("File" > "New" or "File" > "Open"). Choose "File" > "New" to create a new project. The project assistant guides you through a number of selection dialogs. Select your PLC. Select a driver for your PLC. Only those drivers with which the operating unit can be run are displayed. Use a standard project. Select a "standard project" in order to use it as a basis. The project assistant asks you whether you want to enter any more information about the project in the "summary". Click the "Create" button to open the project window. Define communication areas (project window: "Area Pointers"). Define share communication areas (area pointers) so that specific functions such as the "bit message procedure" or "synchronous data record transfer" can be used. Create your project. This is the most involved part of the work. You can approach it in one of two ways: either you create all the individual parts first and then link them to form a meaningful structure (the bottom > up approach), or you begin by designing a structure and then fill it with the individual elements (the top > down approach). As a general rule, perform the following steps for this: Create a user interface with display elements and controls. Configure tags to allow data exchange with the PLC. Configure messages to receive information about the machine status or the process. Partition the display on the operating unit
2.
3. 4.
5.
6.
7. In addition, you can configure additional objects, such as recipes, depending on the operating unit. Note If you modify and save the project several times, the project file gets larger (*.pdb). Reduce the size of the file by choosing "Save As" from the menu. This causes the file structure to be reorganized.
Note When a project created in ProTool for a graphics display is compiled, the path name must not be longer than 128 characters. If a project contains paths longer than 128 characters, compilation is aborted and the following error message appears: "Cannot open Project_name.US0. Cannot open Project_name.US1. Cannot open Project_name.US2. Cannot open Project_name.US3." Copy the file to a path having a shorter directory name, or rename the directories.
4-10
Release 12/02
4.6
PLC drivers
Available PLC drivers Select the PLC driver with the project assistant in the "Select PLC" dialog box. You can also define or later edit the parameters there if you select PLC "Properties" in the project window. Note You will find information about the various PLC drivers at "Start" > "SIMATIC" > "ProTool" > "ProTool Information System" in the topic "Process communication". You can select the following drivers for devices with a graphics display: SIMATIC S5 - AS511 SIMATIC S5 - FAP SIMATIC S5 - L2-DP SIMATIC S7-300/400 SIMATIC S7-200 SIMATIC 500/505 Allen-Bradley DF1 Allen-Bradley DH485 GE Fanuc SNP/SNPX FREE SERIAL MITSUBISHI FX Modicon Modbus OMRON Hostlink / Multilink Telemecanique Uni-Telway
Repercussions for tags The address depends on the PLC you are using. The way in which the address of a tag with a PLC connection is displayed depends on the PLC you selected. You select the available data types and data formats in the "Tags" dialog box at "Type" or "Format". You will find an overview of the available data types and data formats that you can select for the PLC driver concerned in the "Communication" user's manual.
4-11
Release 12/02
4.7
Area pointers
What are area pointers for? A defined address area on the PLC for data interchange with the operating unit is addressed by means of an area pointer. You create area pointers in the project window at "Area pointers". You can edit area pointers with all the commands available in the shortcut menu for example, copy and then paste in another project.
What area pointers are available? The number of area pointers available varies depending on the selected operating unit For information on how large the area pointers should be when you create them, and the structure they have to have, refer to the "Communication" user's manual. The overview below lists the various area pointers and what they are used for. The area pointers are sorted in alphabetical order. Area pointers User version Explanation The user version identifies the version of the project. A version check is performed on the PLC by means of this area pointer. You can configure an event message for each bit in this data area. The bits are assigned to the message numbers in ascending order. As soon as the PLC sets a bit in this data area, the operating unit recognizes that the assigned event message has "arrived". Conversely, the operating unit interprets the message as "departed" after the bit is reset on the PLC. Screen number In this data area the operating unit stores information on the current screen. You can evaluate this information in the PLC program to call another screen, for example. The data mailbox is a data area on the PLC. It is used as intermediate storage to download data records from the operating unit to the PLC. The data mailbox contains only the values of the tag. The addresses are not transferred. The operating unit transfers keystrokes of the function keys via this data area. You can evaluate this information in the PLC program in order to indicate incorrect operation by means of a message, for example. The PLC can use this area pointer to determine which trend is currently being displayed on the operating unit.
Event messages
Data mailbox
Function keyboard
Trend request
4-12
Release 12/02
Area pointers Trend transfer area 1
Explanation This data area is used to trigger trends. As soon as the PLC program sets the bit assigned to the trend and the trend communication bit in the trend transfer area, the operating unit detects the trigger and, depending on the configuration, reads out either a value or the entire buffer. This data area is required when you configure trends with a switch buffer. The data area is structured in the same way as the "trend transfer 1" data area. The PLC can use this area pointer to drive the lightemitting diodes on the function keys of the operating unit. The operating unit uses this area pointer to indicate to the PLC which alarm messages have been acknowledged on the operating unit. Messages can be acknowledged from the PLC using this area. The interface area is the interface between PLC program and operating unit. It contains data and pointers to areas required for exchanging data between the PLC and the operating unit. You can configure an alarm message for each bit in this data area. The bits are assigned to the message numbers in ascending order. As soon as the PLC sets a bit in this data area, the operating unit recognizes that the assigned alarm message has "arrived". Conversely, the operating unit interprets the message as "departed" after the bit is reset on the PLC.
Trend transfer area 2
LED assignment
OP Acknowledgement
PLC Acknowledgement Interface area
Alarm messages
System keyboard
The operating unit transfers keystrokes of the system keys via this data area. You can evaluate this information in the PLC program in order to indicate incorrect operation by means of a message, for example.
4-13
Release 12/02
4.8
Screen partitioning on the operating unit
Subdividing the display into several areas Depending on the operating unit for which you create your project, you can partition the display into different areas. These areas are for displaying screens, messages and icons for function keys, for example.
Where do you set the areas? Choose "System" > "Screen/Keys" to set the areas. The settings made here apply to the whole project, so set the areas before you begin configuration. The example below shows one possible way of partitioning the display:
Example of OP 27 display partitioning
Basic area The basic area covers the whole screen. All the other areas are superimposed on parts of the basic area. The position and size of the basic area cannot be changed. Screens are configured in the basic area. The contents of the basic area thus change depending on the screen that is called.
4-14
Release 12/02
Fixed window The fixed window is a window that is always displayed. It uses up part of the basic area. The fixed window can be enabled or disabled at "Screen/Keys". If it is switched on, it is displayed during screen configuration and thus reduces the size of the area available for screens. The size of the fixed window can be changed, but its position is always the same at the top of the screen. The fixed window is configured with the "Screens" editor.
Message indicator The message indicator is a symbol indicating alarm messages that are still applicable on the operating unit. You can enable and disable the message indicator by choosing "System" > "Screen/Keys". You cannot change the size, but you can the position. The message indicator can be used with touch devices.
Message area The message area is the area in which messages are displayed on the operating unit. By choosing "System" > "Screen/Keys", you can set separately for alarm and event messages whether they are displayed on the message line or in a message window. Alarm message window: The alarm message window is the window in which alarm messages appear. The window only opens when there is an alarm message. When you acknowledge the alarm message, the window closes again. The display of alarm messages cannot be switched off. Either an alarm message window or a message line must be configured. The position and size of the alarm message window cannot be configured. Event message window: The event message window is the window in which event messages appear. The window is only displayed when called. You can enable and disable the event message window by choosing "System" > "Screen/Keys" from the menu. The height of the window can be set to one or two lines, depending on the device type. The position can also be changed. Message line: The message line is the area in which alarm and event messages are displayed. In the case of touch panels, only event messages are displayed in the message line. You can enable and disable the message line by choosing "System" > "Screen/Keys" from the menu. The height of the message line can be set to one or two lines, depending on the device type. The position can also be changed.
Icons (OP only) Icons can be placed on the display for soft keys (keys assigned local functions). This is only possible for the "Fx" keys arranged around the display. To find out how to assign keys "globally" or "locally", refer to "Function keys".
4-15
Release 12/02
Dynamic position (OP 35/37 only) The message and help text windows are positioned dynamically as a function of the cursor position so as not to cover up input fields that are currently being edited. You can enable and disable this function by choosing "System" > "Screen/Keys" from the menu.
4-16
Release 12/02
4.9
Configuration notes for touch panels
Screen partitioning basics Before you start setting touch panel controls, you should give a thought to the basic partitioning of a screen. Give consideration to where messages and input windows will be opened in order to prevent unintentional overlapping of buttons and input fields. Dimension the controls, such as buttons, large enough for them to be operated properly. For display elements, such as output fields, use font sizes that are large enough to allow comfortable reading. The figure shows an example of screen partitioning on the TP 37.
Example of screen partitioning on the TP 37
4-17
Release 12/02
Touch grid Enable the display of the touch grid with the symbol illustrated or by choosing "View" > "User Interface". To do this, activate the "Display touch grid" check box. The touch grid designates the smallest possible spacing between two points which the touch panel detects as single dots when its screen is touched. The display grid makes it easier for you to position the controls. You can place controls anywhere within the touch grid. The grid is not visible on the operating unit.
Invisible buttons If you use invisible buttons in your project, you should enable the display of invisible buttons while configuring. To do this, select the symbol illustrated or choose "View" > "Interface" from the menu. Select the "Display invisible buttons" check box in the open dialog box.
Global buttons Buttons and their assigned functions are available only locally on the screen concerned. Therefore, position buttons which you want to be available globally in every operating situation in the fixed window of the TP.
Overlapping controls Mutual overlapping of controls is not allowed. Since overlapping controls may result in undefined operating states, they are reported as errors when the project file is compiled.
4-18
Release 12/02
4.10 Editing projects

Here you will learn: How to convert existing projects. For example, you can convert a project for a specific graphics display to a project for another graphics display to use it as a basis for a new project. How to copy objects within a project and from one project to another. How to undo and redo actions.
4-19
Release 12/02
4.10.1 Convertible projects
Conversion options in ProTool You can convert a ProTool project that you created for an OP x5 operator panel into a project for an OP x7. This also applies to projects for the corresponding "C7 devices". Note With ProTool 6.0 you can also convert projects for graphics displays to projects for Windows-based systems. You will find more information about converting projects in the documentation called "Configuration support for upgrading - migration to Windows-based devices" [Projektierungsuntersttzung fr Umsteiger - Migration zu Windows-basierten Gerten]. You can convert the following projects: Source OP 5 OP 15C OP 25 OP 35 Note Take note of the system limits of the device when you convert projects. > > > > Objective OP 7 OP 17 OP 27 OP 37
Settings for conversion You can influence the conversion result by choosing "File" > "Convert" > "Settings". Smoothing If the "Smooth" setting is enabled, an anti-alias filter for replacing missing pixels due to interpolation is used when increasing or decreasing the size of a graphic. This setting results in softer transitions in photo-realistic displays. In the case of drawings, the display quality is enhanced when decreasing the size of graphics in particular, since the complete screen information is retained. Converting resolution Select this setting if you would like to convert projects between different operating units having different resolutions or display sizes..
4-20
Release 12/02
4.10.2 Copying objects: Between projects and within a project
Principle You can cut or copy selected parts of your project and paste them from one project to another via the Clipboard. For example you can copy text and fields from the alarm message editor to the event message editor, or graphic elements from one screen to another. A requirement for successfully copying from one project to another is that the system limits of the destination project are not exceeded. You can also copy objects between projects with different resolution. If the destination system uses a lower resolution than the source system, then the icons of soft keys, for example, are cleanly adjusted to the new resolution by an antialiasing mechanism.
Preparations for new projects Before starting to copy objects from an existing project, you should without fail carry out the following global settings in the new project. This will ensure that no loss of data occurs due to different settings during copying. At "System" > "Screen/Keys", adjust the partition of the screen display to that in the source project. Make the option for Full Screen mode the same as in the source project by choosing "System" > "Settings" from the "View" menu. Make the name and driver of the "PLC" the same as in the source project. Make the language settings the same as in the source project by choosing "System" > "Language Assignment".
Pasting objects in the destination project To paste objects from the Clipboard to the destination project, choose "Edit" > "Paste" from the menu. The object is pasted from the Clipboard to the destination project. If there is already an object of the same name in the destination project, the object is pasted under a new name. Note With "Paste", ProTool always checks the lower-level objects (such as the limit value tags of a tag which has been copied) to ensure that existing objects are reusable. If there is already an object of the same name in the destination project, the object to be pasted will be renamed if necessary. It is given the next available name in the destination project.
4-21
Release 12/02
Example: Tag VAR_4 will be renamed VAR_11 if tags VAR_1 through VAR_10 already exist in the destination project.
What is copied? You can copy the following via the Clipboard: All objects listed in the project window, such as screens, text or graphic lists, tags etc. Objects from screens (trends, fields, graphics etc.) in the screen editor. Messages and objects from messages (message text, fields, Help text etc.) in the message editor. Area pointers Global and local function key assignments
An object is copied complete with its attributes and all cross-referenced objects. Special situations encountered during copying are reported in the "system message window" at "Clipboard". This gives you information about any objects that have not been copied or renamed, for example.
Special situation with screens If the object to be copied refers to a screen that does not exist in the destination project, the underlying screen is not copied; instead a blank screen is created as a dummy if the destination project does not contain a screen that can be reused. This ensures that you will not copy the complete source project by mistake along with the start screen. Afterward, when you paste the screen via the Clipboard, the dummy screen in the destination project will be automatically replaced by the proper screen.
Special feature with tags Perform the steps listed below so that tags with a PLC connection can be inserted completely in the destination project when copying from one project to another: Assign a self-explanatory symbolic name for the PLC in the source project and do not use the system default setting (for example, PLC_1). Copy the PLC object to the destination project first so that it is present in both projects with identical parameters. The copy the tags belonging to this PLC.
Special feature of recipes With Windows-based systems, you can also copy recipes via the Clipboard. You will find more information about this at "Compatibility of recipes".
4-22
Release 12/02
What is not copied? These objects are not copied: Objects that are unknown in the destination project (such as functions or command buttons when copying from TP 170 to OP 170) Character sets In the case of multilingual projects, only the languages available in the destination project are copied. No new languages will be created. If necessary, create them before copying. Settings at "System" - for example, Language Assignment or Full Screen mode.
4-23
Release 12/02
4.10.3 Undoing and redoing actions
Purpose During configuration, it may become necessary to cancel actions which have been performed, or to reconstruct actions which have been discarded. The two commands "Undo" and "Redo" on the "Edit" menu are used for this purpose. Undo The "Undo" command (key combination Ctrl + Z) cancels the last action performed. If you keep selecting the command, you can cancel up to 30 successive modifications. Redo The "Redo" command (key combination CTRL+ Y) revokes the last action canceled, thus restoring the status before the last "Undo" command was executed.
Principle Each active editor (project window, screen editor, drivers) has its own undo history. Thus, for example, if three screens are opened at the same time, three separate Undo Histories will be created. When a screen is closed, the actions listed in the accompanying History are deleted. When the project is saved, all the Undo Histories for the current project are deleted. The last recorded action is displayed in abbreviated form in the menu. The tooltips contain detailed texts for the "Undo" and "Redo" buttons and for the status bar. Example of menu Undo: VAR_5 edited CTRL + Z CTRL+ Y
Redo: PIC_2 edited Example of tooltip/status bar Undo: Redo: property edited of tag VAR_5
contents edited of screen PIC_2
Until the corresponding undo history is deleted, deleted objects in the crossreference continue to be listed as used objects. The status of these objects is shown in brackets after each object - for example, PIC_5 (deleted).
4-24
Release 12/02
General Information The commands "Undo" and "Redo" only work with actions taken since the last time the project was saved. If, for example, you move a screen object and then save your project, you cannot later cancel this action. These are some of the rules that apply to "Undo/Redo": Settings in dialog boxes (properties of a field) can only be canceled in their entirety. It is not possible to open the dialog box and discard individual entries. With multilevel dialog boxes, only changes to the primary object are recorded. Modifications to underlying objects, or creations or deletions cannot be reversed. Example (project window): "Edit Tag" > "Edit Limit Value Tag" You can only undo changes to the tag here. "Undo/Redo" is special to ProTool. With a project integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7, the Undo buffer cannot be accessed by a higher-level SIMATIC Step 7 Undo Manager.
4-25
Release 12/02
4.10.4 Undoing the last action
Possible procedures To cancel your last action in ProTool, choose one of the three following options: Choose "Edit" > "Undo" from the menu. The last action that can be undone (canceled) is shown in abbreviated form after the menu command. A longer description is given in the status bar. Click the "Undo" button on the toolbar. This opens a tooltip which shows you the last action that can be undone (canceled). You are given the same information in the status bar. Press the CTRL and Z keys simultaneously. In contrast to the first two options, you are not given any feedback about which action has been canceled.
If you keep executing the "Undo" command, you can successively cancel all the recorded modifications.
4-26
Release 12/02
4.10.5 Redoing the last action
Possible procedures To restore your last canceled action in ProTool, choose one of the three following options: Choose the "Edit" > "Redo" command from the menu The last undone action is shown in abbreviated form after the menu option. A longer description is given in the status bar. Click the "Redo" button on the toolbar. This opens a tooltip which shows you the last canceled action. You are given the same information in the status bar. Press the CTRL and Y keys simultaneously. In contrast to the first two options, you are not given any feedback about which action has been restored.
If you keep executing the "Redo" command, you can successively restore all the recorded cancellations.
4-27
Release 12/02
4.11 Retrieving project information
Tools The following tools are available to you for displaying or storing information on a project. Cross references Project information
4-28
Release 12/02
4.11.1 Display in "Cross-Reference" window
Usage When you have to add to or modify a project and need to check where and how a particular object is being used in your project, you open the "Cross-Reference" window. You select an object in this window, and all the references to this object in the project are then displayed to you.
Example from a project You open the "Cross-Reference" window by choosing the "View" > "CrossReference" option from the menu. The active object is displayed with a red border around it. The selected object is at the uppermost level, and all the objects in which the selected object is used appear under it. The cross-reference list also contains objects in the current Undo history (undo and restore actions). The status of these objects is shown in brackets after each object - for example, PIC_5 (deleted).
Note You can use the "Cross-Reference" window efficiently for troubleshooting.
4-29
Release 12/02
4.11.2 Display at "Project Information"
Usage To obtain information about a project when projects change or are adapted, open the "Project Information" dialog box. To do so, choose "File" > "Project Information" from the menu. The "Project Information" dialog box displays general "project data" and the "memory requirements" for the project. Project information is spread according to subjects over three tab controls: General Description Statistics
Example relating to the "Statistics" tab
4-30
Release 12/02
General The "General" tab shows information on the device type, project name, path name of the stored project file and person who created the project. You fill in the "Created by" field and all the other fields are updated automatically by ProTool when the project is saved.
Description The "Description" tab contains an input field for the project description. Here you can enter any information you like that are important for your project.
Statistics The "Statistics" tab shows when the project was created, modified, generated and downloaded, the ProTool version last used to edit the project and the memory required by the project after it has been downloaded to the flash memory on the operating unit. The memory requirement is determined and displayed after every download operation.
4-31
Release 12/02
4.12 Instructions for editing projects

In these instructions you will learn: How to create new projects. How to create area pointers. How to view cross-references
4-32
Release 12/02
4.12.1 How to create a new project
Creating a project To create a new project, define the hardware components first. Note These instructions describes the steps you have to take if you are not working with ProTool integrated in STEP 7. Procedure: 1 Click this symbol or choose "File" > "New". 2 3 In the "Select Device" dialog box, select the operating unit and if possible the resolution. Click the "Next" button. In the "Select PLC" dialog box, enter the name of the PLC. From the list below this, select the driver you want to use for communication between the operating unit and the PLC. Click the Parameters button in order to set the driver parameters. Click the "Next" button. In the "Standard Projects" dialog box, you can base your project on a standard project, if there is one. In the "Summary" dialog box, enter a name for the project and, if you like, a short system description. The selected operating unit appears at "Device", and you can enter your name at "Created by". If you are logged on to a network, your user name is suggested. 7 Click the "Finish" button. The settings are applied and the project window is opened.
4 5 6
Converting a project For some operating units it is possible to use a project for another operating unit as a basis for your current project. You create a new project on the basis of the source project by converting the source project for a different operating unit. Procedure: 1 2 Choose "File" > "Convert" > "Start" from the menu. The "Save As" dialog box appears. Enter a new name for the project and save it. The project window appears.
4-33
Release 12/02
4.12.2 How to open an existing project
Opening a project Procedure: 1 Click this symbol or choose"File" > "Open". 2 In the "Open" dialog box, set the path on which the project is saved, and select a project. ProTool projects have the file name extension *.pdb. On the ...\Protool\Standard path you can select a standard project in order to use it as a basis for your new project. The operating unit and the PLC type are specified in the names of the "standard projects". 3 Note There are no standard projects for Windows-based systems. Click the "Open" button. The project window opens.
4-34
Release 12/02
4.12.3 How to set up area pointers
Creating communication areas (area pointers) The communication areas to be created depend on the objects configured. The communication areas you have to create are specified in the instructions for creating the different objects. You will find an overview of all the available area pointers at the topic called "Area pointers". Procedure: 1 2 3 Double-click "Area Pointers" on the left of the project window. The "Paste New Area Pointer" dialog box is opened. Select the area pointer which you want to create and click OK. In the dialog box that appears, enter the size of the communication area at "Length". The address specifies the beginning of the communication area on the PLC. Set the acquisition cycle. The time you set should not be too short. This setting is not available for all area pointers. 5 6 Note The "interface area" must be created for the SIMATIC S5 PLC, but for other PLCs it is optional. You will find a detailed description in the "Communication" user's manual. Select the PLC for which you want to create the communication area. Apply the settings by clicking OK.
Note In order not to impair the performance of the system unnecessarily, you should heed the following: - Create the different data area such that they are as small as possible and as large as necessary. - Define associated data areas as contiguous. The actual update time improves if you create one large area instead of several small ones.
4-35
Release 12/02
4.12.4 How to display cross-references
Procedure: The menu options with which you can edit the "Cross-Reference" window will be found in the shortcut menu by right-clicking Procedure: 1 2 3 4 Select an object in the "Cross-Reference" window. Select "Display All" or double-click an object to display all sub-levels. Select "Find Object" to display the object concerned on the top level and the other references beneath it. Select "Display Usage" in order to open the corresponding object that was referenced.
4-36
Release 12/02
4.13 Example of creating projects

These examples show you how to create a project for an OP 37, and how you convert one project for an OP 25 to another.
4-37
Release 12/02
4.13.1 How to create an OP 37 project
Objective You want to create a project for an OP 37 and the SIMATIC S7-300 or SIMATIC S7-400 PLC.
Procedure: Procedure: 1 Click on this button or choose "File" > "New". This opens the project assistant. You are guided through four dialogs (steps 2 through 5), to create a new project. 2 In the "Select Device" dialog box at "Graphics-based operator panels", select an "OP 37". Click the "Next" button. 3 In the "Select PLC" dialog box, enter the name of the PLC. From the list below this, select the driver you want to use for communication between the operating unit and the PLC. 4 Click the "Parameters" button to set the driver parameters Click the "Next" button. You can also set the driver parameters later on. 5 6 In the "Standard projects" dialog box, select "Use standard project". This puts you on the standard project. Double-click the left mouse button in the project window on "Area pointers" to configure the "Event messages" communication area. Select this at "Type" and then click OK. 7 Enter the following values in the "Event Message" dialog box: DB: 70 Length: 4 Confirm by clicking "OK". You can then configure 64 event messages. This data block must also be available in your PLC program. 8 9 10 Choose "System" > "Screen/Keys" to partition the OP display. For "Alarm/Event Mess.", select the setting "Window/Window" so that both event and alarm messages are displayed simultaneously on screens. Select the "message area" using "Active" and, holding down the mouse button, position it in the screen layout. This completes the subdivision of the OP display. Proceed to configure the event messages. If you enter more than 64 messages, only messages 0000 to 0063 can be output on the operating unit. Save your project with "File" > "Save".
11 12
4-38
Release 12/02
4.13.2 How to convert an OP 25 project
Objective To convert an OP 25 project to an OP 27 project, proceed as follows.
Procedure: Procedure: 1 2 3 4 5 Open the existing OP 25 project. Choose "File" > "Convert" from the menu. Enter a name for the new project. OP 27 is selected as the device type as no other conversions are possible. Click "Save". If you confirm the prompt that appears in response to this, the project is converted and the OP 27 project window opens.
4-39
Release 12/02
4-40
Release 12/02
Configuration techniques
In this chapter you will learn how to: Create screens Configure controls and display elements Use tags Configure messages
After that we will show you, for example, how to: Use functions Create recipes Assigning operator authorization Create multi-lingual projects
5-1
Release 12/02
5.1
Screens
Example Screens are an image of the process. You can display processes on screens and specify process values. The figure below shows an example of a mixing unit for producing different juices. Ingredients are filled into a mixer from different tanks and then mixed. The liquid levels in the tanks and in the mixer are displayed. The intake valves can be opened and closed by means of the operating unit. The motor for the mixer can be turned on and off in a similar manner.
Example of a Screen: Mixing Station
Components of a screen A screen can consist of static and dynamic components. Static components include text and graphics. Dynamic components are linked to the PLC and visualize current values from the PLC memory. Visualization may take place in the form of alphanumeric displays, trends and bar graphs. Dynamic components are also inputs made by the operator on the operating unit and written to the PLC memory. The connection to the PLC is established by means of tags.
5-2
Release 12/02
Screen editor Screens are created with a separate editor in ProTool. The operating unit is displayed when you call the screen editor. Open the screen editor by: double-clicking on "Screens" in the left half of the project window to create a new screen double-clicking in the right half of the project window on an existing configured screen to open the screen for editing.
You can zoom this display in and out in stages by choosing "View" > "Zoom" from the menu. If, for example, you wish to edit details you can do it much more simply by zooming in on them. Screens are stored under a symbolic name. You enter a name by choosing "Edit" > "Properties" from the menu. This name has to be specified when you edit, reference or delete the screen. In addition, screens are numbered automatically.
Start screen Declare one screen in every project as the "start screen". The start screen is the screen that is displayed after the operating unit has started up.
Fixed window The fixed window is the window that is always flush with the top border of the operating unit screen. By choosing "System" > "Screen/Keys" from the menu, you can open and close the fixed window and adjust its height by dragging with the mouse. Since the contents of the fixed window do not depend on the current screen, you can output important process tags or the date and time to it, for example. You configure the contents of the fixed window in the screen editor. To access the fixed window, click it with the mouse.
Soft keys/buttons Soft keys are function keys with screen-dependent assignment. Buttons are virtual keys on the touch-sensitive screen of the touch panel. You can configure both soft keys and buttons for specific screens. When configuring, you assign functions to these controls. You can illustrate the task of a control by means of a graphic or text. You can use soft keys and buttons to open another screen, turn a motor on and off or display the message buffer, for example.
5-3
Release 12/02
Select screen Every configured screen has to be integrated into the control process so that it can be opened at run time on the operating unit. The "Select Screen" function is available for this purpose. You an assign this function to an input field, a function key or a button, for example. You specify the name of the screen as the parameter. This means that a screen can be displayed by means of an input field or a function key or button. With input fields, soft keys and buttons, the function can be used only locally on that screen. Should you wish the function to be available globally, you have to configure the function on a Kx function key on the operating unit or on a button positioned in the fixed window on the TP.
5-4
Release 12/02
5.1.1
Screen objects in ProTool
Introduction to screen objects Screens consist of individual objects. There are different types of object, which you can use at will when configuring a screen. "At will" means that you determine the number and type of the objects, as well as their position and size.
Available screen objects ProTool presents you with the following object types: Screen object Name Text Description With the text box you can configure static text: various kinds of formatting are possible. Text can be shown in a wide range of fonts. Text can be entered over several lines and aligned vertically or horizontally.
Characte By using character graphics, you can compose r graphics from the individual characters contained in a graphics symbol font. If you use character graphics instead of graphics, the memory requirement for your project file will be reduced significantly. Graphics Input/out put field With the graphic field, you can use graphics from other graphics programs in your project. With the input/output field, you can enter or display process values directly. Different display formats - for example, decimal and binary - are possible. There are a large number of formatting options, such as colors, flashing, etc.
Symbolic Instead of the numerical value of a tag, a "text" or a input/out "graphic" is displayed to make the current status more put field comprehensible to the operator. The assignment between the values of the tags and the text or graphics is configured in a text or graphic list (text list or graphic list). For example, instead of the numerical values 0 and 1, the phrases Motor Off and Motor On are displayed. Trend view Bar graph A trend view contains the settings for the coordinate system - for example, the X and Y axes. You can display several trends in one trend view. Bar graphs display a value from the PLC as a rectangular area. Bar graphs are practical for displaying fill levels, for example.
5-5
Release 12/02
Screen object
Name Button (touch panels) "Set/Res et Bit" button (touch panels) "Select Screen" button (touch panels) Light indicator (touch panels)
Description Buttons are objects that trigger a function by using a touch-sensitive screen. You can configure the function triggered. Buttons can be freely labeled with text or a graphic. Button with a fixed function: to set or reset a bit in a tag.
Button with a fixed function: to select a different screen.
Button with a fixed function: light indicators show the status of a defined bit, for example, by changing color or by a flashing text.
5-6
Release 12/02
5.1.2
Custom project user interface in ProTool
Custom configuration user interface To configure display elements and controls in a user-friendly manner, you can create the configuration user interface in ProTool so that it satisfies your requirements. Select "View" > "User Interface" from the menu while the screen is open. You can perform the following settings in the "Interface" dialog box: At "Zoom", set the zoom factor of the current screen in percent. At "Field grid", set the density of the grid on the current screen. At "Display", select whether and how you want to have the grid displayed. At "Color setting", set the intensity and contrast of screen objects. Check the settings with the "Display Changes" button. If the settings are as you want them to be, exit from the dialog box by clicking OK.
Note You can perform the zoom functions in conjunction with CTRL and the numeric keypad, too: CTRL + "+": Zoom in CTRL + "-": CTRL + "*": For touch panels only; At "Buttons", select whether you want to display the touch grid and/or invisible buttons.
5-7
Release 12/02
5.1.3
Instructions for creating screens

In these instructions you will learn how to set a start screen and work with several screen objects.
5-8
Release 12/02
5.1.3.1
How to set a screen as the start screen:
Procedure: Procedure: 1 2 3 Select the screen in the project window. Choose "Edit" > "Properties" from the menu. Select the "Start screen" option.
5-9
Release 12/02
5.1.3.2
How to work with grouped screen objects
Principle You can edit grouped screen objects directly on the screen without ungrouping them. In this way you can customize objects from a library, for example.
Editing screen objects directly within a group Procedure: 1 Double-click the group or choose "Edit Group" from the shortcut menu to edit the group directly on the screen. The group is surrounded by a hatched border. You can edit the various screen objects within this border in the customary manner. In addition, you can drag screen objects with the mouse to an area outside the group or copy them: To move screen objects, press and keep SHIFT pressed and drag the screen object with the mouse from the hatched border. To copy, drag the screen object with the mouse from the hatched border. 2 Note When editing a group directly on a screen, you can undo or redo single work steps in the ordinary way. Note that you cannot undo the state of the group in a single step but only the state of individual objects belonging to the group. To stop direct editing of the group, click in a free area of the screen editor.
5-10
Release 12/02
5.1.3.3
How to work with several screen objects
Principle When screen objects are on top of each other, you can place concealed screen objects on top for editing without having to move the upper objects. You can change the following properties of selected screen objects in a single edit operation: Position Foreground and background colors Labeling (font type and size, format)
Note If you copy screen objects by multiple selection, ProTool might change the original order of the level when it pastes them. In this instance, dynamic objects are stacked above static objects to enhance performance. You can prevent this behavior by grouping the screen objects beforehand. Editing concealed screen objects Procedure: 1 To place a concealed screen object on top, press and keep ALT pressed and click the screen object on top of it until the screen object you desire is on top. You can edit the screen object you selected in this way in the customary manner. Note You can select an object only when the mouse pointer is directly over the concealed object. Modifying properties shared by several screen objects Procedure: 1 Press and keep SHIFT pressed and click the desired screen objects to select them.
5-11
Release 12/02
Procedure: 2 To change font property pages: Click in the "Fonts" toolbar on the buttons you desire to change the formatting (bold, italic, underscore, flashing). Select in the "Fonts" toolbar the font and font size to change them. To change the foreground color: Click in the "Colors" toolbar on the color field you desire. To change the background color: Right-click in the "Colors" toolbar on the color field you desire. To change the position: Move the mouse pointer to one of the selected screen objects. Keeping the left mouse button pressed, drag the screen objects to their new position. Release the mouse button. 3 Click in a free area of the screen editor to cancel the selection.
5-12
Release 12/02
5.2
Display elements
Purpose You use display elements to monitor the machine or the system on the operating unit. You can display current information, such as actual values from the PLC, process and operating modes and malfunctions, on the operating unit as a numerical value, in plain language or as a graphic.
Overview There are essentially two types of display element available for the different tasks: Static display elements Static display elements are pieces of text and graphics that are not linked to the PLC. They do not react to user inputs and cannot be modified at run time on the operating unit. Use static display elements, for example, for system screens or for textual or graphic explanations for controls and dynamic display elements. Static display elements are - Static text - Graphics - Character graphics Dynamic display elements Dynamic display elements can be linked to the PLC by means of tags. They visualize current values from the PLC in alphanumeric or graphic form. Dynamic display elements can change their display spontaneously at run time on the operating unit without the operator intervening. Use dynamic display elements for all tasks associated with monitoring the process, a machine or the system. Dynamic display elements are - Output fields - Trend view - Bar graphs - Light indicators
5-13
Release 12/02
5.2.1
What is static text?
Purpose Static text is text that is not linked to the PLC. It cannot be modified at run time on the operating unit. Use static text (on one or two lines) to explain segments of a configured screen - for example, for labeling controls and dynamic display elements. You can configure static text separately for any language available on the operating unit.
Character sets Different fonts are available to indicate the relative importance of text strings on a screen by means of the font or the font size. All the characters in the font must be of the same width. This requirement is not met by all fixed-pitch fonts - for example, Courier. You can set up to four different fonts for the operating unit. Three fonts are language dependent, one font is language independent. Language dependent fonts With language dependent fonts, you can use different characters for every language available on the operating unit. By default, ProTool fonts are included in the scope of supply. But you can any Windows font, provided that it is a fixed-pitch font. Language independent font The same language independent font is used in all languages. By default, the symbol set is preset. The symbol set is used for character graphics. Configure static text by selecting the button illustrated or by choosing "Insert" > "Text" from the menu.
5-14
Release 12/02
5.2.2
What are character graphics?
Purpose Character graphics are static display elements that are not linked to the PLC. It cannot be modified at run time on the operating unit. By using character graphics, you can compose graphics from the individual characters contained in a symbol font. An example of character graphics is illustrated below.
If you use character graphics instead of graphics, the memory requirement for your project file will be reduced significantly. Configure character graphics by selecting the button illustrated or by choosing "Insert" > "Character Graphics" from the menu.
Line characters Complete symbol packages are available for user-friendly drawing of polylines. The symbol packages contain symbols for all representations of paths such as horizontal and vertical lines, corners, crosses and bifurcations. The scope of supply contains three fixed symbol packages the line characters single, bold and double. You can customize four other symbol packages (USER 1 through USER 4) to meet your requirements.
5-15
Release 12/02
5.2.3
Graphics
Purpose Graphics are static display elements that are not linked to the PLC. They cannot be modified at run time on the operating unit. Use graphics, for example, for displaying your system or as explanatory symbolism for dynamic display and controls
Creating graphics ProTool features an option of embedding external graphic editors via the OLE interface. In this way you can create graphics with your usual applications without having to become familiar with a new graphics program. ProTool displays every graphic you are using as a bitmap, irrespective of whether you create the graphic with a pixel-oriented graphics program - for example, Paint or with a vector-oriented graphics program. Vector graphics are converted into pixel graphics before being displayed in ProTool. Configure graphics by selecting the symbol illustrated or by choosing "Insert" > "Graphic" from the menu.
Possible graphics programs You can use the following program versions to create vector or pixel graphics. MS Paint, all versions MS EXCEL, 2000 and XP MS PowerPoint, 2000 and XP Paint Shop Pro 7.0 Micrografx Designer 9.0 Corel Draw 10 Corel Photo Paint 9.0 We recommend you not to create graphics in Corel Photo Paint, since Corel Photo Paint uses a disproportionately high amount of configuration memory. AutoSketch 7.0 Build 54
Some problems have become known with earlier versions in the meantime. If you insert an Excel spreadsheet as an OLE object in your configuration and have enabled the "Gridlines" option in Excel, the gridlines will not appear correctly on the operating unit so that you have to disable the "Gridlines" option. This effect does not occur in Excel 2000.
5-16
Release 12/02
Using Excel and Word objects If you use Excel or Word objects in a ProTool screen, you should perform subsequent modifications in the original file and then insert the modified object back into your configuration. Using AutoSketch If you wish to create a new AutoSketch object, create a graphics field in your ProTool configuration. In the "Graphic Object" dialog box, click "New" and select the "New Object" check box. After you have twice confirmed the message that the drawing does not contain any objects that might be copied to the Clipboard, AutoSketch is started as an OLE server. If you wish to integrate an existing AutoSketch object, start AutoSketch and open an existing graphic. Select the Graphic and copy it to the Clipboard. Insert the material on the Clipboard in your ProTool configuration by choosing "Edit > Paste" from the menu. Color presentation on the operating unit With pixel graphics, if you notice differences between the colors displayed on the operating unit and those configured in ProTool, proceed as follows: On the configuration computer, choose on the Start menu "Settings" > "Control Panel" > "Display" and on the "Settings" tab, select at "Colors" the setting "True Color". Retain this setting for configuring and compiling the project.
Smooth display If the "Smooth" setting is enabled, an anti-alias filter for replacing missing pixels due to interpolation is used when increasing or decreasing the size of a graphic. This setting results in softer transitions in photo-realistic displays. In the case of drawings, the display quality is enhanced when zooming out of graphics in particular, since the complete screen information is retained.
5-17
Release 12/02
5.2.4
What are output fields?
Purpose Output fields display current values from the PLC on the operating unit. The values may be output optionally in numerical, alphanumeric or symbolic form.
Numerical and alphanumeric output Output fields for numerical or alphanumeric values show the value as a number or as text. A numerical value, for example, is the number 80 as the actual value of a temperature. An example of an alphanumeric value is the text string Valve_12. Output fields for numeric and alphanumeric values are configured on the open screen on the "Screen Objects" toolbar by choosing the illustrated button or at "Insert" > "Input/Output Field".
Symbolic output Output fields for symbolic values do not display the true value but, optionally, a text string or a graphic from a text or graphic list. For example, you can store the two states of a valve in a text list or in a graphic list. When the valve is open, the output field then points, for example, to the text string OPEN or to a corresponding graphic. By using output fields for symbolic values, you eliminate misinterpretations on the part of the operator to a large extent, since a symbolic value often presents a state more lucidly than an abstract numerical value, for instance. Output fields for symbolic values are configured on the open screen on the "Screen Objects" toolbar by choosing the illustrated button or at "Insert" > "Text or Graphic List".
5-18
Release 12/02
5.2.5
What are trend views?
Purpose A trend view is a dynamic display element. Trend views make possible a particularly lucid form of continuous display of process data on the operating unit. You can display several different trends simultaneously in one trend view on the operating unit. Configure a trend view by selecting the button illustrated or by choosing "Insert" > "Trend View" from the menu.
5-19
Release 12/02
5.2.6
What are bar graphs?
Purpose A bar graph is a dynamic display element. Bar graphs display a value from the PLC as a rectangular area. This means that you can tell at a glance on the operating unit how far the current value is from the limits or whether a specified setpoint has been reached. Bar graphs can be used to display fill levels or quantities, for example. Configure bar graphs by selecting the symbol illustrated or by choosing "Insert" > "Bar Graph" from the menu.
Settings Bar graphs are linked to the PLC by means of a tag. Apart from this tag, which contains the value that is required to be displayed, you can define other tags in order, for example, to visualize when a limit value has been reached or to display or hide the bar field. You can freely define the direction, scaling, bar and background color and also labeling of the Y axis. You can also display upper and lower limit value lines for indicating limit values. The following figure shows a bar that is updated vertically and has limit value lines drawn on it.
Bar graphs with limit value lines
5-20
Release 12/02
5.2.7
What are light indicators?
Purpose A light indicator is a dynamic display element on a touch panel. Light indicators indicate the state of a defined bit - for example, by means of a change of color or by flashing text. Light indicators are shown with a simple border for visual distinction of buttons which you can press. Configure light indicators by selecting the symbol illustrated or by choosing "Insert" > "Light Indicator" from the menu.
5-21
Release 12/02
5.2.8
Instructions for configuring display elements

Here you learn how to configure the following display elements: Output fields Pieces of text Graphic elements Displays
5-22
Release 12/02
5.2.8.1
How to configure static text
Procedure: Procedure: 1 Select the button illustrated from the toolbar or choose "Insert" > "Text Field" from the menu. 2 3 4 Position the mouse pointer at the point where you would like to place the text. You enter text strings directly into the text box. Insert a carriage return by pressing ENTER, if required. To change the font, select the text. Select the "ProTool Default (16x16)" font, for example, by choosing "Edit" > "Font". The new setting remains effective until you change the font again. If you want to create more text strings, repeat step 2. Complete your input by pressing ESC.
5 6
5-23
Release 12/02
5.2.8.2
How to configure character graphics
Procedure: Procedure: 1 Select the button illustrated from the toolbar or choose "Insert" > "Character Graphic" from the menu. 2 Position the mouse pointer to the place on the screen at which you want to position the character graphic. The character graphics palette is then displayed. Insert the symbol you require in the character graphic by clicking the mouse on the appropriate palette field. Use the directional arrows on the character graphics palette to draw polylines, junctions and bifurcations without difficulty. Alternatively, you can use the arrow keys on the keyboard while simultaneously keeping CTRL pressed.
3 4
The character graphics palette shows a matrix of 16 symbols for line characters. To customize a matrix, perform the following steps: Procedure: 1 2 3 4 Select one of the symbol packages USER 1 to USER 4. The background color of the matrix field turns white. Select the field you want to change in the matrix with the mouse. Select a new symbol by clicking the mouse on the palette. The symbol you selected is applied to the field selected. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for all symbols that you want to change.
5-24
Release 12/02
5.2.8.3
How to configure output fields for alphanumeric values
Procedure: Procedure: 1 Select the button illustrated on the open screen on the "Screen Objects" toolbar or choose "Insert" > "Input/Output Field" from the menu. 2 Position the mouse pointer at the point where you would like to place the output field. Press and hold down the left mouse button and by dragging the mouse, expand the output field to the desired size. In the "Input/Output" dialog box, select the following settings on the "General" tab: "Usage": Tag. In this way you establish the connection to the PLC "Field type": Output "Display": numeric or alphanumeric data format, such as Decimal or String 4 5 6 Select a previously configured tag for the output field or define a new tag. To assign the output field to different tags at run time, click the "Multiplex" button. Select the "Attributes" tag if you want to modify the foreground and background colors, for example, at run time, or to enable and disable flashing for the contents of the output field. Close the dialog box. You will now see on your screen, for example, the display <1234 if you have configured a field length of five characters. The < character denotes an output field.
5-25
Release 12/02
5.2.8.4
How to configure output fields for symbolic values
Procedure: Procedure: 1 Select the button illustrated on the "Screen Objects" toolbar on the open screen or choose "Insert" > "Text or Graphic List" from the menu. 2 Position the mouse pointer at the point where you would like to place the output field. Press and hold down the left mouse button and by dragging the mouse, expand the output field to the desired size. In the "Input/Output" dialog box, select the following settings: "Usage": Tag. In this way you establish the link to the PLC. "Field type": Output "Display": Text or Graphic 4 Select a previously configured tag at "Tag", or define a new tag. The value of this tag defines at run time the entry (text or graphic) that will be displayed from the list in the output field. To assign the output field to different tags at run time, click the "Multiplex" button. Select an existing list at "Text or graphic list", or create a new list. To create a new list, select "New". Assign different entries to the different values of the tag. Click the "Add" button to incorporate the assigned entry to the list. 7 Select the "Attributes" tag if you want to modify the foreground and background colors, for example, at run time, or to enable and disable flashing for the contents of the output field. Close the dialog box. You will now see on your screen, for example, the display <otor1 if you have configured Motor1 as the first text entry. The < character denotes an output field.
5 6
5-26
Release 12/02
5.2.8.5
How to configure bar graphs
Procedure: Procedure: 1 Select the button illustrated on the open screen on the "Screen Objects" toolbar or choose "Insert" > "Bar Graph" from the menu. Position the mouse pointer at the point where you would like to place the bar graph. Keeping the left mouse button pressed, drag the bar graph to the size you require. 2 On the "General" tab at "Direction", set the direction in which you want the bar graph to grow when you increment the tag value - for example, "Up". If you want the bar graph to grow in different directions for positive and negative values, select "Down/Up", for example. 3 4 Configure at "Tag" the tag whose values you want to have displayed at run time as a bar graph. On the "Axis" tab, set the position and label of the axis. Define values for the upper and lower limits, as necessary. Enter the limits optionally as constant values or define tags for them. 5 Select the foreground, background and scaling color on the "Color" tab. Further, set the color in which the bar graph will be displayed when the limit values are exceeded. 6 Similarly, set on the "Enable" tab, as necessary, the conditions under which you want the bar graph to be displayed or hidden at run time.
5-27
Release 12/02
5.2.8.6
How to configure trend views
Procedure: Procedure: 1 Select the button illustrated on the "Screen Objects" toolbar on the open screen or choose "Insert" > "Trend View" from the menu. Position the mouse pointer to the place on the screen at which you want to place the trend view. Keeping the left mouse button pressed, drag the trend view to the size you require. 2 In the "Trend Graphic" dialog box, perform the common settings for the different trends of the trend view - for example, number of samples/max., update direction, labeling of axes, as well as scaling and background colors. To do this, select the tabs "X axis", "Y axis left", "Y axis right" and "Color". 3 Select an existing trend at "Trend" or configure a new trend. Confirm all settings by clicking "OK" and apply the configured trend to the trend view by clicking "Add". 4 5 To display different trends in the trend view at run time, click the "Multiplex" button. Similarly, set on the "Enable" tab, as necessary, the conditions under which you want the trend view to be displayed or hidden at run time.
Note The type of trigger and the trigger clock pulse must be identical for all trends of the trend view.
5-28
Release 12/02
5.2.8.7
How to configure light indicators
Procedure: Procedure: 1 Select the button illustrated on the "Screen Objects" toolbar on the open screen or choose "Insert" > "Light Indicator" from the menu. 2 Position the mouse pointer at the point where you would like to place the light indicator. Keeping the left mouse button pressed, drag the light indicator to the size you require. In the "Light Indicator" dialog box, define the tag, the bit you wish to visualize and the characteristics of the light indicator for the two logic states (0 and 1 ) of the defined bit.
5-29
Release 12/02
5.3
Controls
Purpose You use controls on the operating unit to intervene directly in the process. They are used, for example, to specify setpoints, trigger functions, open screens and
Overview The following "controls" are available in ProTool for the different tasks: Input fields Input/output fields Function keys and soft keys Buttons
Dynamic attributes Note To many flashing and transparent objects can have a negative impact on the screen change frequency and updates.
5-30
Release 12/02
5.3.1
What are input fields?
Purpose In input fields you enter values on the operating unit that are transferred to the PLC. The values may be input optionally in numerical, alphanumeric or symbolic form. If you define limit values for the input field tag, you can reject inputs on the operating unit that are outside the specified range of values.
Numerical and alphanumeric input In input fields for numerical and alphanumeric values you enter the value one character at a time on the operating unit. A numerical value, for example, is the number 80 as the setpoint for a temperature. An example of an alphanumeric value is the text string Valve_12. Input fields for numeric and alphanumeric values are created on the open screen on the "Screen Objects" toolbar by choosing the illustrated button or at "Insert" > "Input/Output Field".
Symbolic input In input fields for symbolic values you do not enter the value one character at a time but select this value on the operating unit from a text list. During configuration you assign symbolic text on the text list to every value of a tag. In this way, for example, you can turn a motor on and off by means of the two entries ON and OFF. By using input fields for symbolic values, you prevent misinterpretations to a large extent, since the operating unit accepts only the configured values on the text list. Input fields for symbolic values are created on the open screen on the "Screen Objects" toolbar by choosing the illustrated button or at "Insert" > "Text or Graphic List". Note The following applies to the TP 37: If a configuration created in ProTool 3.0 contains input fields with bit functions ("Set Bit", "Reset Bit"), delete the input fields from your project before recompiling it and recreate them. in ProTool 5.x and higher, the functions "Set Bit" and "Reset Bit" cannot be configured for touch panels.
5-31
Release 12/02
5.3.2
What are combined input/output fields?
Principle Combined input/output fields display current values from the PLC on the operating unit. You can also enter values that are transferred to the PLC at the same time. The values may be input and output optionally in numerical, alphanumeric or symbolic form. During input, the value you want to be output is not updated on the operating unit. If you define limit values for the input/output field tag, values that are outside the specified range can be: Rejected upon input Displayed in a different color, for example, when read out. Combined input fields are created on the open screen on the "Screen Objects" toolbar by choosing the illustrated button or at "Insert" > "Input/Output Field". Input fields for symbolic values are created on the open screen on the "Screen Objects" toolbar by choosing the illustrated button or at "Insert" > "Text or Graphic List".
5-32
Release 12/02
5.3.3
What are function keys?
Principle A function key is a key on the operating unit for configuring a function assignment. You can assign one or more functions to any function key in ProTool. The functions are triggered as soon as the key is pressed. The function key assignment may be locally or globally significant. You can assign a password level to function keys in order to prevent operation by unauthorized persons.
Global assignment Globally assigned function keys always trigger the same function, irrespective of the current control situation. You can the open a specific screen, for example, display queued messages or print the contents of the screen. By using globally assigned function keys, you cut your configuration effort considerably since you do not have to assign individual functions to global keys on every screen. Assign function keys globally by choosing "System" > "Screen/Keys" from the menu. To do this, click in the Screen/Keys dialog box on one of the keys "K1" through "Kx" or "F1" through "Fx". You can specify the functions you have assigned to specific keys on the operating unit by means of labeling strips. Note By choosing "System" > "Screen/Keys you can specify global settings for keys that apply to all screens. The icons appear in each configured screen provided the settings are not subsequently overwritten by an individual screen. In that case, the changes apply only to that particular screen.
5-33
Release 12/02
Local assignment Locally assigned function keys trigger different actions on the operating unit depending on the screen. A function key whose assignment may vary from screen to screen is referred to as a "soft key". Assign soft keys locally in the screen editor. To do so, click in the screen on one of the keys "F1" through "Fx", which are arranged directly around the operating unit screen. You can assign an icon that illustrates the soft key function by means of text or a graphic to any soft key. You can also assign soft keys globally. A global assignment is active on all screens to which you do not assign a screen-specific function. Use globally assigned soft keys, for example, to change from any screen to the same system screen. Note Do not assign functions that have to be permanently available on the operating unit to soft keys.
Displaying assignments You can see in the "Screen/Keys" dialog box and in the screen editor how your configured soft keys are assigned: Inhibited
Assigned locally
Assigned globally
Assigned locally and globally
Depending on whether it is a case of function keys, soft keys or soft keys with LEDs, the display can vary slightly from the representation. Special feature On graphics-based operating units you can assign a tag, whose address refers to a data word or data byte, to more than one key. If you enter the same name for the tag, say, VAR_1, for each of these keys, there is a danger that the bit will remain set when keys are pressed quickly even though the key is no longer pressed. Enter a different tag name but the same address for each additional key (such as F1 > VAR_1, DB50, DW10 / key F2 > VAR_2, DB50, DW10).
5-34
Release 12/02
5.3.4
What are buttons?
Requirements Buttons can only be configured for touch panels. Before you start configuring buttons, you should give a thought to the basic partitioning of the touch panel screen (refer to "Configuration notes for the touch panels").
Purpose A button is a virtual key on the touch panel screen to which you can assign one or more functions. You operate a button by touching the touch-sensitive screen. You can customize the user interface by means of buttons. You can assign a password level to buttons in order to prevent operation by unauthorized persons.
Labeling You can label buttons statically or dynamically with text or graphics. Static labeling When configuring the button enter a text or select a graphic. This type of labeling is static, which means that it is not changed on the touch panel. Dynamic labeling When configuring the button, select a text or graphics list and an associated "index tag". The value of the index tag determines which list element is displayed on the button at run time.
Operation Pressing or releasing a button triggers the functions that you set for these events. To prevent the triggering of a function of a button that has been pressed by mistake, move your finger from the button while still keeping the button pressed. This process is not interpreted as a click event.
Check-back indication upon operation When the button is pressed and released, it is animated by a change in border color as is usual in Windows. Invisible buttons do not provide an optical checkback indication upon operation.
Invisible buttons Invisible buttons are transparent buttons that are not displayed upon the operating unit. If you place invisible buttons on graphics, you can operate parts of the graphic - for example, a motor or a valve - by touching the touch panel.
5-35
Release 12/02
Buttons with a freely definable function You can create on an individual basis, using a button with freely definable function, all the buttons that you need for operating the TP. Create buttons by selecting the symbol illustrated or by choosing "Insert" > "Button" from the menu.
Buttons with fixed functions ProTool features predefined buttons that can be operated and have the following functions for quick and efficient configuration of standard functions for touch panels: "Set/Reset Bit" button "Select Screen" button
"Set/Reset Bit" button With the "Set/Reset Bit" button you can set or reset a bit in a tag. The bit function is triggered as soon as you touch the button. On doing so, the bit in set in the tag, for example. Press the button a second time to reset the bit. Create the button by selecting the symbol shown or by choosing "Insert" > "Set/Reset Bit" from the menu. Depending on the tag type and on the settings in the option buttons at "bit function", one of the following functions is automatically assigned to the button: Setting Set Reset Set/Reset Set on Pressing Button Function for BOOL tag type Set Bit Reset Bit Set/Reset Bit Function for KF/INT tag type Set Bit in Word Reset Bit in Word Set/Reset Bit in Word Set Bit on Pressing Button Condition Press button Press button Press button Press/release button
5-36
Release 12/02
"Select Screen" button With the "Select Screen" button you can select a different screen on the touch panel. The Select Screen function is triggered and the corresponding screen is displayed as soon as you click the button. Create the button by selecting the symbol illustrated or by choosing "Insert" > "Button" from the menu. Note Do not assign functions that have to be permanently available on the operating unit to soft keys.
5-37
Release 12/02
5.3.5
Using buttons as direct keys
Purpose You can also configure buttons on the TP as direct keys in order to allow keyboard shortcuts without the usual delays caused by communications. Shortcuts are, for example, a condition for typewriter mode.
Direct key types Basically, you can configure two different types of direct key: PROFIBUS direct keys direct keys for controlling the direct key module
Simultaneous use of PROFIBUS direct keys and direct keys for the direct key module is not possible within the same project.
PROFIBUS direct keys With PROFIBUS direct keys, you set bits on the TP directly in the I/O area of the SIMATIC S7. The bit area is set in SIMATIC STEP 7. The bit is set when the direct key is touched and reset when the key is released or when you quit the screen. Requirements 1. 2. 3. At the time your project is generated, ProTool is installed and integrated. During operation the Touch Panel is connected to a SIMATIC S7 via the PROFIBUS-DP. You have defined the bit area for direct keys in SIMATIC STEP 7 (you will find configuration tips in the "Communication Manual").
If all these requirements have not been fulfilled, ProTool interprets the configured button as a direct key for driving the direct key module. The number of PROFIBUS bits that can be manipulated by means of direct keys depends on the touch panel: Panel TP 37 TP 27 No. of Bits 40 (0...39) 24 (0...23)
Direct keys for the direct key module You can use these direct keys to drive the outputs (ports) of the optional direct key module at the back of the TP. The port is set when the direct key is touched and reset when the key is released or when you quit the screen.
5-38
Release 12/02
Requirements The TP is equipped with a direct key module and the requirements for PROFIBUS direct keys are not met. The number of ports that can be configured depends on the touch panel: Panel TP 37 TP 27 No. of Ports 16 (1...16) 8 (1...8)
5-39
Release 12/02
5.3.6
Instructions for configuring controls

Here you learn how to configure the following controls: Input fields Function keys (local and global) Buttons and direct keys Controls
5-40
Release 12/02
5.3.6.1
How to configure input fields for symbolic values
Procedure: Procedure: 1 Select the button illustrated on the "Screen Objects" toolbar on the open screen or choose "Insert" > "Text or Graphic List" from the menu. 2 Position the mouse pointer at the point where you would like to place the input field. Press and hold down the left mouse button and by dragging the mouse, expand the input field to the desired size. In the "Input/Output" dialog box, select the following settings: "Usage": Tag. In this way you establish the link to the PLC. "Field type": Input "Display": Text 4 5 Define a tag for the input field. Select a previously configured tag or define a new tag. The list entry selected at runtime determines the value of this tag. Select an existing text list at "Text or graphic list", or define a new list.
If you wish to create a new text list, click the symbol illustrated next to the list box and select "New". Configure different pieces of test in the open dialog box for different values of the tags. Click the "Add" button to add the configured text to the text list. The longest configured piece of text on the list determines the size of the input field. 6 7 8 Assign a password level to the input field on the "Enable" tab, as necessary, to enable data entry only by authorized persons. Similarly, set on the "Enable" tab, as necessary, the conditions under which you want the input field to be displayed or hidden at run time. Select the "Attributes" tag if you want to modify the foreground and background colors, for example, in Runtime, or to enable and disable flashing. Select the "Functions" tab if you want to trigger a function when you select or exit the input field. Select the "Help text" tab if you want to configure Help information. Help text can provide the user with information on the function of the input field, for example. After you close the dialog box, you will see on your screen, for example, the display >otor1 if you have configured Motor1 as the first text entry. The > character denotes an input field.
9 10
11
5-41
Release 12/02
5.3.6.2
How to configure input fields for numeric or alphanumeric values
Procedure: Procedure: 1 Select the button illustrated on the open screen on the "Screen Objects" toolbar or choose "Insert" > "Input/Output Field" from the menu. 2 Position the mouse pointer at the point where you would like to place the input field. Press and hold down the left mouse button and by dragging the mouse, expand the input field to the desired size. Select the following settings in the "Input/Output" dialog box on the "General" tab: "Usage": Tag In this way you establish the connection to the PLC. "Field type": Input "Display": numeric or alphanumeric data format, such as Decimal or String 4 5 6 7 Select a previously configured tag from the list box for the input field or define a new tag. Assign a password level to the input field on the "Enable" tab, as necessary, to enable data entry only by authorized persons. Similarly, set on the "Enable" tab, as necessary, the conditions under which you want the input field to be displayed or hidden at run time. Select the "Attributes" tag if you want to modify the foreground and background colors, for example, in Runtime, or to enable and disable flashing. Select the "Functions" tab if you want to trigger a function when you select or exit the input field. Select the "Help text" tab if you want to configure Help information. Help text can provide the user with information on the function of the input field or on input format allowed, for example. After you close the dialog box, you will see on your screen, for example, the display >1234 if you have configured a field length of 5 characters The > character denotes an input field.
8 9
10
5-42
Release 12/02
5.3.6.3
How to configure combined input/output fields
Procedure: Procedure: 1 Select the button illustrated on the open screen on the "Screen Objects" toolbar or choose "Insert" > "Input/Output Field" from the menu. 2 Position the mouse pointer at the point where you would like to place the input/output field. Press and hold down the left mouse button and by dragging the mouse, expand the input/output field to the desired size. In the "Input/Output" dialog box, select the following settings: "Usage": Tag. In this way you establish the connection to the PLC "Field type": Input/output "Display": numeric or alphanumeric data format, such as Decimal or String 4 5 6 7 Select a previously configured tag for the input/output field or define a new tag. Assign a password level to the input/output field on the "Enable" tab, as necessary, to enable inputs only by authorized persons. Similarly, set on the "Enable" tab, as necessary, the conditions under which you want the input/output field to be displayed or hidden at run time. Select the "Attributes" tag if you want to modify the foreground and background colors, for example, in Runtime, or to enable and disable flashing. Select the "Functions" tab if you want to trigger a function when you select or exit the input/output field. Select the "Help text" tab if you want to configure Help information. Help text can provide the user with information on the function of the input/output field, for example. After you close the dialog box, you will see on your screen, for example, the display =1234 if you have configured a field length of 5 characters The = character denotes a combined input/output field.
8 9
10
5-43
Release 12/02
5.3.6.4
How to assign function keys globally
Requirement for driving the LED You have created the "LED Assignment" data area on the PLC and specified it in your project at "Area Pointers" in the project window.
Procedure: Procedure: 1 2 3 4 5 Choose the "System" > "Screen/Keys" option from the menu. In the "Screen/Keys" dialog box, click the function key to which you wish to assign functions. Select the "Functions" tab in the open dialog box to assign one or more functions to the function key for the events "Print" and/or "Release". Assign a password level to the function key on the "Enable" tab, as necessary, to enable operation only by authorized persons. If you wish to drive the light-emitting diode (LED) assigned to the function key from the PLC, assign a bit in the LED assignment to the key on the "General" tab. If you wish to evaluate the operation of the function key from the PLC, assign a bit in the keyboard assignment to the key on the "General" tag.
Note You will find information on the keyboard assignment and the LED assignment for SIMATIC PLCs in the "Communication User's Guide". You can obtain information about non-SIMATIC PLCs in "Keyboard assignment" and "LED assignment"
5-44
Release 12/02
5.3.6.5
How to assign function keys (soft keys) locally
Procedure: Procedure: 1 2 3 4 5 Click the function key you require in the screen editor. Select the "Functions" tab in the Properties dialog box to assign one or more functions to the function key for the events "Print" and/or "Release". Select the "Icon" tab and assign a graphic to the key that illustrates the function of the key. Assign a password level to the function key on the "Enable" tab, as necessary, to enable operation only by authorized persons. If you wish to use global functions on the current screen, select the "Use Global Assignment" check box on the "General" tab. This means that screenspecific functions are not effective for that key.
5-45
Release 12/02
5.3.6.6
How to work with function keys (soft keys)
Working with function keys You can cut, delete and copy all configured properties of function keys by means of a shortcut menu and paste them to another function key: Use global assignment LED assignment Enable by means of a password Assigned icons Functions
You can copy and paste function key properties from one screen or project to another. A property can be used time and time again after it has been configured. You can undo the "Delete" and "Paste" commands with the "Undo" command.
Editing properties with the shortcut menu Procedure: 1 2 3 Right-click in the screen editor or the "Screen/Keys" dialog box on the desired function key. Select the desired command from the shortcut menu: "Cut", "Copy" or "Delete". If you selected "Cut" or "Copy", open the shortcut menu at another function key and transfer the properties with the "Paste" command.
5-46
Release 12/02
5.3.6.7
How to configure buttons
Procedure: To configure a predefined button with which you can select a different screen on the TP, perform the following steps: Procedure: 1 Select the button illustrated on the "Screen Objects" toolbar on the open screen or choose "Insert" > "Button" from the menu. 2 Position the mouse pointer to the place on the screen at which you want to position the button. Keeping the left mouse button pressed, drag the button to the size you require. On the "General" tab, select the "Visible" field type. In the "Display" selection field, set whether you want to label the button statically or dynamically with text or a graphic: Statically: To label the button, select "String". Enter the text at "Labeling". To display a static graphic, select "Graphic". Select the graphic from the Graphic selection list. Dynamically: To label the button dynamically with text or a graphic, select "Text" or "Graphic". Either select a previously configured text or graphic list, or create a new list. At run time the assigned text or the assigned graphic will be displayed on the button depending on the value if the tag defined in the Tag selection field. 5 6 7 8 Select the "Functions" tab to assign one or more functions to the button for the events "Print" and/or "Release". Assign a password level to the button on the "Enable" tab, as necessary, to enable operation only by authorized persons. Set on the "Color" tab the colors for the foreground, background and the border around the button. Set on the "Attributes" tab the dynamic attributes for the button (How to configure dynamic attributes). If you do not assign a function to the button, it is represented as a nonoperable light indicator.
3 4
5-47
Release 12/02
5.3.6.8
How to configure the Select Screen button
Procedure: To configure a predefined button with which you can select a different screen on the TP, perform the following steps: Procedure: 1 Select the button illustrated on the "Screen Objects" toolbar on the open screen or choose "Insert" > "Select Screen" from the menu. 2 Position the mouse pointer to the place on the screen at which you want to position the button. Keeping the left mouse button pressed, drag the button to the size you require. Define the appearance of the button in the "Select Screen" dialog box and select the screen name from the overall list of configured screens. Screens whose names begin with Z_ are already finished screens from the standard project.
5-48
Release 12/02
5.3.6.9
How to configure the Set/Reset Bit button
Procedure: To configure a predefined button with which you can set or reset a bit in a tag on the TP, perform the following steps: Procedure: 1 Select the button illustrated on the "Screen Objects" toolbar on the open screen or choose "Insert" > "Set/Reset Bit" from the menu. 2 Position the mouse pointer to the place on the screen at which you want to position the button. Keeping the left mouse button pressed, drag the button to the size you require. In the "Set/Reset Bit" dialog box, define the tag, the bit function and the appearance of the button.
5-49
Release 12/02
5.3.6.10 How to configure direct keys
Procedure: Procedure: 1 Select the button illustrated on the "Screen Objects" toolbar on the open screen or choose "Insert" > "Button" from the menu. 2 Position the mouse pointer to the place on the screen at which you want to position the button. Keeping the left mouse button pressed, drag the button to the size you require. On the "General" tab, select the "Visible" field type and set in the "Display" list box how you want to label the button. Select the "Functions" tab. Assign the "Direct Key" function to the button at "Keyboard". Specify as the parameter the port number or the bit number you want to have set when the button is touched. Assign a password level to the button on the "Enable" tab, as necessary, to enable operation only by authorized persons.
3 4 5 6
Note ProTool interprets the number entered in step 5 as the PROFIBUS bit number when the following conditions are met simultaneously: - You have installed ProTool as integrated at the time the configuration is compiled. - The touch panel is connected to a SIMATIC S7 over the PROFIBUS-DP during operation. - You have defined the bit area for direct keys in SIMATIC STEP 7. In all other cases the number entered is interpreted as the port number for the direct key module. If the number is larger than the number of available ports, an error message is issued during compilation.
Note The "Direct Key" function can be used only once per button.
Note To optimize transfer times for direct keys: - Do not place direct keys in the fixed window. - Do not configure a trend view on a screen with direct keys - Do not configure a trend view in the fixed window
5-50
Release 12/02
5.3.6.11 How to configure the PROFIBUS Screen Number function
Principle If direct keys use identical bits on different screens for different functions, a unique assignment of the bit and screen is necessary. To avoid a delay in updating the screen number on the PLC following a change of screens, there is the PROFIBUS_Screen_Number function. This function sets a bit in the same I/O area as the DP direct keys and transfers it simultaneously. If you use several bits to identify the screen, the function has to be used several times.
Procedure: Procedure: 1 2 3 4 In the project window, select the screen containing the Direct key. Choose "Edit" > "Properties" from the menu. On the "Functions" tab, assign the "PROFIBUS Screen Number" function to the current screen at "Screens". For the parameter, specify a PROFIBUS bit that you want to have reserved for the screen number and have set when the key is pressed. If you assign this function several times, you can define a bit pattern for the screen number.
Result The bits are set when the screen is opened and reset when you quit the screen. The screen number bits are transferred to the SIMATIC S7 at the same speed as the direct key bits.
5-51
Release 12/02
5.4
Tags
Purpose Since tags are the most important means of communication between the operating unit and the PLC and for exchanging data, a detailed explanation is presented here of what tags are and what types of tag are used in ProTool.
Definition A tag has a symbolic name and a defined data type. The value of the tag changes while the PLC program is being executed. Tags with a PLC link are referred to as global tags. Tags without a PLC link are known as local tags. Global tags
A tag with a PLC link occupies a defined memory address on the PLC, to which read and write access is possible from both the operating unit and the PLC. Local tags
Local tags are not connected to the PLC. They are available only on the operating unit. You create local tags, for example, so that the operator can enter limit values on the operating unit.
Tag types ProTool recognizes the following tag types (but these are not available on every PLC): Data type BYTE (OP7/17 only) INT UINT LONG ULONG FLOAT DOUBLE (OP 7/17 only) BOOL StringChar (1) DATE 64 bit Bit System 8 bit 16 bit 16 bit 32 bit 32 bit 32 bit 64 bit Range of Values 0 through 255 - 32768 through 32767 0 through 65535 - 2147483648 through 2147483647 0 through 4294967295 Upper limit: 3.402823 e+38 Lower limit: 1.175495 e-38 Approx. 12 valid digits true (1), false (0) 1 to 128 bytes Date/time value
5-52
Release 12/02
Data type ARRAY tags
Bit System This tag type combines a random number of tags of the same type to form a total, which can be handled as a whole.
Range of Values
(1): The StringChar data type corresponds to the STRING data type in ProTool versions lower than 6.0 SP2. This data type has to be renamed on compatibility grounds in the course of future development.
Online tags for S5 Data type KF KH KM KY KC KT KZ BCD4: DF DH KG Bit System 16 bit, fixed-point 16 bit, hexadecimal 16 bit, binary 8 bit, 8 bit (2 x 8 bit, comma separated) (ASCII character) (S5 timer) (S5 counter) 16 bit, BCD 32 bit, fixed-point 32 bit, hexadecimal Floating point
Online tags for S7 Data type CHAR BYTE INT WORD DINT DWORD REAL BOOL STRING TIMER COUNTER Bit System 8 bit 8 bit 16 bit, fixed-point 16 bit 32 bit, fixed-point 16 bit 32 bits floating point 1 bit ASCII character Timer (S5#Time) Counter
5-53
Release 12/02
Note The details "fixed-point", "hexadecimal", etc., refer to the representation of the CPU. They have no bearing on the display options on the OP.
Note For a SIMATIC S7, you should preferably use the bit-processing functions that have a bit tag as a parameter - for example, "Set_Bit" or "Reset_Bit". Do not use bit-processing functions that have a word tag as a parameter, such as "Set_Bit_When_Key_Is_Pressed" or "Set_Bit_In_Word". If you have to use a bit-processing function with a word tag as a parameter because, say, the PLC does not support bit tags, the word tag must not be read simultaneously. You prevent this as follows: - The same tag must not be shown in the same screen. - The tag must not have the attribute "Read continuously". Tooltip If the mouse moves above a tag name in the project window, a tooltip is displayed. It shows you the following information about the tag: Type PLC Address Symbolic link (if integrated) Full tag name
5-54
Release 12/02
5.4.1
Properties of tags
Tag definition (Section A) To define a tag, set the properties of the tag in the "Tag" dialog box. The figure shows an example of the "Tag" dialog box for SIMATIC S7 integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7.
"Tag" dialog box for the SIMATIC S7 The available data types and data formats depend on the PLC you selected. You choose at "Type" in the "Tag" dialog box between "Format" and "Decimal places".
Updating tags (Section A) The acquisition cycle determines the time interval in which the value of a tag is updated on the operating unit. If 0 is entered for the acquisition cycle, the tag is updated only when a screen is opened and then not updated any more until the screen is opened again. If a value > 0 is entered for the acquisition cycle of a tag, the tag is updated periodically in the specified time and also when the screen is opened.
The acquisition cycle is a multiple of the "standard clock pulse", which you configure for every PLC in the "PLC" dialog box. You globally modify the acquisition cycles for all the tags of a project by setting the standard clock pulse.
5-55
Release 12/02
Array tags An array tag represents a number of tags of the same type with consecutive memory addresses. If you wish to define an array tag, enter the number of elements in the array in the "Tag" dialog box at "Number of elements". The system default setting is 1, in other words, the tag is not defined as an array. The maximum number of elements in an array is 640. Application example: You can use array tags for history trends, for instance.
Address (Section B) The address determines the memory location of a global tag on the PLC. The address therefore depends on the PLC you are using. The display of the address depends on the PLC you selected. This section of the "Tag" dialog box adjusts dynamically to the programmable address areas.
ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 (Section C) If you have installed ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7, you can access the "STEP 7" symbol table directly in the "Tag" dialog box. The symbol table is displayed in the "Symbols" floater when you select the "With symbol" check box. Tag value modified by means of a function If the value of a tag is modified by means of a function (for example, by means of the function "Set Bit" on a key), functions that are configured for a change in the value for this tag might not be executed correctly. To avoid this, use two tags, both of which access the same address on the PLC. Do not configure a function for the first tag. Configure the second tag with the option "Read continuously" assign the desired functions to the tag for "Value change" event. In this way, the first tag is modified by the "Set Bit" function, for example, and the modified value is written to the PLC. The second tag reads the modified value from the PLC, detects the change in the value and executes the functions configured for the "Value change" event.
5-56
Release 12/02
5.4.2
Updating tags
Tag options On the "Options" tab of the "Tags" dialog box, you set how often the values of tags are transferred between the operating unit and the PLC and updated Write Directly (system default setting) After being entered on the operating unit, the tag value is written directly to the PLC address. Write Indirectly (only on SIMATIC S5 and SIMATIC S7) With write indirectly, the tag value is written on the PLC to an address area known as the "data mailbox". In order to ensure the coordinated execution of the transfer and prevent unwanted overwriting of the tag value in the data mailbox, bits are set in the interface area. The value can be fetched by the PLC program from the data mailbox at the appropriate time. By selecting "Write indirectly", you can configure up to three "IDs" for every tag, which are likewise written to the data mailbox. You will find further information in the "Communication User's Guide". Read Continuously The tag is updated continuously, even if it is not on the open screen. This is important with trends, for example, since a trend is normally required to be plotted even if the screen is not selected.
Note Use the "Read Continuously" option only for tags that you want to have updated continuously. Otherwise you might unnecessarily degrade the performance of your system. ONLINE If you select ONLINE (default setting), the tag is serviced by the PLC during operation. If you deselect ONLINE, the tag is disconnected from the PLC during operation. You can use this, for example, if you are taking only parts of the system into operation.
5-57
Release 12/02
5.4.3
Instructions for configuring tags

In these instructions we show you how to configure a tag.
5-58
Release 12/02
5.4.3.1
How to configure a tag
Procedure: Procedure: 1 In the "Tag" dialog box on the "General" tab, enter a name for the tag. Note If you want to use the setting "Use symbols" in recipes, the tag name must not be longer than 12 characters. 2 Begin by selecting the PLC. Then set the type and, at "Area", the address of the tag. With the "acquisition cycle", set how often the tag is updated. You can specify a number of decimal places, depending on the type. In the case of a STRING tag, enter the length of the string. 3 You can set an upper and lower limit value on the "Limit Values" tab. The default setting is "no" limit value. But you can also specify a constant value or configure a tag. Note: Limit values for tags are allowed only in DECIMAL.. 4 On the "Functions" tab, configure the functions triggered when the value of the tag is modified or when a value is entered. Only those functions are displayed which you can likewise implement with a tag of this type. If you configure several functions, they are processed in the order configured. 5 On the "Options" tab you can set a "start value" that the tag has after the download operation to the operating unit, and, if you like, you can enter a comment on this tag. With graphics displays, you select further at this point how the value of the tag is transferred to the PLC.
5-59
Release 12/02
5.4.4
Examples of configuring tags

By means of an example, we show you here how to set the acquisition cycle and the basic clock cycle of tags and convert tags automatically with the help of functions.
5-60
Release 12/02
5.4.4.1
How to set the acquisition cycle and the standard clock pulse
Increasing the acquisition cycle and the standard clock pulse System default setting: standard clock pulse 500 ms, acquisition cycle 1 s. Set the standard clock pulse in the "PLC" dialog box. If you increase the standard clock pulse to 1000 ms, the acquisition cycle for all tags is increased to 2 s. Note In order not to overtax communication between the PLC and the operating unit, the times you set for the standard clock pulse should not be too short. This would mean that other processes, such as the updating of trends or the execution of PLC jobs, would take considerably longer.
5-61
Release 12/02
5.4.4.2
Tag scaling
Configuring functions The scaling of tags is configured as a function for a tag. The following functions are available for this: Scaling Linear 1 and Scaling Linear 2 Scaling Square 1 and Scaling Square 2.
If you configure no scaling, the tag value on the PLC corresponds to the tag value on the operating unit.
Linear scaling Scaling can be configured for any tag in the form y = a*x + b. X = displayed value/input value The Y value read from the PLC undergoes linear scaling before being displayed on the operating unit as the X value. Inputs X on the operating unit undergo scaling before being written to the PLC as the Y value. Y = displayed value/input value The X value read from the PLC undergoes linear scaling before being displayed on the operating unit as the Y value. Inputs Y on the operating unit undergo scaling before being written to the PLC as the X value.
Example You have configured 3 as the value of a and 6 as the value of b. The value 21 is transferred from the PLC. It is included in the scaling function: 21 = 3 * X + 6. This results in 5 being the value for X. This is the value displayed on the operating unit.
Square scaling Scaling can be configured for any tag in the form: y = a * x^2 + b * x + c. X = displayed value/input value The Y value read from the PLC undergoes square scaling before being displayed on the operating unit as the X value. Inputs X on the operating unit undergo scaling before being written to the PLC as the Y value. Y = displayed value/input value The X value read from the PLC undergoes square scaling before being displayed on the operating unit as the Y value. Inputs Y on the operating unit undergo scaling before being written to the PLC as the X value.
Example You have configured a value of 2 for a, and a value of 2 for b and 6 for c. A value of 71 is transferred from the PLC. They are included in the scaling function: 71 = 2
5-62
Release 12/02
* X^2 + 3 * X + 6. This results in 5 being the value for X. This is the value displayed on the operating unit.
5-63
Release 12/02
5.4.5
Details on configuring tags

At "Details" you will find more information on the subject of tags.
5-64
Release 12/02
5.4.5.1
Decimal places with tags
Number of decimal places as a function of the PLC The following list shows the possible number of decimal places of the different types as a function of the PLC selected: SIMATIC S5 0 to 4 KF 0 to 6 KG 0 to 8 DF --- DH, KH, KM, KC, KY, KT, KZ, BCD4 SIMATIC S7 0 to 2 CHAR, BYTE 0 to 4 INT, WORD 0 to 6 REAL 0 to 8 DINT, DWORD --- BOOL, STRING, Timer, Counter SIMATIC S7-NC 0 to 4 INT_16, UINT_16 0 to 6 FLOAT 0 to 8 INTEGER, LONG, UINT32, DOUBLE --- BOOL, CHAR, STRING SIMATIC 500/505 0 to 4 +/- INT, INT 0 to 6 REAL 0 to 8 +/- DOUBLE, DOUBLE --- BIT, ASCII No PLC 0 to 4 INT, UINT 0 to 6 FLOAT 0 to 8 LONG, ULONG --- BOOL, STRING
5-65
Release 12/02
5.4.5.2
Address and type of a tag
Dependence of tags on the PLC The address and the data type (the data format) of a tag depends on the PLC. Note You will find information about the various PLCs at "Start" > "SIMATIC" > "ProTool" > "ProTool Information System" in the topic "Process communication".
Available PLCs SIMATIC S5 - AS511 SIMATIC S5 - DP SIMATIC S7-300/400 SIMATIC WinAC SIMATIC S7-200 SIMATIC 500/505 SIMATIC 500/505-DP SIMOTION OPC (Client/Server) Allen-Bradley DF1 Allen-Bradley DH485 LG GLOFA-GM MITSUBISHI FX MITSUBISHI Protocol 4 Modicon Modbus Telemecanique Uni-Telway GE Fanuc SNP/SNPX Omron Host-Link
5-66
Release 12/02
5.5
Multiplexing
Purpose When multiplexing, you assign several tags to trends, bar graphs or input/output fields, not just one. Assignment depends on the value of an index tag. A tag, selected at run time, is assigned to each of the index tag values. Using the index tag, you can control all the tags of a screen, for example. This spares you the trouble of configuring several screens for similar applications.
Applications You can multiplex the following objects: Bar graph Trends Trend tags Input/output fields
5-67
Release 12/02
5.5.1
Multiplexing a bar graph
Purpose When you configure a bar graph, you define in advance the tag from which you want the values to be read and displayed on the operating unit. If you multiplex bar graphs, the assignment of the bar graph to a tag is not static but depends on the value of an index tag. This allows you to determine several tags whose values are displayed, depending on the situation, as bar graphs at runtime.
Principle Selection of the tags is controlled by means of the index tag. Every index tag value has assigned to it a tag, with values read and displayed. The figure shows the principle of multiplexing bar graphs by means of three examples.
Multiplexing bar graphs (principle) In the bar graph shown, the contents of tanks T1, T2 or T3 are displayed on the operating unit as a function of the index tag value VAR_S1. The tank contents are read from tags VAR_1 through VAR_3.
5-68
Release 12/02
5.5.2
Multiplexing trends
Purpose When you configure a trend view, you determine in advance the trends that you want to have displayed on the operating unit. If you multiplex trends, selection of the trends is not static but depends on the value of an index tag. This allows you to determine which trends are shown in the different situations at run time.
Principle Selection of the trends is controlled by means of the index tag. A trend is assigned to every index tag value. The figure illustrates the principle of multiplexing trends.
Multiplexing trends (principle) Temperature values Temp1 through Temp3 are stored in DB 10 on the PLC at addresses DW 37, DW 39 and DW 41. Tags Var1 through Var3 are configured for these addresses. A trend buffer is created for every single tag on the operating unit. The size of the trend buffers depends on the configured number of samples/max. The value of index tag Var_A determines the buffer from which the values come for the trend view you want to have displayed. With this type of multiplexing, all the trends are up to date in the background.
5-69
Release 12/02
5.5.3
Multiplexing trend tags
Purpose The standard case is to set up a separate trend buffer for each trend to be displayed on the operating unit. When trend tags are being multiplexed, different trend tags write to a shared trend buffer, depending on the value of an index tag. In other words, a trend view displays a trend whose values are read by different tags belonging to the trend buffer. This allows you to determine which trends should be shown in the different situations at run time. At the same time, you save storage space on the operating unit by using a common trend buffer.
Principle Every value of the index tag is assigned a trend tag which writes to the trend buffer. The figure illustrates the principle of multiplexing trend tags.
Multiplexing trends (principle)
5-70
Release 12/02
Temperature values Temp1 through Temp3 are stored in DB 10 on the PLC at addresses DW 37, DW 39 and DW 41. Tags Var1 through Var3 are configured for these addresses. The value of index tag Var_A determines which tag writes values to the trend buffer. With this type of multiplexing, it is possible to display a larger number of process values as a trend, since separate trend buffers are not created for every trend.
5-71
Release 12/02
5.5.4
Multiplexing input/output fields
Basic procedure When you configure input or output fields, you define in advance the tag in which inputs are applied and from which values required to be output are read. If you multiplex input and output fields, the assignment to a tag is not static but depends on the value of an index tag. This allows you to determine several tags whose values can be displayed, depending on the situation, in an output field at run time or entered in an input field and modified.
5-72
Release 12/02
5.5.5
Instructions for multiplexing

Here you will learn how to: Multiplex bar graphs and trends. Multiplex trend tags. Multiplex input and output fields.
5-73
Release 12/02
5.5.5.1
How to multiplex bar graphs
Procedure: Procedure: 1 2 3 4 If you have not opened the "Bar Graph" dialog box, double-click on the bar graph field. Select the "General" tab and click the "Multiplex" button. Configure the index tag. The value of the index tag determines at run time which tag is selected as the bar graph. Assign different tags to the values of the index tag, from which you want to have the values read for the bar graph. To do this, select a tag from the "Multiplex Tag" list box and apply it to the list of tags by clicking "Add". The value of the index tag (= index) is incremented by a value of 1 for every new tag added. 5 If required, rearrange the order of the assigned tags using the "Up" and "Down" buttons.
5-74
Release 12/02
5.5.5.2
How to multiplex trends
Procedure: Procedure: 1 2 3 4 If you have not opened the "Trend View" dialog box, double-click on the trend view. Select the next available entry or a previously configured index tag from the list of configured trends and click the "Multiplex" button. Configure the index tag. The value of the index tag determines at run time which trend is displayed in the trend field. Assign different trends to the values of the index tag. To do this, select a trend from the "Trend" list box and apply it to the list of trends by clicking "Add". The value of the index tag (= index) is incremented by a value of 1 for every new trend added. 5 6 If required, rearrange the order of the assigned trends using the "Up" and "Down" buttons. Confirm your settings by clicking OK. The index tag appears in the list of trends in the "Trend View" dialog box. This means that you can see the curves that are being multiplexed at a glance.
5-75
Release 12/02
5.5.5.3
How to multiplex trend tags
Procedure: Procedure: 1 2 3 4 5 If you have not opened the "Trend View" dialog box, double-click on the trend view. Select from the "Trend" list box the trend which you wish to multiplex. Open the "Trend" dialog box with "Edit". Select the "Data Source" tab and click the "Multiplex" button. Configure the index tag. The value of the index tag determines at run time which tag is selected as the trend tag. Assign different tags to the values of the index tag, from which you want to have the values read for the trend. To do this, select a tag from the "Multiplex Tag" list box and apply it to the list of tags by clicking "Add". The value of the index tag (= index) is incremented by a value of 1 for every new tag added. 6 7 If required, rearrange the order of the assigned tags using the "Up" and "Down" buttons. Confirm your settings by clicking "OK" in order to return to the "Trend View" dialog box. If you select the multiplexed trend from the list of trends, the assigned value is displayed in square brackets - for example, [VAR_24]. This means that you can see at a glance that this tag is an index tag for a multiplexed trend.
5-76
Release 12/02
5.5.5.4
How to multiplex input/output fields
Procedure: Procedure: 1 2 3 4 If you have not opened the "Input/Output Field" dialog box, double-click on the input/output field. Select the "General" tab and click the "Multiplex" button. Configure the index tag. The value of the index tag determines which tag is assigned to the input/output field at run time. Assign different tags to the values of the index tag. To do this, select a tag from the "Multiplex Tag" list box and apply it to the list of tags by clicking "Add". The value of the index tag (= index) is incremented by a value of 1 for every new tag added. 5 If required, rearrange the order of the assigned tags using the "Up" and "Down" buttons.
5-77
Release 12/02
5.5.6
Examples of multiplexing
This example shows you how to multiplex a bar graph.
5-78
Release 12/02
5.5.6.1
How to multiplex bar graphs
Objective In the following example, three values of index tag VAR_S1 are assigned tags VAR_1 through VAR_3. The PLC is a SIMATIC S7.
Procedure: Procedure: 1 2 On the "General" tab, click the "Multiplex" button. Configure index tag Var_S1. The value of the index tag determines at run time which tag is selected as the bar graph. Select this button at index tag. In the "Tag" dialog box, enter the symbolic name Var_S1 and the following values. Type: INT DB: 15 DBW: 0 PLC: PLC_1 VAR_S1 assumes the values 0, 1 or 2. Each of these three values is now assigned a separate tag. 3 Configure the multiplex tags VAR_1, VAR_2 and VAR_3: Select this button at Multiplex tag. In the "Tag" dialog box, enter the symbolic name Var_1 and the following values: Type: INT DB: 16 DBW: 1 PLC: PLC_1 Then click the "Add" button. Tag VAR_1 is accepted into the list and VAR_S1 is assigned to the value (index) 0 of the index tag. Repeat this step with Var_2 and Var_3. 4 Confirm by clicking OK. A small cross now appears on the "Multiplex" button to indicate that multiplexing is being used. The index tag is specified instead of the tag.
5-79
Release 12/02
5.6
Text or graphic lists
Purpose Text or graphics are often more meaningful than abstract values. For example, the pieces of text full and empty or two graphic symbols present the state of a tank more lucidly than the corresponding numerical values. Which is why ProTool gives you the opportunity to configure text or graphic lists. These text or graphic lists are lists in which you assign an element from the list to each tag value.
Usage With text or graphic lists, for example, you can label buttons dynamically, display text or graphics in output fields and select texts for input in input fields. To a large extent, this eliminates misinterpretations in the display and operator errors during input. You will find further information on using text or graphic lists on a screen in the topics dealing with input fields, output fields and buttons.
Text list A text list assigns text to every value of a tag. At run time, the tag value determines which text is selected from the list and displayed, for example, in an input/output field on the operating unit. To create a new text list, select the button illustrated on the toolbar. Note The configurable range of values in a text list ranges from 0 to 32767 for a maximum of 3500 different blocks of text.
Graphic list A graphic list assigns a graphic to every value of a tag. At run time, the tag value determines which graphic is selected from the list and displayed, for example, in an output field on the operating unit. To create a new graphics list, select the button illustrated on the toolbar.
5-80
Release 12/02
5.7
Creating Graphics
Purpose Graphics are static display elements that are not linked to the PLC. They cannot be modified at run time on the operating unit. Use graphics, for example, for displaying your system or as explanatory symbolism for dynamic display and controls
Creating graphics ProTool features an option of embedding external graphic editors via the OLE interface. In this way you can create graphics with your usual applications without having to become familiar with a new graphics program. ProTool displays every graphic you are using as a bitmap, irrespective of whether you create the graphic with a pixel-oriented graphics program - for example, Paint or with a vector-oriented graphics program. Vector graphics are converted into pixel graphics before being displayed in ProTool. Configure graphics by selecting the symbol illustrated or by choosing "Insert" > "Graphic" from the menu.
Color presentation on the operating unit With pixel graphics, if you notice differences between the colors displayed on the operating unit and those configured in ProTool, proceed as follows: On the configuration computer, choose on the Start menu "Settings" > "Control Panel" > "Display" and on the "Settings" tab, select at "Colors" the setting "True Color". Retain this setting for configuring and compiling the project.
Smooth display If the "Smooth" setting is enabled, an anti-alias filter for replacing missing pixels due to interpolation is used when increasing or decreasing the size of a graphic. This setting results in softer transitions in photo-realistic displays. In the case of drawings, the display quality is enhanced when zooming out of graphics in particular, since the complete screen information is retained.
5-81
Release 12/02
5.7.1
Instructions for configuring graphics

We will show you here how to: Configure graphics. Edit OLE objects. Create graphics without distortions. Edit bitmaps.
5-82
Release 12/02
5.7.1.1
How to configure graphics
Procedure: Procedure: 1 Select the button illustrated from the toolbar or choose "Insert" > "Graphic". 2 Position the mouse pointer at the place on the screen at which you want to position the graphic. Press and hold down the left mouse button and by dragging the mouse, expand the graphic field to the desired size. Select whether you want to insert an existing graphic into your project or create a new graphic. Insert an existing graphic: Choose the option "Create from File". Either enter the path name directly or use "Browse" to browse through the directory hierarchy of the data medium. Create a new graphic: Choose the option "Create New". Select the object type you require - for example, bitmap - from the list. Click "OK" to start the corresponding application - for example, Paint. Create the graphic, close the application and return to ProTool. 5 The graphic is embedded in your project and scaled to the size of the graphic field you opened by dragging.
3 4
5-83
Release 12/02
5.7.1.2
How to create distortion-free graphics
Principle To obtain distortion-free graphics, the size of the click-and-drag graphic field in ProTool and the size of the graphic must be identical. In this way you avoid distortions due to different scaling factors for x and y coordinates.
Procedure: Procedure: 1 Choose "View" > "Size/Position" from the menu and enable the position and size display to view the current position of the mouse pointer and the size of the current object in pixels. Click and drag a graphic field having a size of, say, 600 200. This means that the graphic field has an aspect ratio of 3:1. Note the pixel values shown in the lower part of the position and size display. Select the graphic editor you require from the list box. If the ruler of the screen editor has not so far been enabled, enable it now. Create a rectangle as a guide frame first before you start work on the graphic. The guide frame must have the same aspect ratio as the graphic field in ProTool. A guide frame of 15 cm 5 cm, for example, similarly produces the desired result of 3:1. Create or import the graphic such that it does not protrude beyond the guide frame at any point. Once you have finished creating the graphic, assign the background color to the guide frame so that it is not visible in your project. If the graphic is subsequently modified, you can then take your bearings from the aspect ratios of the guide frame. Return to ProTool. The scaling of the graphic is now free from distortion.
3 4 5
6 7
5-84
Release 12/02
5.7.1.3
How to change the size of vector graphics
Principle If you want to change the size of a vector graphic embedded in ProTool, it is not sufficient merely to change the size of the screen object in ProTool. You also have to change the size in the graphic editor (external) to avoid distortions.
Procedure: Procedure: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Choose "View" > "Size/Position" from the menu and enable the position and size display. Click the graphic and make a note of its size details. Change the size of the screen object and make a note of its new size details. Determine the ratio between the old and new sizes (for height and width). Start the screen editor by double-clicking on the screen object. Select all the objects of the graphic in the screen editor and change the size of the graphic in the aspect ratio that you determined in step 4. Close the graphic editor following updating of the file and return to ProTool. The menu option is dependent on the graphic editor you are using.
5-85
Release 12/02
5.7.1.4
How to edit bitmaps
Procedure: To edit an existing bitmap in ProTool, there are the following possibilities: Choose "Edit" > "Bitmap Object" > "Open" from the menu (has the same effect as double-clicking on the graphic). This opens the appropriate screen editor in a separate window for you. Choose "Edit" > "Bitmap Object" > "Edit" from the menu (has the same effect as double-clicking on the graphic while holding down CTRL). This means that you can edit the bitmap object directly on the configured screen.
Note To make work easier, set the zoom factor to 100 % while editing in ProTool. Double-click the bitmap object in the project window and select an editor.
5-86
Release 12/02
5.7.1.5
How to change the size and section of OLE objects
Principle Graphics created with an external graphic editor are integrated as OLE objects in the project screen.
Procedure: To change the size of an OLE object embedded in ProTool, take the following steps: Procedure: 1 2 Click the object with the mouse. Drag one of the sizing handles to change the size of the object. The graphic display of the object will either be blunted or elongated, depending on the direction.
Note If you want to change the size of a vector graphic embedded in ProTool, it is not sufficient merely to change the size of the screen object in ProTool. You also have to change the size in the graphic editor (external) to avoid distortions. To change the section of an embedded OLE object: Procedure: 1 2 Click the object with the mouse. Drag one of the sizing handles while holding ALT down. This changes the size of the displayed object section. The size of the object itself remains unmodified. This behavior is supported, for example, by Excel and Word in the Office 97 package from Microsoft. In the case of Excel, the number of visible columns and rows is changed in the modified section, whereas in Word the text is wrapped anew.
5-87
Release 12/02
5.8
Trends
Usage Real-time trend With a realtime trend only one trend value at a time is read from the PLC for each time unit (clock pulse) and added to the trend displayed on the operating unit. Real-time trends are suitable for displaying slow, continuous patterns. Pattern trend With a pattern trend, all trend values are read simultaneously from the PLC and displayed as a trend on the operating unit by setting a trigger bit. Pattern trends are suitable for displaying rapid changes if the trend variation, seen in its entirety, (profile) is more interesting than individual values.
Trigger: The trigger type defines how trend data is read in: Clock trigger (as function of time) In the case of a clock trigger, the data that has to be acquired in the trend is read from the PLC in a fixed, adjustable time slot. To do this, select "Read Continuously" on the "Options" tab when configuring the tag. If the configured number of samples has been reached, the oldest value is overwritten by every new one. By means of the specified time slot and the number of samples you want to have displayed, you set the period of time that has to be covered by the trend data. This type of trigger is suitable for "real-time trends". Bit trigger (event triggered) With a bit trigger, the data that have to be acquired on the trend are read in upon being triggered by an event. The event is triggered by the PLC as a result of setting a defined bit. There are two options for reading in trend data: Single-value acquisition Only one value is read from the PLC each time a bit is set. Single-value acquisition is suitable for displaying "real-time trends". Buffered data acquisition Buffered data are read out from the PLC as an entire block every time a bit is set. Buffered data acquisition is suitable for displaying "history trends".
Communication areas for bit-triggered trends For you to be able to configure bit-triggered trends, you have to set communication areas at "Area Pointers" in the project window and create them on the PLC. The operating unit and the PLC communicate with each other via these areas: Trend request area This area can be used by the PLC to evaluate which trend is currently being displayed on the operating unit. Trend transfer area 1 This area is used to trigger the trends. Trend transfer area 2 This area is required only for trends that you configure with a switch buffer.
5-88
Release 12/02
A specific trigger bit is assigned to every trend in all bit areas. If, for example, you have assigned trigger bit 4 to a trend, that trend will be identified by bit 4 in all bit areas.
Switch buffer A switch buffer is a second buffer which you can create for a pattern trend. While the operating unit is reading the trend values from buffer 1, the PLC can already write the new values to buffer 2. When the operating unit is reading buffer 2, the PLC is writing to buffer 1. The switch buffer prevents the PLC from overwriting values while the operating unit is reading the trend.
Switch buffer: reading and writing trend values simultaneously
5-89
Release 12/02
5.8.1
Instructions for configuring trends

Here we show you the different steps you have to perform to configure a trend.
5-90
Release 12/02
5.8.1.1
How to configure trends
Procedure: Procedure: 1 In the project window, double-click on the symbol illustrated or choose "Insert" > "Object" to configure a new trend. 2 On the "General" and "Color" tabs, define how the trend is to be displayed at run time, and enter a name for the trend. "Uncertain status" highlights areas in the trend display in which communication with the unit was interrupted and values could not be plotted for that reason. 3 4 5 6 Select the tab "data source". Configure the "trend tag" from which you want the values for the trend to be read at run time. Set the trend type: "real-time trend" or "history trend". Set the trigger type: "Clock Pulse" Set a time slot between 0.1 sec and 6553,0 sec. The operating unit reads the data periodically within that time-slot pattern. "Bit" Assign a trigger bit to the trend. The operating unit reads in data as soon as the bit is set. Select the "Switch buffer" check box for history curves if you want to prevent the PLC from overwriting values while the operating unit is reading the trend. 7 8 Click the "Multiplex" button to select different tags at run time. If you wish to configure additional trends, repeat steps 1 to 7. If necessary, assign a different color to every trend so that there is a clear distinction between the trends at run time.
Note If you are configuring bit-triggered trends, then also define the two user data areas "Trend Request" and "Trend Transfer1" in the project window by double-clicking on "Area pointers". If you wish to configure history trends with switch buffer, define user data area "Trend Transfer2", too.
5-91
Release 12/02
5.8.2
Details for configuring trends

Here you will find more information about configuring trends.
5-92
Release 12/02
5.8.2.1
How a bit trigger works
Principle When a screen containing a trend view with one or more bit-triggered trends is opened on the operating unit, the operating unit sets the bits assigned to the individual trends in the "trend request area" in each case. From the bits set, the PLC can evaluate which trends are currently being displayed on the operating unit. If the PLC program now sets both the bits assigned to the trends and the trend communication bit in the "trend transfer area", the operating unit detects the trigger. It resets the trend bits and the "trend communication bit" and, depending on the configuration, reads out one value or the entire buffer. As soon as the conditions for a new trigger have been met, the PLC program sets the trend bits and the trend communication bit again. Once the screen has been deselected, the operating unit resets the bits set in the trend request area. Define the trend request area and trend transfer area in the project window at "Area pointers". You will find a description of these data areas in the "Communication Manual". Note The position of the communication bit in the trend transfer area depends on the PLC you set. Do not use this bit for the identification of bit-triggered trends.
5-93
Release 12/02
5.8.2.2
Array tags for history trends
Principle You can configure array tags for history trends. You use the number of elements to set the size of the trend buffer. This number has to be identical to the number of samples you set for the trend. The history trend is represented by the array tag. If you use this array tag in a recipe, you can save the history trend to a data medium on the operating unit and read it back in, just like you would with any other data record.
Constraint The data types "Byte" and "Char" are not allowed in array tags for history trends.
5-94
Release 12/02
5.8.2.3
Interrupting the recording of trend data
Principle If you interrupt operation of the operating unit while clock-triggered trends are being recorded, the X axis with the time label is updated immediately upon restarting. The trend values are, however, updated at the configured clock-pulse rate and therefore temporarily do not correspond to the time values displayed. For this reason, the vertical bar displayed on the screen is shown in the trend view when plotting restarts. The bar represents the time of interruption and migrates continuously at the configured clock-pulse rate out of the trend view.
Interrupted trend plotting
5-95
Release 12/02
5.9
Messages
To display process and operating states or to acquire and log process data on the operating unit that you obtain on the process from the PLC, configure "messages". Messages are initiated by the PLC and can be displayed on the operating unit.
5-96
Release 12/02
5.9.1
Displaying operating and process states
What do you use to display operating and process states? To display process and operating states or to acquire and log process data on the operating unit that you obtain on the process from the PLC, configure "messages". Messages are initiated by the PLC and can be displayed on the operating unit. There are the following message types in ProTool: Event messages: Display routine operating and process states and processes. Alarm messages: Display critical or hazardous operating and process states and require operating personnel to react by issuing an "acknowledgement". System messages: Display states and errors of the operating unit, the PLC or the communications between them. They are issued by the operating unit or by the PLC.
For what purpose do you use messages? The messaging system is responsible for the following tasks: Reporting events or states that might occur on the system or in the process: A state is reported immediately after its occurrence. - The messages are presented to the operator as a function of their significance (priority). Support when troubleshooting error conditions: - Messages provide detailed information on the causes of errors (diagnostics) The process might be influenced as a result of the message. Reporting: The message events are output to a printer.
5-97
Release 12/02
5.9.2
The components of a message
Message structure A message consists of: Message number Message text A message tag Help text
The following messages are displayed on the operating unit but cannot be edited in ProTool: The message number cannot be modified in system messages, standard diagnostic results (S7 system messages) and NC alarms. (Only with OP 7 and OP 17). Message numbers of user defined diagnostic results can be freely defined in SIMATIC STEP 7 within certain limits. The message number is assigned to Alarm_S messages in SIMATIC STEP 7.
Message number The message number is used to reference a message. In ProTool, you have a free choice of message number (within the range 0 to 2000) and message text. Message text The message text contains the description of the message. The extent of the message text depends on the operating unit. The number of characters per line is identified during configuration at the top border of the window by a character (A). The message number is in line with a specific structure. It consists of a number, which is unique CPU-wide, and specification of the message type. The mesage type is not displayed on the device. You can only see the number on the device. Note It is possible that two identical numbers might be displayed for different messages. The causes of this could be as follows: - The displayed number has been assigned to several message types. - The message number has been assigned on several CPUs to different messages. Messages are not identified on RMOS device CPUs.
5-98
Release 12/02
By choosing "Edit" > "Style" from the menu, you can select the following styles, for example, for the message text, depending on the operating unit: flashing, underscore, italic. Note You can also configure operator instructions as a message. Message tags A message can contain output fields with tags. They are also referred to as "message tags". By choosing "Edit" > "Style" from the menu, you can select from the following styles for output fields, depending on the operating unit: flashing, underscore, italic. Insert an output field by selecting the symbol illustrated.
Note The values of message tags are updated in the message buffer when messages are active or are cleared, but not when messages are acknowledged. Help text Help text containing further details on a message can be configured for every message. Help text is displayed for the operator in a separate window on the operating unit by pressing the "HELP" key. Enter Help text by selecting the button illustrated or by using the menu command "View" > "Help Text".
Other message components When configuring message views for certain devices, other message components can be displayed - for example, details of the error location (on the PLC).
5-99
Release 12/02
5.9.3
Message properties
Configurable properties You can configure the following parameters for messages: Priority Acknowledgement group Print Port / relay
Priority High-priority messages are displayed before low-priority messages on the operating unit. The lowest priority is 1. If several messages having the same priority are waiting to be displayed, the most recent (last) is displayed. If several unacknowledged alarm messages having the same priority are waiting to be displayed, you can choose whether the most recent (last) or the oldest (first) should be displayed.
Configure the priority in the "Attributes" dialog box for every single message. Set the sort criterion by choosing "System" > "Messages" > "Settings" from the menu.
Acknowledgement group Alarm messages can be assigned to acknowledgement groups. Configure the assignment to an acknowledgement group for every single message. If you acknowledge an alarm message in one acknowledgement group, all the alarm messages in that group are acknowledged simultaneously ("group acknowledgement").
Print If you select "Print", the message event (active, cleared, acknowledged) is logged automatically on the printer if you selected "Print upon Message Event" after choosing "System" > "Messages" > "Settings" from the menu. Configure printing in the "Attributes" dialog box for every single message.
port / relay If you select "Relay", the "active" message event automatically drives the relay on the operating unit. If you select "Port", the "active" message event automatically drives a port on the operating unit. For this you have connect a "direct key module" (DKM) to the operating unit.
5-100
Release 12/02
You can configure the following ports for the different operating units: OP 25, OP 27, TP 27 ports 1 to 8 OP 35, OP 37, TP 37 ports 1 to 16 Windows-based systems ports 1 to 16 Configure port/relay in the "Attributes" dialog box for every single message.
5-101
Release 12/02
5.9.4
Acknowledging messages
Principle An alarm message can be acknowledged either by the operator on the operating unit or by the PLC program. By acknowledging an alarm message, the operator confirms that he has taken note of the message.
Single acknowledgment and group acknowledgment When you configure messages, you can set whether the operator as to acknowledge each message singly or whether the acknowledgement will apply to a group of messages. The use of acknowledgement groups is practical in particular for messages having the same cause for example, the message of the initial error and consequential errors.
Assigning acknowledgement groups In the Attributes dialog box of the message editor, you can combine messages to form acknowledgement groups by assigning them the same number at "Acknowledgement". You can allocate the messages to one of up to 16 acknowledgement groups. The value 0 or a blank "Acknowledgement" field signifies that an acknowledgement applies only to that alarm message (single acknowledgment).
5-102
Release 12/02
5.9.5
Driving a port/relay
Driving a relay If you have selected"Relay" for a message, the relay connected to the operating unit is driven. The relay is energized upon the occurrence of the arrive event. The relay is deenergized in the case of event messages: Cleared Message Event. alarm messages: Acknowledged Message Event.
Driving a port If you have activated "Port" for a message, the port connected to the operating unit is driven - in other words, 24 V DC are applied. The port is energized upon the occurrence of the arrive event. The port is disabled again upon the occurrence of event messages: Cleared Message Event. alarm messages: Acknowledged Message Event.
5-103
Release 12/02
5.9.6
Settings for message classes
Properties of message classes You can configure the following parameters for message classes: acknowledgement printout
acknowledgement Alarm messages have to be acknowledged. Alarm messages are displayed until they have been acknowledged. Single acknowledgement: When you acknowledge a message, only that particular message is acknowledged. Group acknowledgement: When you acknowledge a message belonging to an acknowledgement group, all the queued messages of this group are acknowledged, too.
printout Printing is enabled or disabled by selecting the "Print" attribute, or is enabled when the message buffer overflows. The messages are printed on a printer attached to the operating unit. Configure your printout by choosing "System" > "Messages" > "Settings" from the menu.
5-104
Release 12/02
5.9.7
System messages
Displaying system messages System messages are always implemented on the operating unit and cannot be configured in ProTool. They are displayed in a process window.
What is reported? A system message consists of a "message number" and "message text". The message text may contain internal system tags that provide further details on the cause of an error message. System messages provide information on operating unit operating states. The wealth of possible system messages ranges from notes to serious errors. Note You will find a list of system messages of the operating units, their causes and, if possible, remedial action in an appendix to the equipment manuals and the "Communication User's Guide".
Displaying system messages At "System" > "Messages" > "System Messages" you set the system messages you want to have displayed on the operating unit and for how long. Note The 0 setting means the display is static. The process window is not closed until you press ESC.
5-105
Release 12/02
5.9.8
Logging messages
Enabling and disabling message logging To log messages on the printer, select the "Print" check box in the "Attributes Message" dialog box. The messages are logged when their status changes (active, cleared, acknowledged). By choosing "System" > "Messages" > "Settings" from the menu, you can select the following settings for message logging: "Message event" Message logging is activated for those message events for which the attribute "Print" has been selected. "Buffer overflow" When the specified remaining buffer capacity is reached, all messages are printed irrespective of whether printing is enabled or not. The message buffer is then deleted. "Off" Message logging is disabled.
You use the "Message Log ON/OFF" function to enable and disable printing of messages
5-106
Release 12/02
5.9.9
Configuring printers for the operating unit
Printer for logging Attach a printer to your operating unit to log process states or process data reports. For this you can configure one or more printers. In ProTool, some printers in the list box have already been defined. Parameters have already been assigned to these printers. You can add more "new printers" to the list box in ProTool. You have to enter the specific control characters contained in the printer manuals concerned for these printers.
Perform the settings for the printers and the interface parameters by choosing "System" > "Printer" from the menu. Note Use the Z_PRINTER standard screen that is part of the standard configuration.
5-107
Release 12/02
5.9.10 Displaying messages on the operating unit
Displaying messages Messages are displayed in special process windows. Set the properties of the following objects by choosing "System" > "Screen/Keys" from the menu: Message window/message line: Messages are output here. Message indicator: The message indicator indicates that alarm messages are waiting or have to be acknowledged. The message indicator is used for acknowledging messages on touch panels.
Sort criterion for alarm messages If several unacknowledged alarm messages of the same priority are queued, select the sort criterion by choosing "System" > "Messages" > "Settings" from the menu: First Last The first (oldest) alarm message is displayed first. The last (most recent) alarm message is displayed first.
If you configure the function Alarms - Display First/Last you can change the sort order on the operating unit. Note This function has already been implemented on the System Settings standard screen of the standard project (Refer to "Standard screens")
Standby message The "standby message" is a special event message. The standby message is the event message having message number 0. It is displayed on the message line when no other messages are queued on the operating unit. Note The standby message can have only message text and output fields containing the date and time.
5-108
Release 12/02
5.9.11 Contents of message buffers
Definition A message buffer is a buffered memory area in the operating unit RAM in which message events are stored in chronological order. It takes the form of a FIFO buffer with a specified size and does not have to be explicitly configured. The size of the message buffer is 512 message events.
Data storage in message buffer Every message event is stored with the following information: Message number Identification of the event ("K" for Active, "G" for Cleared, "Q" for Acknowledged) Time stamp consisting of date and time Acknowledgement group "QGR" (with alarm messages only) Message text Value of the message tag at the time of arrival or departure
Example Below is an example of output from the message buffer to the printer: 0010 G 11:58:08 27.03.98 QGR02 Boiler pressure too high: 7.9 bar 0029 Q 11:40:47 27.03.98 QGR00 Oil supply shut off. 0029 KQ 11:38:09 27.03.98 QGR00 Oil supply shut off. 0010 Q 11:35:18 27.03.98 QGR02 Boiler pressure too high: #### bar 0010 KQ 11:34:26 27.03.98 QGR02 Boiler pressure too high: 12.7 bar If a message contains process values, then those values that were available when the message event arrived or departed are stored in the message buffer. In the case of the "acknowledged" message status, the operating unit does not acquire any current process values. The characters ### stand for the value.
5-109
Release 12/02
Behavior on overflow Choose "System" > "Messages" > "Settings" from the menu to select whether an overflow warning should be output when the specified remaining buffer capacity is reached. Before the messages are deleted, they are output to the printer. This applies to all messages even if they are not marked with the "Print" attribute.
Using a standard screen The following functions have already been implemented on the standard screen known as "Edit Message" (Z_MESSAGES): Display event and alarm buffers Print event and alarm buffers Delete event and alarm buffers Display event and alarm pages Open event message window
5-110
Release 12/02
5.9.12 Type of message view (message window or message line)!
Type of message view Set display of messages on the operating unit by choosing "System" > "Screen/Keys" from the menu. Choose between the following combinations: Window - window Event messages and alarm messages are displayed in separate message windows. The alarm message window opens automatically whenever an alarm message arrives; enable and disable the event message window by choosing the function "Event Window". Window - line An alarm message is displayed in the message window, whereas an event message is displayed on the message line. The message line is visible at all times. The alarm message window opens automatically whenever an alarm message arrives. Window - off An alarm message is displayed in the message window. Event messages are not displayed. Line - line (except touch panels) The message line is visible at all times. Any alarm messages or event messages that are issued are displayed on the message line according to their priority. Graphics display units: If no message is pending, the standby message if configured is displayed.
Dynamic positioning (OP 35, OP 37 only) You can activate "dynamic positioning" by choosing "System" > "Screen/Keys" from the menu. This causes the position of the message and Help text windows to be changed dynamically as a function of cursor position so that input fields just undergoing editing are not concealed.
5-111
Release 12/02
5.9.13 What does the message indicator show?
Displaying the message indicator Set display of the message indicator on the operating unit by choosing "System" > "Screen/Keys" from the menu. The message indicator indicates that alarm messages are waiting. As soon as an alarm message is waiting, an alarm message window and the message indicator are displayed. As soon as at least one unacknowledged alarm message is queued, the message indicator flashes.
Message indicator on touch panels On touch panels, the message indicator is an "operable button" and is used to acknowledge alarm messages. It cannot be hidden for that reason. The message indicator may assume two states: Flashing: As soon as at least one unacknowledged alarm message is queued. Static: When all queued alarm messages have been acknowledged but at least one of them is not yet cleared. Not until all acknowledged messages have departed is the message indicator hidden. In this way it is not possible fore you to forget queued alarm messages.
If the alarm message window is shown on top, the alarm message page is opened by touching the message indicator. At each touch you can toggle between the alarm message buffer and the alarm message page.
5-112
Release 12/02
5.9.14 Communication areas for messages
Communication area required for operating unit/PLC communication For communication between the operating unit and the PLC to function properly, establish an assignment to the following communication areas in the project window of your ProTool project at "Area Pointers": "Event messages" and/or "Alarm messages". These areas are imperative if you configure event messages and alarm messages. They must be chosen at least large enough for a bit to be available for every configured message. If the communication area is not made large enough, a warning will be issued during compilation of the project. If you wish, you can create the following communication areas: PLC Acknowledgement OP Acknowledgement
Optional communication areas: Acknowledgement areas for messages If the PLC is required to send an acknowledgement automatically, create the following acknowledgement areas in the project window at "Area Pointers". "PLC Acknowledgement" The acknowledgement bit is set by the PLC program and thus causes acknowledgement of the corresponding alarm message to be displayed on the operating unit. The "PLC Acknowledgement" acknowledgement area must be contiguous with the associated alarm message area must have the same acquisition cycle as the alarm message area must not be longer than the associated alarm message area. "OP Acknowledgement" The operator acknowledges an alarm message on the operating unit and thus sets the acknowledgement bit of this alarm message on the PLC. When he does so, the entire acknowledgement area is transferred to the PLC. The "OP Acknowledgement" acknowledgement area must not be longer than the associated alarm message area.
5-113
Release 12/02
5.9.15 Message procedures:
Message procedures in ProTool The message procedure identifies the transfer path of messages and thus also the parameters of the messages. ProTool supports two message procedures: The message bit procedure This is the default message procedure in ProTool. The operating unit detects the messages by setting a corresponding bit on the PLC. The ALARM_S message number procedure
5-114
Release 12/02
5.9.15.1 Message bit procedure
Principle With the message bit procedure, the operating unit detects the arrival, departure or acknowledgement of a message by setting a bit in the address area, the bit being assigned by choosing "System" > "Area Pointers" from the menu to the event/alarm message area. The setting, resetting and acknowledging of the bit is known as a "message event". Active (K) Cleared (G) Acknowledge (Q) The message bit has been set and the message is waiting to be displayed. The message bit has been reset because the cause that gave rise to the message no longer exists. With alarm messages only: The operator (or the PLC) acknowledges the message to confirm that note has been taken of the message. The message events have been acquired by the operating unit and time stamped. The operating unit automatically enters all message events in the message buffer. In this way the message events can be viewed at a later time again.
5-115
Release 12/02
Communication areas for messages The display of messages on the operating unit is initiated by the PLC by a bit being set on it in a defined communication area. You can see which communication areas for messages have to be created on the PLC in the following figure:
Displaying messages
5-116
Release 12/02
5.9.15.2 Message number procedure ALARM_S
Overview This chapter gives detailed information on the ALARM_S message number procedure. It will show you how ALARM_S differs from the message bit procedure (refer to "Message bit procedure") and how the system behaves in the event of critical bottlenecks.
Requirements You can only configure ALARM_S messages to be displayed on the operating unit if you are using a SIMATIC S7 PLC and ProTool has been integrated into SIMATIC STEP 7. Note For a SIMATIC PLC, configuration of ALARM_S messages is considerably simpler if you have installed S7-PDIAG.
What is ALARM_S? ALARM_S is a message number procedure. The message numbers are issued automatically during the configuration process in SIMATIC STEP 7. The numbers are used as the basis for the specific assignment of the correct message text. When a fault arises, the operating unit receives a message containing the message number. On the basis of the number, the corresponding message text is identified and displayed. The S7 CPU stores not only the status of the message (arrived, departed, acknowledged) but also the time. This information is not discarded immediately after the messages have been sent either, so individual network components (for example, operating units) can log on later and update.
Advantages of ALARM_S As compared with the message bit procedure, ALARM_S has the following advantages: ALARM_S is an active message procedure. When a message is issued, the CPU actively notifies all networked units. The operating unit is relieved of the task of continually polling the message area. The process data always precisely reflect the situation at the time of the message. This cannot be guaranteed with the message bit procedure. The time stamp precisely indicates when an event occurred even if the operating unit is not connected until a later time.
5-117
Release 12/02
Display classes Individual messages can be assigned different display classes in SIMATIC STEP 7. When configuring in ProTool, you then can then choose a specific selection of display classes for an operating unit. In that way you can distribute the messages selectively between different display units.
Priorities You can assign the messages different priorities when configuring ALARM_S messages as well. Note Make sure that you assign messages that can bring about consequential errors a higher priority than the consequential errors themselves.
Types of ALARM_S messages With message configuration in SIMATIC STEP 7, there are two types of ALARM_S messages: alarm messages and event messages. Note You can configure in SIMATIC STEP 7 whether an ALARM_S message needs to be acknowledged or not.
Configuring ALARM_S messages ALARM_S messages are configured in SIMATIC STEP 7, not in ProTool. The advantage of this is that the messages are generated system-wide and only have to be created once.
5-118
Release 12/02
5.9.15.3 Display classes
What are display classes? An S7 CPU always issues ALARM_S messages to all stations that are logged in. However, it may be that you do not want to display all messages on a particular operating unit in order to avoid a torrent of messages, for example. In that case, specific messages could be displayed just on a control desk, for example. In order to be able to control the display of messages so selectively, in SIMATIC STEP 7 each message can be assigned what is termed a "display class". In all, there are 16 display classes (display classes 0 to 15). Example: Messages that are to appear on the machine might be assigned display class 1, those that are to appear on the control desk, display class 2. The various operating units then only analyze those messages that belong to specific display classes. Any other ALARM_S messages are immediately discarded.
Display classes determine which groups of messages are to be displayed on the OP
5-119
Release 12/02
Specifying display classes The display class to which an ALARM_S message belongs is set when you configure the message in SIMATIC STEP 7. For a more detailed description of the procedure please refer to the SIMATIC STEP 7 documentation on message configuration. If you do not specify a display class in SIMATIC STEP 7, the message concerned is automatically assigned to display class 0.
Selecting display classes In ProTool you must specify which display classes are to be displayed on the operating unit being configured. You make your selection by choosing "System" > "Messages" > "Settings" from the menu. You will find a detailed description in "Setting the message procedure and selecting the display classes". If you do not make a selection, all display classes (display classes 0 to 15) are displayed as the default.
5-120
Release 12/02
5.9.15.4 Setting the message procedure and selecting the display classes
Principle To specify the message procedure(s) you are intending to use, go to the "Message Settings" dialog box. To access this dialog box, choose "System" > "Messages" > "Settings" from the menu.
"Message Settings" dialog box Select the required message procedures from the lower part of the dialog box. Once you have selected "ALARM_S", you can use the "Alarm_S" button to set the messages that will be displayed on the operating unit. Note If ALARM_S is the only message system you selected in ProTool for a project, the entries for event messages and alarm messages will no longer be offered in the ProTool project window.
5-121
Release 12/02
Selecting display classes When you click the "Alarm_S" button, the "SIMATIC S7 ALARM_S" dialog box opens.
"SIMATIC S7 ALARM_S" dialog box In this dialog box you can set, individually for each PLC on your system, the messages to be displayed on the operating unit. By default, all messages are sent. Note By carefully targeting your selection to specific display classes, you can restrict the display on the configured operating unit to very specific messages. Other messages can then be displayed on another device, such as a control desk. The left-hand column of the dialog box shows you a list of all the PLCs on your system. For each PLC you can cause the operating unit to display no messages, a selection of messages or all messages. When you click the "Details" button, the "Display Classes" dialog box opens.
5-122
Release 12/02
"Display Classes" dialog box Display classes will have been defined when the PLC was being programmed in SIMATIC STEP 7. At the same time each message will have been assigned to one or other of these display classes. You can now select individual display classes and define which messages will be displayed on the operating unit.
5-123
Release 12/02
5.9.15.5 Configuring ALARM_S messages
Configuring messages in SIMATIC STEP 7 ALARM_S messages are configured in SIMATIC STEP 7, not in ProTool, as a matter of policy. The advantage of this is that blocks of message text can be used on different display devices but only have to be created once. When configuring messages in SIMATIC STEP 7, you can either enter simple unformatted text or make use of the option for device-specific message configuration. Depending on the display unit in question, you can then specify such effects as flashing text and define additional information. The following options are available for configuring ALARM_S messages in SIMATIC STEP 7: Configuration using S7-PDIAG Configuration in S7-GRAPH Call these via SFC17, SFC18
Note Graphics display devices do not support tags with text lists which you can configure in SIMATIC STEP 7 under "Reporting system errors". You can find detailed reference information about the procedure in online Help for SIMATIC STEP 7 and in the relevant option packages.
5-124
Release 12/02
5.9.15.6 Incorporating ALARM_S messages
Principle With message configuration in SIMATIC STEP 7, the stored blocks of text and attributes are placed in a database shared by ProTool. During the process of compiling the project, ProTool automatically imports the necessary data and subsequently downloads it to the operating unit.
Configuring and downloading ALARM_S messages It is therefore important that the shared database is always up to date during the compilation process and that data synchronization is active. To ensure this, select the two options "ALARM_S" and "ProAgent" by choosing "File" > "Compile" in the "Compilation Settings" dialog box.
5-125
Release 12/02
5.9.15.7 Updating the operating unit
Principle Since the S7 CPU stores the message information when a fault occurs, individual network stations (an OP, for example) can log on at a later date and obtain an update. However, the S7 CPU only stores information about pending messages. Once all events (arrival, departure, acknowledgement) have occurred, the message is deleted from the CPU. When obtaining an update, therefore, the operating unit processes any missing events automatically if a message is not known to the PLC but the arrival and acknowledgement events are not entered on the operating unit. The events are not entered in the message buffer in that case, however. Events processed in this way are identified on the operating unit by displaying the message status symbols in inverse type thus:
Automatically processed events
5-126
Release 12/02
5.9.15.8 Resource consumption of messages
ALARM_S messages ALARM_S messages are configured in SIMATIC STEP 7. The data is then stored in a shared database, imported during the process of compiling the ProTool project and finally downloaded to the operating unit. That means that ALARM_S messages use up resources on the operating unit.
Economizing on storage space There are basically two ways in which you can economize on storage space on the operating unit: The following applies to all message procedures: the shorter the message text, the less storage space will be required. To economize on storage space on the operating unit of Windows-based systems, you can also deselect the SFM" check box in the "Message Settings" dialog box (choose "System" > "Messages" > "Settings" from the menu). Messages of this type will then not be transferred by the PLC.
You will find more information in the topic called "System limits". This section contains information about the memory requirement of projects, on the basis of which you can assess whether or not the memory of your operating unit is large enough for the intended project. Note In SIMATIC STEP 7 there are restrictions regarding the number and size of tags that can be used within a message. For more precise details, please consult your SIMATIC STEP 7 documentation.
5-127
Release 12/02
5.9.15.9 Communication sequence in the event of ALARM_S messages
Logging On For ALARM_S More than one station (for example, more than one OP, PU, etc.) on a network can log on for ALARM_S messages. Each station that wants to display ALARM_S messages logs on to the CPU for ALARM_S.
MPI network The number of nodes that can log on to a CPU for ALARM_S depends on the CPU. You will find further information on this in the equipment manual for the S7 CPU.
When a message event occurs When a message-triggering event occurs, the CPU actively sends telegrams to that effect to all stations that have logged on. The message number identifies the corresponding message text that has previously been downloaded to the operating unit. This means that the CPU does not have to be actively scanned for messages by regular polling as was the case with the message bit procedure. The operating unit and network are completely relieved of that burden on the system.
Time stamp With the ALARM_S procedure, the time stamp is not issued by the operating unit but by the CPU. The messages are stored in chronological order on the basis of their time stamp in the message buffer on the operating unit even if they originate from different CPUs.
Information stored The CPU stores not only the time of the message but also the status (active, cleared, acknowledged) and any process parameters. That information is retained until a message has been completely processed - in other words, until it has arrived, departed and been acknowledged. On the operating unit, the information in the message buffer is kept even longer.
5-128
Release 12/02
Restarting the S7 CPU When S7 CPUs are restarted, it is possible - though dependent on the hardware configuration of the CPUs - that the CPU will delete all queued ALARM_S messages. Note Earlier versions of S7-300 CPUs cannot report this restart to the operating units concerned. As a consequence, messages are shown as being queued on the operating unit even though the CPU has deleted them already.
5-129
Release 12/02
5.9.15.10 Acknowledging ALARM_S messages
ALARM_S messages requiring acknowledgement When a message is acknowledged by a station on the network, the CPU is immediately notified. The CPU then distributes the acknowledgement to all connected stations. It is only to this message that the operating unit responds - in other words, only at this point does it enter the acknowledgement in the message buffer. Note The CPU issues a time stamp for the acknowledgement event but does not store it. Later, it is no longer possible to determine if and when a message has been acknowledged.
ALARM_S messages not requiring acknowledgement Certain ALARM_S messages are configured as alarm messages but do not require explicit acknowledgement by the user; the CPU acknowledges such a message automatically when it arrives.
Message overload on the operating unit In the event of a communication bottleneck in the CPU (multiple arrival and departure of an ALARM_S message could not be acquired), a message might be displayed as not acknowledged on the operating unit even though it has been acknowledged in the CPU already. The problem occurs only if simultaneously with a message A communication bottleneck occurs in the CPU. The message in the CPU arrives. The message is acknowledged by the operating unit.
The operator must then acknowledge the messages several times on the operating unit.
5-130
Release 12/02
5.9.15.11 Printing ALARM_S messages
Principle You specify which messages are to be output to a printer in the usual way in ProTool by choosing "System" >"Messages" > "Settings" from the menu.
Message Logging If you do not perform device-specific message settings in SIMATIC STEP 7, all message events will always be logged directly on the attached printer. If you configure device-specific messages, you can specify separately for each message whether it is to be logged or not. Messages are always printed in the order in which they are sent by the CPUs. This is also the case with every synchronization. Note If there are several CPUs in a network, this means that messages need not always be received in chronological order by the operating unit.
5-131
Release 12/02
5.9.16 Instructions for configuring messages

These instructions tell you how to: Configure messages. Copy message text and complete messages. Select display classes. Configure printers Import and export message text.
5-132
Release 12/02
5.9.16.1 How to configure messages
Procedure: To configure an alarm message, for example: Procedure: 1 2 3 Create the "alarm messages" communication area in the project window by double-clicking on "Area pointers". Open the "alarm messages" window by double-clicking in the project window. Set the cursor to message number 1. Enter the message text - for example, Temperature in Tank 1 too high. 4 You read out the magnitude of the temperature by configuring a message tag:
To do this, click this button or choose "Insert" > "Output Field" from the menu. 5 6 In the "Output Field" dialog box Set the message properties: Enable "Print" so that the message is logged: Print: Enter a "priority": Priority: 3 Assign the message to an "acknowledgement group": Acknowledgement: 7 , select a tag or configure a new tag.
5-133
Release 12/02
5.9.16.2 How to copy messages
Copying messages In ProTool you have the option of copying individual blocks of message text in a message or the complete message.
Message text copying Procedure: 1 2 3 Select the message text with the cursor. Copy the marked text to the Clipboard with "Edit" >"Copy". Paste the text in the required position with "Edit" > "Paste". If the selection contains output fields, they will be pasted together with the text. 4 If you have configured message text in several languages, repeat steps 1 to 3 for every language you have configured.
Copying complete messages Procedure: 1 2 3 4 Point with the mouse to the message number. The cursor assumes the shape of an arrow. Select the messages which you want to copy. Copy the highlighted messages to the Clipboard with "Edit" > "Copy". Paste the messages at the required position with "Edit" > "Paste".
Using this approach, the complete message, including all output fields, Help text, attributes, functions and languages, is copied.
5-134
Release 12/02
5.9.16.3 How to select display classes for diagnostics
Procedure: Perform the following steps to set the ALARM_S message procedure and select the required display classes: Procedure: 1 2 3 Choose "System" > "Messages" > Settings from the menu. Select the "Alarm_S" check box in the "Messages Settings" dialog box. If you simply want all messages to be displayed on the operating unit, you have now finished and can exit the window by choosing the OK button. If you want to select individual messages for display, click the "Alarm_S" button. 4 Select the different PLCs one after the other from the list of available PLCs, click "Details" in each case and select the desired display classes: If you do not want to display messages on the operating unit, deselect the check box on the left of the PLC. To display all messages on the operating unit, enable the check box on the left of the PLC. To display just a selection of messages restricted to highly specific display classes on the operating unit, select the required PLC, click the "Details" button and select from the "Display Classes" dialog box which then appears. The check box to the left of the PLC name is then grayed out. When the operating unit is in use, it only displays messages that belong to one of the selected display classes.
5-135
Release 12/02
5.9.16.4 How to configure a printer for the operating unit
Configuring a printer selected from the list box If you are using a printer that has already been defined, proceed as follows: Procedure: 1 2 Choose "System" > "Printer" > "Settings" from the menu to open the "Printer Settings" dialog box. Select a printer from the list of defined printers and add it to the list of active printers. When you define several printers, you can select the printer that is actually attached on the operating unit. 3 Choose "System" > "Printer" > "Settings" from the menu to open the "Printer Interface" dialog box. On the operating unit you now set the "interface parameters" for the interface to which the printer is physically attached - for example the baud rate, the interface type etc. Configuring a new printer If you are using a new printer, proceed in the following manner: Procedure: 1 2 3 Choose "System" > "Printer" > "Settings" from the menu. Click the "New" button. In the "Printer Name" dialog box, enter a name for the new printer and confirm your input by clicking OK. Click the "Parameters" button. In the "Parameters for [Printer Name]" dialog box, enter the control characters for the new printer. You can switch the display of the control characters between hexadecimal and decimal. If a printer cannot cope with specific control characters, the fields remain blank. 4 Click the "Graphic" button. In the "Graphic Control Characters for [Printer Name]" dialog box, enter additional control characters. 5 Click the "Color" button if you are configuring a color printer. In the "Color Setup for [Printer Name]" dialog box, enter additional control characters. 6 Add the new printer to the list of active printers. When you define several printers, you can select the printer that is actually attached on the operating unit.
5-136
Release 12/02
Procedure: 7 Choose "System" > "Printer" > "Settings" from the menu to open the "Printer Interface" dialog box. On the operating unit you now set the "interface parameters" for the interface to which the printer is physically attached - for example the baud rate, the interface type etc. Note When configuring a printer, a "symbol table" called Z_OP_PRINTER is automatically created in order to be able to select the printer on the operating unit.
5-137
Release 12/02
5.9.16.5 How to import and export message text
Principle The import file is a text file that you created with an editor in ANSI format or exported from a project. An export file is a text file that you edit with an editor in ANSI format and can then reimport. For more on this subject refer to the example relating to an export file with event messages.
Importing message text You choose "Edit" > "Import" from the menu to import strings of "message text" which you want to borrow from other projects, for example, or which you have translated into another language. For more on this subject refer to the example relating to an export file with event messages. Note Before creating an import file, you should export a message in order to familiarize yourself with the syntax used.
Exporting message text You choose "Edit" > "Export" from the menu to export strings of message text which you want to apply to another project, for example, or which you want to translate in another editor.
5-138
Release 12/02
5.9.17 Examples of configuring messages

These examples show you: How to configure an alarm message. How to create message areas for different devices. How system messages might appear, depending on the operating unit. The contents of the export file for event messages.
5-139
Release 12/02
5.9.17.1 How to configure alarm messages
Objective You want to set the alarm message area first and configure an alarm message with a SIMATIC 300 or a SIMATIC 400 PLC.
Procedure: Procedure: 1 Left double-click in the project window on "Area pointers" to create the alarm message area. The "Area Pointers" dialog box is opened.
2 3
Here you select the "Alarm Messages" area pointer. Click OK. The "Alarm Messages" dialog box is opened. Enter the following at "Address": DB: 10 DW: 2 Length: 2 PLC: PLC_1 You have then created an alarm message area for 32 alarm messages.
4 5 6
Confirm all settings by clicking OK. Double-click the Alarm Messages window to open it. Position the cursor at message No. 2. Enter the following message: Motor temperature too high
5-140
Release 12/02
Procedure: 7 Set the following in the "Attributes" window: Priority: 1 Acknowledgement: 7 Print: The figure shows the configured alarm message:
5-141
Release 12/02
5.9.17.2 "Edit Message" standard screen on the TP 27
Default functions The following functions have already been implemented on the standard screen known as "Edit Message" (Z_MESSAGES):
"Edit Message" standard screen Icon Implementation Open event message window Open event buffer Open event message page Name of Function Event Window Display Messages Display Messages
Delete event buffer Print event buffer Open alarm buffer
Events - Delete Buffer Print messages Display Messages
Open alarm message page
Display Messages
5-142
Release 12/02
Icon
Implementation Delete alarm buffer Print Alarms Buffer
Name of Function Alarms - Delete Buffer Print messages
5-143
Release 12/02
5.9.17.3 Message areas for SIMATIC S5
Memory on a SIMATIC S5 The message area is defined in memory words - for example: FW 50 Length 2
5-144
Release 12/02
5.9.17.4 Message areas for SIMATIC S7
Data words on a SIMATIC S7 The message area is defined in a data block - for example: DB 70 DBW 0 Length 4
5-145
Release 12/02
5.9.17.5 How to move alarm messages to the background
Constraint
Note These instructions apply to touch panels only in order to ensure that all buttons are usable.
Purpose If a large number of alarm messages are queued and you do not want to have them acknowledged before the machine can be taken from a possibly critical system state, you can move the alarm message window to the background.
Procedure: Procedure: 1 2 Touch the ESC button in the alarm message window. You can now operate the remaining screen objects again. To place the alarm messages in the foreground again, touch the message indicator. If a new alarm message is waiting, the alarm message window is similarly displayed in the foreground.
5-146
Release 12/02
5.9.17.6 How to select a printer on the operating unit
Basic procedure The basic procedure is explained, taking the OP 27 and the standard configuration OP27.pdb as an example. To do this, create the standard screen as the printer screen first and then select the corresponding printer.
Creating the standard screen Procedure: 1 2 3 Open the standard configuration available for your operating unit and PLC. Copy standard screen Z_PRINTER to your current project. If you wish to make printed copies, copy standard screen Z_HARDCOPY as well. If you wish to use a color printer, copy standard screen Z_COLOR too. 4 5 If you do use neither Z_HARDCOPY nor Z_COLOR, open screen Z_PRINTER and modify the screen. Remove the "Select Screen" function, with which you branch to these screens, from the two function keys "Fx" and "Fy" and delete the two icons.
Selecting a printer on the operating unit Procedure: 1 2 3 4 Configure an input field on a screen and select "Text" at "Display". A new list box is displayed. At "Text or graphic list - Text", select the Z_OP_PRINTER list. At Tag, configure a type INTEGER local tag not having a link to the PLC. Confirm your input by clicking OK. You can now select a printer on the operating unit from the text or graphic list.
5-147
Release 12/02
5.9.17.7 Example of a system message
SIMATIC OP The system messages of the operating unit are read out.
Some system messages expect confirmation or a decision by the operator - for example: 557 Save data record? 0 Yes / 1 No You decide on how you want to proceed by entering 0 (Yes) or 1 (No).
5-148
Release 12/02
5.9.17.8 Event messages export file
Structure Below you can see how the export file of the illustrated event messages is structured:
SIMATIC ProTool/Pro B5.0.0.20 d 16.06.98 11:31:20
Legend: :N: = Number :T: = Text :I: = Help text :A: = Attributes :V: = Tag :L: = Text lists Pieces of text may be distributed over several ':T:' lines, Help text may be distributed over several ':I:' lines. In message text (:T:), the following control characters are possible: '\n' = New line '\b' = Flash (Start/End) '\u' = Underscore (Start/End)
5-149
Release 12/02
'#' or '&' = Placeholders for message tags The following identifications are used in the attribute line: Px = Priority x Ax = Output (port number) x R+- = Relay ON (+) or OFF(-) D+- = Print (+) or do not print (-)
:N: 0001 :T: "Tank1 empty:####" :A: P1 A0 D+ R:V: "Z_BAUDR" Dd TO ... :N: 0005 :T: "Mixer full, \n" :T: "Valves of Tanks 1 to 3 closed" :A: P1 A0 D- R-
5-150
Release 12/02
5.10 Functions
Basic principle In ProTool you can link "events" (such as "Key pressed") with predefined functions. If the event occurs during operation, the function executes a specific action on the operating unit or the PLC. For example, the "Select Screen" function on the operating unit opens a particular project screen.
Triggering a function
Areas of application In general, you can use functions to: Set up the project for specific processes (for example, to switch from one screen to another) Control the process (for example, to set a bit in order to switch on a motor with it) Use features of the operating unit (for example, to display or print out the message buffer) Perform system settings online on the operating unit (for example, change modes)
In most cases you can configure the behavior of the functions precisely by means of parameters. If you wish to initiate several actions, you can also combine different functions.
5-151
Release 12/02
Configuration You configure functions on the "Functions" tab in the "Properties" dialog box of the object in question. In addition, you can define global entry points (for example, for change of screens, buffer overflow and change of password) for many operating units by choosing "System" > "Functions" from the menu.
5-152
Release 12/02
5.10.1 Events for triggering functions
Necessity The execution of a function is always linked to a specific event. The function is only triggered when this event occurs. The events that can be linked to a function depend on the type of the function. Many functions are only effective with certain specific events.
Examples of events Examples of events that can trigger functions are the events "press key" and "release key". In the case of the former, the function is executed the moment a particular function key is pressed; in the latter case, it is executed the moment the function key is released again.
Object-linked functions Functions and events are generally linked to a specific object. The following objects can be linked to functions, for example: Function keys, soft keys and buttons Screen objects Screens Tags
Functions with tags are triggered only if the tag is displayed on the screen (default) or "Read Continuously" is selected on the "Options" tab in the Properties dialog box for the tag. A function which you have configured for an internal tag (without PLC connection) whose value is modified by another function is not executed.Functions are executed only as a result of changes of values triggered by the PLC. Note Depending on the operating unit, it might not be possible to configure functions for all these objects.
5-153
Release 12/02
Global functions You can also link some functions to global, object-independent events - for example: Changing screen Buffer overflow Change of password
The configurable global events depend on the operating unit: You will find a detailed description of all the permissible events in online Help under the keyword "Configurable events".
5-154
Release 12/02
5.10.2 Function parameters
Necessity Many functions can only execute one particular action. For example, the Events - Delete Buffer function empties the buffer for event messages.
Function without input parameters However, many functions can also work in various ways.
Input parameters Imagine that you want to open another screen using a key on the operating unit. To do this, you configure the Select Screen function. However, your project will generally have several screens. Which of these screens should ProTool open? You therefore have to give the function more information. This is done using parameters. For the Select Screen function, you specify as a parameter the name of the screen to be opened, for example. Another example is the Language function. In this case, the parameter you specify is the language to be set.
Function with input parameters Some functions require a single parameter; others require several.
Output parameters Some functions write the result of their execution (i.e. the current status) to a tag. You can then further evaluate the value of this tag, for example in order to display a setting-dependent text on the operating unit. An example is the Mode function. You specify a code for the operating mode as the input parameter, and the function supplies the same code in a tag as the output
5-155
Release 12/02
value. The value of the tag lets you display the current operating mode by means of a text list, for example. Note Output parameters cannot be configured for all operating units.
Function with input and output parameters
Special case: program-controlled behavior In the case described above, the behavior of the functions does not change at run time. However, in the case of some operating units and some functions, you can also pass the value of a tag as an input parameter. The behavior of the function can thus be controlled by the program.
General principle The following figure illustrates the principle of how a function works:
How a function works An input parameter is specified for the function. This can be either constant or read from a tag. The tag may be local or it may have a connection to the PLC. If there is a connection to the PLC, the value is set by the process. The result of the function is written to a tag, which itself can either be local or have a connection to the PLC.
5-156
Release 12/02
5.10.3 Combining multiple functions
Multiple functions with one object You can also assign an event several functions. The functions are then initiated one after the other. You set the order in which this occurs in the "Functions" dialog box during configuration. You can change the order of the functions by using the "Up" and "Down" buttons.
Multiple functions with one object
Note If the list of functions also contains functions which expect an input ("... Do you want to delete, Yes/No"), they are enabled only if no other functions waiting for an input are active. A check is made repeatedly for every event to determine whether functions that are waiting for an input are still active. If this is the case, processing of the list of functions is discontinued and a message is issued as follows: "Function temporarily unavailable".
Example The functions Set Bit when Key is Pressed (event: press key and release key) and Alarms - Delete Buffer (event: press key) are configured in this order on a key. When the key is pressed, the bit is set first, and this is followed by the function Alarms - Delete Buffer being triggered. When the key is released, the system detects that the function Alarms - Delete Buffer is still active, because it is waiting for an input from the operator: "... Do you want to delete, Yes/No". It refuses to continue processing the function list and the bit cannot be reset.
5-157
Release 12/02
Remedy To avoid this reaction, configure the function Alarms - Delete Buffer for the event release key. As a result, with press key only the Set Bit when Key is Pressed function is triggered. With release key, the list of functions is processed, since no input is expected.
5-158
Release 12/02
5.10.4 Buttons with fixed functions
Default buttons in ProTool When you configure a touch panel, ProTool offers a selection of different buttons that are already assigned frequently used functions: Set/Reset Bit and Set/Reset Bit in Word Select Screen Light Indicator
You will find detailed information on this in "Buttons". Note Instead of using these buttons, you can use a normal button and configure the function you require manually.
5-159
Release 12/02
5.10.5 Displaying date and time
Principle The date and time are displayed and changed using functions on the operating unit. There is a function available for Date Display/Edit and a function for Time Display/Edit in each case. Configure these functions with tags that do not have a connection to the PLC. You can only use one tag to which the date or time are linked in each project. If you use more than one tag for this, they are not updated when the date and time are set or changed.
Weekday You can set the current date and time in a standard screen on the operating unit. In contrast, you can only set and read the day of the week by means of PLC job no. 15. Before it is read for the first time, the day of the week must be set by means of a PLC job. You will find a complete list of PLC jobs in "PLC jobs".
5-160
Release 12/02
5.10.6 Guide to configuring functions

Here you learn how to configure a function call.
5-161
Release 12/02
5.10.6.1 How to configure functions
Required data When you configure a function, ProTool requires the following information: Which event is the function to be triggered by? Which function do you want to use? Which parameter values does the function have?
Procedure: To configure a function call: Procedure: 1 2 Select the object to which the function is to be assigned, click the right mouse button, and choose the "Properties" menu command from the shortcut menu. Select the "Functions" tab. A list appears, showing you all the functions that have been configured for this object. 3 Select the "Display selectable functions" check box. An additional window, entitled "Select Object", appears, containing a list of all the permissible functions. 4 Click the "+" and "" buttons to move through the hierarchically arranged list of functions, and select the required function. A brief description of the function appears in the "Description" field. If you require further information, you will find it in the section entitled "Reference functions" in the online Help system. 5 If the description of the function meets the requirements of the task at hand, click the "Add" button to accept the function. Most functions also require you to specify one or more parameters in order to define the behavior of the function more precisely. When you accept the function by clicking the "Add" button, the "Parameters" dialog box appears in these cases. A list displays all the required parameters and any values that have already been configured. 6 7 Select the first parameter in the list. Depending on the type of the parameter, you can either enter a value under the list or make a selection from a subset. In the "Description" field you will find a brief explanation of the values to be assigned. If the description is longer than the display area, you can scroll the text up or down. 8 9 Repeat the last two steps for all the other parameters. Click OK to confirm your parameter selection. The function then appears in the list of the selected functions.
5-162
Release 12/02
Setting an event The object for which the function was configured generally determines the event at which the function is to be executed. However, a number of triggering events are possible for certain objects. By default, ProTool then uses the event that is most appropriate in the majority of cases. However, you should check this default setting again, and you can also take the opportunity to change it if necessary. Procedure: 1 2 3 Select the relevant function on the "Functions" tab. Click the "Conditions" button. The "Conditions" dialog box appears. Select the check box before every event on whose occurrence the function is to be executed.
Note There is only one condition of execution for each of the OP 3, OP 5 and OP 15 operating units. You are therefore not able to make a selection in these cases.
Additional functions If you like, most operating units allow you to configure additional functions for the object by repeating the above steps. The functions are then processed one after the other from the top down, as they appear in the "Selected Functions" list. In order to change the sequence in which the functions are processed: Procedure: 1 2 Note On the OP 3, OP 5 and OP 15 operating units you can only configure a single function for each object, and so you cannot change the order in which the functions are processed. Select from the "Selected Functions" list the function you want to move. Click the "Up" or "Down" button.
5-163
Release 12/02
5.10.7 Example of configuring a function

This example shows you how to configure the "Mode" function with parameters so that "Online" and "Offline" modes can be set with function keys. In addition, the result of the operation will appear on the operating unit.
5-164
Release 12/02
5.10.7.1 How to change the operating mode with a current display
Objective The following example using the Mode function illustrates how you configure functions with parameters. You also see how the result appears on the operating unit. You want to set the Online and Offline operating modes by means of two function keys. You want the text Online Mode and Offline Modes to appear on the operating unit.
Configure the functions Procedure: 1 2 Create and open the screen in which the switchover and display take place. Click the function key that you want to use to enable the Online operating mode. The "Function Key" dialog box appears. 3 4 5 Select the "Functions" tab. Select the "Display Selectable Functions" check box to open the "Select Object" window. Select the Mode function in the "Toggle" function group.
Click the "Add" button. The "Parameters" dialog box appears.
5-165
Release 12/02
Procedure: 7 Select the Operating Mode (Key) parameter from the list, and enter the value 0 in the input field under the list. This parameter controls the behavior of the "Mode" function, so the mode changes to Online mode. 8 Select the Operating Mode (Field) parameter from the list. Here you specify a tag to which ProTool assigns the value of the current operating mode at run time (0 for Online mode, 1 for Offline mode). This tag subsequently controls the display.
Click the arrow pointing to the right under the list, and choose the "New" menu command from the shortcut menu that appears. The "Tag" dialog box appears. Configure the following values for the tag: Name: Operating Mode PLC: <No PLC> Type: INT Decimal places: 0
10
11 12
Click OK to close the "Tag" and "Parameters" dialog boxes. The function then appears in the "Selected Functions" list. Click OK to close the "Function Key" dialog box. Your configuration of the function for enabling the Online operating mode is thus complete.
13
Right-click the function key and select "Copy". This copies the properties of the function key you have just configured.
5-166
Release 12/02
Procedure: 14 15 Using the shortcut menu, paste the copied function key properties to the second function key. Click the second function key and, in the Parameters dialog box of the "Operating Mode" parameter, change the value to 1. For the second parameter, select the tag created for the first function in step 10: Operating Mode. In the next step you create an output field whose contents change dynamically depending on the Operating mode tag. The user can thus read on the operating unit at any time which operating mode is currently set.
Configure the display Procedure: 1 2 Insert an input/output field in the screen. The "Input/Output Field" dialog box appears. Perform the following settings on the "General" tab: Usage: Tag Field type: Output Representation: Text 3 4 At "Tag", select the previously configured Operating Mode tag. Click the arrow pointing to the right under "Text or Graphic List", and choose the "New" menu command from the shortcut menu that appears.
5-167
Release 12/02
Procedure:
The "Text or Graphic List" dialog box appears. 5 Call the text or graphic list status and create a text or graphic list with the data: Type: Decimal Value: 0 Text: Online mode Value: 1 Text: Offline mode
5-168
Release 12/02
Procedure:
Click OK to exit all the dialog boxes.
Result At run time, the operator can use the two configured function keys to set the operating mode and read the current operating mode on the display.
5-169
Release 12/02
5.10.7.2 How to display and change the date on the operating unit
Objective You will find below an example of how the date can be displayed and changed on the operating unit. To do this, you create an input/output field in a screen. You configure the Date Display/Edit function for the tag of the field.
Procedure: Procedure: 1 2 3 4 5 Create an input/output field. The "Input/Output Field" dialog box appears. Select "Input/Output" at "Field Type". Select "String" at "Representation". Specify 10 for the "field length" (MM.DD.YYYY for the date format). Create a new tag by clicking the button with the arrow pointing to the right at "Tag".
6 7
Choose the "New" option from the shortcut menu that appears. The "Tag" dialog box appears. Set: "Name": Date
5-170
Release 12/02
Procedure: "PLC": <No PLC> "Type": STRING "Length": 10 8 9 10 11 Select the "Functions" tab. Select, if appropriate, the "Display Selectable Functions" check box. In the Select Function window, select the Date Display/Edit function at "Date/Time". Click "<< Add" to transfer the selection to the list of "selected functions".
12
Exit all open dialog boxes by clicking OK. The date is then displayed in this field on the operating unit during operation and can be edited.
Note If you want to display the date in another field, you use the Date tag for this as well.
5-171
Release 12/02
5.11 Recipes
Purpose The purpose of recipes is to transfer a group of related data to the PLC, as a whole and synchronously.
Recipe and data record The terms "recipe" and "data record" are defined below using the example of a bottling plant for a fruit juice system:
Recipe and data record illustrated by analogy with a filing cabinet "Recipe" Recipes correspond to the drawers of the filing cabinet in the figure (for example, Orange or Lemon). The reference value fields (tags) that belong to the recipe are defined in the recipe. You use the recipe to define the data structure in your ProTool project. You cannot change this structure subsequently on the operating unit. You can configure up to 255 recipes in ProTool. "Data record" Data records correspond to the filing cards in the drawers of the cabinet (Drink, Juice and Nectar). A data record contains the values for a recipe. You create, delete and modify data records on the operating unit. You can create up to 500 data records for a recipe.
5-172
Release 12/02
Example of a recipe The filling station above is used to produce orange drink, orange juice and orange nectar. The mixing proportions for each of these are different. The ingredients are always the same. Let us assume that a recipe called "Mixture" is created, containing the following data structure: Tag Var_23 Var_11 Var_7 Var_19 Var_21 Designation Name l orange l water kg sugar g flavor
The tag designations Name, l orange, g flavor etc. are known as "entry names". The entry names are displayed as well on the operating unit. Tag Var_11, for example, can thus be identified as the tag designating the mixture ingredient orange. The data records contain the values for the different drink types. The data records could be as follows, for example: Data record name Name l orange l water kg sugar g flavor Orange drink value "Drink" "90" "10" "1,5" "200" Orange juice value "Juice" "95" "5" "0,5" "100" Orange nectar value "Nectar" "70" "30" "1,5" "400"
Same tags in screens and the recipe For each ingredient (orange, water, etc.) there is a separate screen in the above example, containing a supply tank, valves, an overview of the quantities used and other information. The screens contain input fields that allow you to set the various supply quantities for the mixer. You can thus enter the mixing proportions screen by screen. The mixer is then started. This process is repeated for each drink type. If the tags of the input fields are formed into a recipe, you can store finished mixtures for the different drink types by creating data records on the operating unit. The figure below shows how to use the same tags in screens and in the recipe. To produce a specific drink type, the corresponding data record is transferred to the PLC. All tags are thus assigned the required values at the same time.
5-173
Release 12/02
Same tags in screens and the recipe
Note If you use a tag in a recipe that is also assigned to an output field in the screen, the PLC may overwrite the current value. This situation occurs, for example, when data records are transferred from the data medium to the PLC. The tags are updated in the operating unit, and the values are then transferred to the PLC. In the meantime, however, the PLC could have updated the output field tag. In this case, the value of the PLC is transferred, not the value of the data record.
5-174
Release 12/02
5.11.1 Configuring a recipe
Identifying a recipe on the operating unit You create a recipe in your project with a symbolic name. You also use this symbolic name to select the recipe on the operating unit. The recipe also receives a number, but this is only valid during configuration. You can change the recipe's name and number. In the project window, open the "Recipe" dialog box by double-clicking, and then click the "Properties" button.
Identifying the recipe on the PLC Three identifiers are available for identifying recipes on the PLC. You enter the identifiers on the "Options" tab in the "Recipe" dialog box. The identifiers are userdefinable. ProTool automatically enters the number of the recipe in the first identifier. The identifiers are written to the data mailbox when a data record is transferred from the operating unit to the PLC and can be evaluated by the PLC.
Identifying a data record You create a data record on the operating unit with a symbolic name. This name is only relevant on the operating unit. When a data record is transferred, only the data and the identifiers of the recipe are transferred. Apart from the identification of the recipe, the PLC has no special way of identifying the data record. If you want to identify the data record on the PLC, you create in the recipe a tag that contains the name of the data record.
Tags in recipes Tags that you use in recipes must have an address on the PLC and the Write Directly attribute. Only these tags will be transferred to the PLC when a data record is transferred. Tags without an address are not transferred. You set the attributes in the "Tag" dialog box on the "Options" tab. There is no point in using the tag types Timer and Counter in recipes.
Standard screens for recipes The standard screens Z_RECORD_1 and Z_RECORD_2 are available so that you can create, save and transfer data records on the operating unit. These screens exist in the standard project but are not yet integrated. Integrate the standard screens in your project by assigning the "Select Screen" function to a function key, for example. Specify the standard screen Z_RECORD_1 or Z_RECORD_2 as a parameter. If you want to use both standard screens, assign each one to a function key. You only need the Z_RECORD_2 standard screen if you want to transfer current data directly between the operating unit and the PLC.
5-175
Release 12/02
Text or graphic list for recipes When you create the first recipe, a text or graphic list with the designation Z_RECIPES is created automatically. This text or graphic list is used in the supplied standard screens for data records. The sequence in which the recipes are entered in the text or graphic list is determined by the recipe number or the recipe name. You also see this sequence on the operating unit when you select a recipe.
Data mailbox To transfer data records, you must set up a data mailbox on the PLC and set it in your project, in the project window, at "Area Pointers". The operating unit writes the identifiers and the length of the data record to the data mailbox. The data mailbox must therefore be at least five words long. The figure below shows its structure.
Structure of the data mailbox
Defining the structure of a recipe When you have completed your project, you should define the structure of the recipe. To do this, click the "Properties" button in the "Recipe" dialog box. When you define the structure, you write-protect the recipe. This imposes restrictions on the changes you can make to the structure. Tags can still be deleted, but this leaves gaps in the structure. You can only add new tags at the end of the structure. If you define the structure of the recipe, you can continue to use data records that you created on the operating unit.
Using symbols If you also save the symbolic names of the tags in the data record when you create data records, you can still load data records on the operating unit after a change to the recipe structure. To do this, click the "Properties" button in the "Recipe" dialog box and select the "Use symbols" check box. Note If you have selected the "Use symbols" check box in your recipe, the tag names must not be more than 12 characters long for reasons associated with the system. Tag names that are too long have to be adjusted accordingly.
5-176
Release 12/02
If you do not select the "Use symbols" check box, only the values are saved. The symbolic names of the tags are not saved in the data record. If the recipe structure is changed subsequently, values are interpreted incorrectly.
5-177
Release 12/02
5.11.2 Transferring data records
What you must bear in mind
Note When data records are transferred from the data medium to the PLC, the data is initially written to the tags in the working memory of the operating unit. From there it is written to the PLC. If you have configured the Read Continuously attribute for the tags to be transferred, or if the tags are configured as actual values in the current screen, it may be possible for the tags to be overwritten with current values. In this case, it is not the data read that has been read that is transferred from the data medium to the PLC; instead, is the data that has been updated in the meantime. How to create data records and transfer them to the PLC is described in detail in the manual of your operating unit.
Transferring data records when working on the operating unit (standard case) The transfer of data records from the operating unit to the PLC and vice versa is the standard case. The special cases are described in the "Communication User's Manual". We recommend that you only transfer data records by using the operating unit. To do this, use the standard screen Z_RECORD_1. Setting the transfer mode The selection of the transfer mode depends on the operating unit and the PLC used: Direct transfer: When a data record is written, the data record tags are written directly to the defined addresses. In direct reading, the tags are transferred from the system memory of the PLC to the operating unit. Indirect transfer: All the tags of the data record are written to the PLC's Clipboard. Set the direct transfer mode.
Creating data records Data records can only be created on the operating unit and saved on a data medium there. The data medium that can be used depends on the operating unit. The standard screen Z_RECORD_1 uses the Z_MEMORY text or graphic list, which contains the assignment of data medium and value: 0: FLASH 1: Module 2: Floppy disk Note DOS conventions apply to the names of data records for transfer to a floppy disk. For example, blanks are not allowed in data record names.
5-178
Release 12/02
Synchronization during transfer An essential feature of recipes is that the data are transferred with synchronization and uncontrolled overwriting of the data is thus prevented. In order to ensure coordinated operation when data records are transferred, bits are set in the control and acknowledgment area of the interface area. The interface area for the SIMATIC PLCs is described in the "Communication User's Manual". For non-SIMATIC PLCs, the interface area is described in "Communication areas for non-SIMATIC PLCs".
Transferring data records by means of a PLC program PLC job You can transfer data records from the PLC to the operating unit and the other way round by means of PLC jobs "69" and "70". However, the PLC job only writes to the tags or reads from them. The data record cannot be saved on the data medium or read from the data medium directly using a PLC job. You have to use the operating unit for this. Function ProTool offers functions for: Reading data records from the PLC and saving them to a data medium on the operating unit Reading data records from the data medium and transferring them to the PLC
Assign a function like this to a tag. The parameters of the function contain recipe names and data record names. Assign the parameters of the function initially from the PLC. If the value of the tag is changed by the PLC, the function is triggered.
5-179
Release 12/02
5.11.3 Instructions for configuring recipes

Here we show you how to create recipes and transfer data records.
5-180
Release 12/02
5.11.3.1 How to create a recipe
Task In this example you create a recipe for the mixing station of a fruit juice system. Different fruit juices are to be mixed using the same system. The ingredients are the same; only the mixing proportions are different. You begin by creating a recipe called "mixture" and then a data record with the name "orange". This data record contains the mixing proportions for orange juice. The data record is transferred indirectly (in other words, the data is written to the data mailbox). During transfer of the data record, the operating unit sets bits in the control and acknowledgment area. You then have to set and reset bits in the PLC program in order to release the data mailbox again. The task involves the following steps: Creating a recipe Integrating standard screens Transferring a project file to the operating unit Creating a data record on the operating unit Transferring a data record to the PLC
Example system You are going to create the example recipe for an OP 37 connected to the SIMATIC S5 PLC by means of AS511. The PLC is the AG115U with the CPU 944. Preparatory settings Procedure: 1 Open the standard project OP37_S5.pdb. Save the project with a new name (for example, QUICKMIX.PDB) by choosing "File" > "Save As". 2 In the project window, select PLCs and double-click the entry in the right column. To change the CPU type, click the "Parameters" button in the "PLC" dialog box. Select the CPU type S5 115U CPU944 and close all dialog boxes.
5-181
Release 12/02
Creating a recipe Procedure: 1 2 In the project window, double-click Recipes to create the recipe described below. Create the new tag Var_23 for the data record name. Type: KC Length: 4 byte. Set an address for the tag on the PLC, such as DB 12, DW 0. Do not change the default setting for the PLC. You can thus also use the tag in screens or messages. Do not change the attributes of the tag, since these already have the correct settings for recipes. 3 4 Give the tag the entry name Name in the "Recipe" dialog box. Add the entry to the recipe structure by clicking the "Add" button. Create four more tags - Var_11, Var_7, Var_19 and Var_21 - for the mixture ingredients orange (in liters), water (in liters), sugar (in kilograms) and flavor (in grams) with the following settings: Type: : KF Length: 2 bytes. 5 6 Specify DB 12 for the address as well. Configure one decimal place for tag Var_19 (sugar). In the "Recipe" dialog box, give the tags the entry names shown and add the entries to the recipe structure. You define the structure of the recipe by means of the order of the tags.
The value for "length" represents the length in bytes. The value for "offset" (in bytes) specifies the position within the structure. If you add its length to the offset of the last entry, you get the total length of the data record.
5-182
Release 12/02
Additional settings In the following steps you change the name of the recipe, set identifiers and transfer mode and set up the data mailbox. Procedure: 1 Click the "Properties" button in the "Recipe" dialog box. Change the name of the recipe to mixture. Freeze the structure of the recipe. To do this, select the "Set" check box at "Structure". Check the settings on the Options tab. Transfer: Direct IDs: 1 / 0 / 0 2 Close the dialog box. All the entries in the recipe then appear in gray. When you create the first recipe, ProTool automatically creates a text or graphic list called Z_RECIPES. This text or graphic list is used automatically in the Z_RECORD_1 and Z_RECORD_2 screens. You do not have to make any further settings for this. 3 Choose "System" > "Area Pointers" from the menu and create the "interface area". Click the "Add" button and set the address: Area: DB.DW DB: 51 Length: 185 Create the "data mailbox": Area: DB.DW DB: 14 Length: 5 Create data block 14 with a length of at least five data words in your PLC program, too.
5-183
Release 12/02
Integrating standard screens In the following steps you integrate the standard screens in your project so that you can use them on the OP 37. Procedure: 1 Create a new screen. Choose "Edit" > "Properties" from the menu. On the "General" tab, select the "Start screen" check box. Call the screen Start. 2 Assign the selection of standard screens to F13. To do this, click F13. Select the Select Screen function at "Screens". Click the "Add" button, and select the standard screen called Z_SYSTEM_MEN at "Screen Name". Use a drawing program (for example, Paint) to create an icon containing the string Standard. 3 Assign opening of the standard screen called Z_RECORD_1. to key "F15". Create an icon for this, containing the string DAT_1. 4 Open screen Z_RECORD_1. Assign opening of the Start screen to F20. Create an icon for this containing the string ESC.
Transferring a project file to the operating unit Procedure: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Choose "File" > "Save" to save your project. Connect the OP 37 to the configuration computer by means of the connecting cable. Choose "File" > "Compile" to compile an executable project file. Set the OP 37 to Download mode. Download the compiled file to the OP 37 by choosing "File" > "Download". The start screen is then visible on the OP 37. At the same time, the system message PLC unavailable appears. Connect the OP 37 to the PLC. The system message disappears.
5-184
Release 12/02
Creating a data record on the operating unit In the following steps you select the data medium on the OP 37 (for example, "FLASH") and format it. You then create a data record for the mixture called "orange juice" and save it on the data medium. The tags then still have the value 0. Following this, edit the data record and enter the actual values. Procedure: 1 Call the DAT_1 screen from the start screen. The figure below shows the basic structure of standard screen Z_RECORD_1.
The FLASH data medium is already set. Position the cursor in the "Format Data Medium" field. Press ENTER twice. Always respond with 0 (for yes) to the prompts that follow. 2 The recipe called "mixture" is already selected. Using the symbolic input field "Sort Order", you can determine the order in which the data records are sorted: - Not sorted - Alphabetical order (A to Z) - Reverse alphabetical order (Z to A) - Chronologically ascending (date +) - Chronologically descending (date -) 3 4 Position the cursor in the "Data Record Name" field. Specify the name Orange for the data record. Press F16 in order to edit the data record. This is followed by the prompt: Create new data record? 0 (Yes) / 1 (No) Enter 0 for Yes.
5-185
Release 12/02
Procedure: 5 Position the cursor on each entry in the data record one after the other. Enter the following values: JUICE 95 5 0.5 100 6 Save the data record on the FLASH medium by pressing ENTER. Confirm this by specifying 0 for yes.
Transferring a data record to the PLC When the data record is transferred, the OP sets bits in data word 64 of the interface area. You then have to confirm the transfer in the PLC program. Procedure: 1 To download the data record, call the DAT_1 screen, assuming it is not already available as a result of editing the data record. Press F14 to upload the data record from the data medium of the OP to the PLC. 2 Then, in the PLC program, set bit 13 in DW 64 of the interface area to 1 for "error-free transfer". After you have done that, reset bit 11 in DW 64 to re-enable the data mailbox. The program code for this might be as follows: A DB 51 L DL 64 T MB 200 UN M 200.7 U M 200.6 S M 200.5 R M 200.3 L MB 200 T DL 64 BE
Result The values for "Juice" are now located in the addresses on the PLC. The identifiers are in the data mailbox.
5-186
Release 12/02
5.11.3.2 How to transfer data records
Use a standard project
Note Use the standard project provided. A number of text or graphic lists and the associated tags have already been created there, and you should use these.
Objective The example describes the individual configuration steps required to enable data records to be transferred from the operating unit to the PLC. To do this, you attach the DAT OP/PLC function to a tag. For the parameters of the function you use tags already used in the standard screen Z_Record_1. You proceed in an analogous manner to that described above when you want to transfer data records in the opposite direction (i.e. from the PLC to the operating unit).
Procedure: Procedure: 1 2 Create an integer tag with the symbolic name VAR_212. Establish a connection to the PLC. In the "Tag" dialog box on the "Options" tab, select the Read continuously check box. If you do not do this, the operating unit will not detect it when the value of the tag changes. 3 Change to the "Functions" tab. At "Data record" in the "Select Function" dialog box, select the DAT > OP/PLC function. 4 5 Click the "Add" button to add the function to the "Selected Functions" field. Set the function parameters. To do this, select the individual parameters one after the other and assign the tags shown:
5-187
Release 12/02
Procedure:
In order to be able to write to the tags from the PLC, they must have a connection to the PLC. To do this, configure an address on the PLC for all the tags specified in step 5. In addition, on the "Options" tab, assign the attribute Read Continuously to all the tags.
Now trigger the function. To do this, assign the following tags on the PLC Z_MEMORY Z_DATRNAME Z_DATRINFO Z_RECIPE the name of the recipe and the data record that you wish to transfer from the operating unit to the PLC. Specify the data medium as well. The comment is optional.
Change the value of tag VAR_212 on the PLC. This triggers the function attached to the tag. The data record is transferred from the operating unit to the PLC.
5-188
Release 12/02
5.12 Prompting the operator
Purpose In addition to the option of customizing the user interface of your operating unit to make it easier for you to use, ProTool features other options for supporting and prompting you on your operating unit as a function of the situation. This means you can implement mechanisms and decision-making aids that can prevent possible incorrect operations on the operating unit. ProTool makes the following methods available for the implementation of operator prompting: Providing Help text Assigning icons to local function keys Hiding screen objects Assigning dynamic attributes Evaluating key operation Driving light-emitting diodes Assigning operator authorization
5-189
Release 12/02
5.12.1 Help information on the operating unit
Purpose Help text provides additional information and operator instructions on screens, input and output fields, and buttons and messages to the operator at run time. Help text provides additional information that can be defined for screens, input/output fields, buttons and messages when configuring with ProTool. For example, Help text may be in the form of the permissible range of values for an input field or the cause and elimination of a malfunction in the case of an alarm message. Help text is displayed on the operating unit in the language you set. You configure Help text on the "Help Text" tab in the "Properties" dialog box of the object in question. In addition to Help text, you can configure tooltips, which are displayed at run time, for some devices and screen objects.
Displaying Help text on the operating unit Operator Panels The availability of Help text is indicated on the operating unit by the lit "HELP" LED. On touch panels, the "HELP" button is displayed. The configured Help text can be output by pressing the "HELP" key. Detailed information about activating Help texts is given in the equipment manual for your operating unit.
5-190
Release 12/02
5.12.2 Icons for local function keys
Purpose Icons are fixed-size pixel graphics that are placed in the immediate vicinity of screen-specific function keys (soft keys). This means that you can illustrate the function of a locally assigned function key. Icons can only be assigned to soft keys that border on the screen of the operating unit. You can prevent incorrect operation of a key to a large extent by means of an informative icon.
5-191
Release 12/02
5.12.3 Showing and hiding objects
Purpose ProTool features an option of displaying and hiding controls and display elements at run time. For example, you can hide an output field on the operating unit when the actual value is within the specified setpoint range. Alternatively, display an input field only when an operator input is expected for the control in a specific situation for example, during startup. The user interface of your operating unit remains neat and tidy in this manner.
Index tag You can either link display and hiding to a constant range of values or to the tag of an input/output field, for instance. You can influence several input/output fields simultaneously by using a separate tag. If you use a tag with PLC connection to enable and disable, you can activate certain project versions for different operating units from the PLC.
5-192
Release 12/02
5.12.4 Dynamic attributes
Purpose To draw the operator's attention on the operating unit to specific situations for example, specified limit values have been reached or exceeded you can configure attributes for input and output elements. This means that you can dynamically modify the foreground and background colors, for example, of an input/output field at run time as a function of the value of a tag, or you can enable or disable flashing for the text that is being displayed.
Index tag You can either link the specified attributed directly to the tag of an input/output field, for instance, or you can define a separate index tag for it. You can influence several input/output fields simultaneously with a separate index tag.
5-193
Release 12/02
5.12.5 Evaluating key operation
Purpose Keystrokes executed on the operating unit can be transferred to and evaluated by the PLC. This means, for example, that you can issue a message that will draw the operator's attention to the incorrect operation of a key.
Requirements For the PLC to be able to evaluate whether and, possibly, which key has been operated on the operating unit, you have to create specific data areas on the PLC and specify them in your project, in the project window, at "Area Pointers". These are the two data areas "system keyboard assignment" and "function keyboard assignment", depending on which keys you wish to evaluate. You set the assignment of the function keys to the bits in the function keyboard assignment when you configure the function keys. You will find a description of the keyboard assignments for the different operating units in the "Communication User's Manual". You will find more information on communication by your operating unit with a nonSIMATIC PLC in "Keyboard assignment of the operating unit".
5-194
Release 12/02
5.12.6 Light-emitting diodes on the operating unit
Purpose The light-emitting diodes (LEDs) on the function keys of the operator panel can be driven on the PLC. By means of a light-emitting or flashing LED, you can indicate to the operator that, for example, the device is expecting a certain function key to be operated.
Requirements For the PLC to be able to drive the LEDs, you have to create the "LED assignment" data area on the PLC and specify it in your project, in your project window, at "Area pointers". Set the assignment of the individual LEDs to the bits in the LED assignment when you configure the function keys. You will find a description of the LED assignment and the LED functions for the different operating units in the "Communication User's Manual". You will find more information on communication by your operating unit with a nonSIMATIC PLC in "LED assignment of the operating unit".
5-195
Release 12/02
5.12.7 Assigning operator permissions
Purpose ProTool allows you to use a password to prevent controls such as input fields and function keys from being used by those unauthorized to do so. This means that when you are creating your project you can restrict the use of functions that relate to security to specific people or groups of operators. Important parameters and settings can thus only be changed by authorized personnel. The access protection that you configure allows you to guard against incorrect usage and increase the security of the system or machine.
Password hierarchy During the configuration phase you can assign operator authorization to specific groups. At run time, individuals can be allocated to one of these groups, as appropriate, and they thus automatically receive the access rights of that group. ProTool provides hierarchically organized password levels from level 0 to 9. If a user is assigned password level 4, for example, this user is authorized to execute the functions of password levels 0 to 4. Password level 0 Password level 0 is the default in ProTool. Use this lowest level in the hierarchy for functions that have little or no effect on the operational sequence. These are generally functions that do not required any input, such as the display of messages. You do not have to enter a password on the operating unit in order to execute functions with password level 0. Password levels 1 to 8 Assign functions to password levels 1 to 8 according to their importance. Before you execute these functions, the operating unit prompts you to enter a password. Password level 9 The authorization to execute functions at password level 9 is granted only to the system administrator or service engineer. He has access to all the functions of the operating unit. You define the password of the system administrator by choosing "System" > "Settings" from the menu. The default setting is 100. You can modify this setting on the operating unit at run time.
You can find more information on password administration in the "equipment manual" for your operating unit.
5-196
Release 12/02
Logging into and out of the operating unit When you call a password-protected operation, the operating unit automatically prompts you to enter an appropriate password. In order to eliminate the possibility of unauthorized persons gaining access, a password level greater than 0 should not remain active on the operating unit for any length of time. If you do not do anything on the operating unit for a configured period of time (logout time), the operating unit automatically resets the current password level to 0. You set the logout time by choosing "System" > "Settings" from the menu. The system default setting is 5 minutes.
Note Irrespective of operating a password-protected control, you can log on or off at any time by configuring the Logon_User or Logoff_User functions.
Setting the password level on the operating unit The following PLC jobs are available for setting a defined password level on the operating unit: You can use PLC job 23 to set a password level of your choice on the operating unit from the PLC in order to allow access by a defined user group, for example. You can use PLC job 24 to reset the password level back to 0 from the PLC.
You will find a list of all possible PLC jobs with job numbers and parameters in PLC jobs in alphabetical order and PLC jobs in numerical order.
5-197
Release 12/02
5.12.8 Operator prompting instructions

These instructions show you how you can optimize operator prompting with the following aids: Provide Help text. Hide objects. Configure dynamic attributes. Drive light-emitting diodes. Assign icons to function keys. Evaluate key operations. Assign and edit operator authorizations and passwords.
5-198
Release 12/02
5.12.8.1 How to provide Help text
Procedure: Procedure: 1 2 3 If you have not opened the dialog box for the object (e.g. input field), doubleclick the object. Select the "Help Text" tab. Enter text of not more than 245 characters. If you have already created Help text in language set as the reference language, that information is displayed as reference text. If you wish to apply the reference text, click the "Apply" button.
5-199
Release 12/02
5.12.8.2 How to hide an object
Procedure: To display or hide an object on the operating unit (an output field, for example): Procedure: 1 2 3 4 Select the "Enable" tab in the Properties dialog box for the object. Select either the "Hide" or "Display" option button. Enter the range of values at which you require the object to be displayed or hidden on the operating unit. Configure the tag used to control display and hiding at run time (for example, connected to a password entry).
Note Use a separate tag for display and hide, not the tag assigned to the object.
5-200
Release 12/02
5.12.8.3 How to configure dynamic attributes
Procedure: To configure dynamic attributes for an object, for example a button or an output field, perform the following steps: Procedure: 1 2 Select the "Attributes" tab in the open dialog box. If you want to control the attributes by means of a separate tag: Operate the "Control" button and configure the index tag. Once the "Index Tag" dialog box has been closed, the "Control" button is marked with a cross. 3 Choose at "List" whether you want the value of the tag to be interpreted as decimal or binary and whether you want the status of a defined bit to be evaluated. Set different attributes for "flashing", "foreground" and "background" for different values or ranges of values of the tag. Click the "Add" button to add one entry at a time to the list of configured attributes.
5-201
Release 12/02
5.12.8.4 How to evaluate key operation
Procedure: To evaluate operation of the function keyboard, perform the following steps: Procedure: 1 2 3 4 5 6 Choose "System" > "Area Pointers" from the menu and define the "function keyboard" data area. Create this data area on you PLC. Choose the "System" > "Screen/Keys" option from the menu. In the "Screen/Keys" dialog box, click the function key whose status you wish to evaluate. Assign a bit in the function keyboard assignment to the key on the "General" tab. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for every function key whose status you wish to evaluate.
To evaluate operation of the system keyboard, perform the following steps: Procedure: 1 2 Choose "System" > "Area Pointers" from the menu and define the "system keyboard assignment" data area. Create this data area on you PLC. You will find an overview of the keys and their assignment to specific bits in the system keyboard assignment in the "Communication User's Manual".
You will find more information on communication by your operating unit with a nonSIMATIC PLC in "Keyboard assignment of the operating unit".
5-202
Release 12/02
5.12.8.5 How to drive light-emitting diodes
Procedure: To drive light-emitting diodes on the function keys: Procedure: 1 2 3 4 5 Define the "LED assignment" data area in the project window at "Area pointers". Create this data area on you PLC. Choose the "System" > "Screen/Keys" option from the menu. In the "Screen/Keys" dialog box, click the function key whose light-emitting diode you wish to drive. Assign a bit pair in the LED assignment to the LED on the "General" tab. You can use this bit pair to control, on the PLC, the LED statuses "Off", "Flashing" and "On" (refer to the "Communication User's Manual"). You will find more information on communication by your operating unit with a non-SIMATIC PLC at the LED assignment of the operating unit. 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 for every LED you wish to drive.
5-203
Release 12/02
5.12.8.6 How to assign icons to local function keys
Procedure: Procedure: 1 2 3 4 5 Click the function key you require in the screen editor. Assign the a locally effective function to the function key as necessary. Select the "Icon" tab. Select a configured icon from the list or create a new one. The icon is placed automatically so that the assignment to the function key is evident from its position.
5-204
Release 12/02
5.12.8.7 How to assign operator authorization
Procedure: In order to prevent controls being used by those unauthorized to do so: Procedure: 1 2 3 Open the Properties dialog box for the object (for example, the input field) by double-clicking on the object. Select the "Enable" tab. Select a level for the "password level" between 0 and 9. Before you execute functions with a password level greater than 0, the operating unit automatically prompts you to enter a password. Note If you have protected a screen object by means of a password, the function is triggered for the event "Select Field" or "Exit from Field" and there is no requirement to enter the password.
5-205
Release 12/02
5.13 Configuring in foreign languages

This chapter shows you what you need to know in order to create a project with a user interface in a foreign language. You can create a monolingual or a multilingual project. In a multilingual project you can decide: Whether to make several languages available on an OP and provide the user with a key for switching between them. Whether to download only one language to a specific OP.
5-206
Release 12/02
5.13.1 System requirements for foreign languages
Principle Depending on your Windows language, you can configure nearly all foreign languages without having to perform changes to you Windows configuration. The exceptions are languages with special fonts such as Greek, Polish, Russian, Slovenian, Czech and Hungarian. To use these languages, you must enable language support in Windows 98 ("Clipboard" > "Software" > "Windows Setup" > "Language Support" > "Details"). This is not necessary in Windows NT. Alternatively, you can install Windows completely in one of these languages. Note The ProTool installation CD-ROM contains support for other languages not supplied as standard with Windows such as Albanian, Bulgarian, Romanian, Turkish, etc. in the directory WINLANGS. More detailed information is provided in the file MULLANGO.INF. To create projects in Asian languages, you require an Asian Windows system. You will find detailed information in "Requirements for configuring in Asian Languages".
5-207
Release 12/02
5.13.2 Languages in ProTool
User interface language and project languages ProTool makes a distinction between two language levels: The "user interface language" in ProTool This is the language in which the menu and dialog box text blocks are displayed when you configure in ProTool/Pro CS. The user interface language is selected from ProTool's Setup. The "project languages" These are the languages in which the blocks of text in your project appear on the operating unit. You can create the project in any language available in Windows on the configuration computer.
The two language levels are completely independent of each other. For example, you can create French projects with an English ProTool, or English projects with a French ProTool.
Multi-lingual projects If you want your project to run in different languages, store all language-dependent objects in the desired languages in the project. This applies, for example, to: Event messages Alarm messages Screens Recipes Text lists Help texts Reports
You can store text for any project in as many project languages as you like. When creating your configuration, however, note that the languages supported at run time depend on the operating unit. You cannot edit system messages in ProTool. They have been stored for every operating unit for a number of languages already. If you are configuring a language for which no system messages are available, all the system messages will appear in English.
Editing language The project language in which you edit text at any given time on the configuration computer is the "editing language". The toolbar and the status bar show the current editing language setting.
5-208
Release 12/02
Reference language One of the project languages can be used as the "reference language". You can first create all the blocks of text in the Reference language and then use them as a basis for other translations when you enter your translated text directly into the project. When you are configuring, you can toggle between the reference language and the editing language you have set.
Online languages on the operating unit You can even download several of these project languages simultaneously to the operating unit, depending on the operating unit. For the operator to be able to toggle between these languages, you must provide him with a suitable control. When creating your configuration, note that the languages supported at run time depend on the operating unit.
Language levels in ProTool
5-209
Release 12/02
Exchanging text with translators If you wish to send the blocks of text in the reference language for translation, you can export all blocks of text in a project from ProTool. The translator can edit the blocks of text outside ProTool, either in Excel, for example, or a text editor. The translated blocks of text are then imported into your ProTool project and automatically inserted at the correct places.
5-210
Release 12/02
5.13.3 Languages of standard projects and system messages
Standard projects The following languages are supplied in the standard projects supplied as part of the package: German English French Italian Spanish Chinese (PRC) Chinese (Taiwan) Korean Japanese
Should you wish to configure another language, you have to add it yourself and also translate the pieces of text in the standard projects.
System messages You cannot edit system messages in ProTool. They have been stored for every operating unit for a number of languages already. If you are configuring a language for which no system messages are available, all the system messages will appear in English. System messages for your operating unit are available in the following languages: Chinese (PRC) Chinese (Taiwan) Danish German English Finnish Flemish French Greek Italian Korean Norwegian Polish
5-211
Release 12/02
Portuguese Russian Swedish Spanish Czech Turkish Hungarian
When you configure another language, all the system messages appear in English. You cannot edit system messages in ProTool.
5-212
Release 12/02
5.13.4 Language dependent fonts
Fonts available in ProTool In ProTool, at "System" > "Fonts", you can select four different fonts, which are available to you on each screen: One language independent font. Three language dependent fonts
Setting fonts The "language independent font" is available in all languages. The language independent font is the default symbol. The symbol set is used for character graphics. The fonts have to be a fixed-pitch font. This means that each letter is the same width. A letter "i" requires just as much space as an "m". The "language dependent fonts" can vary from language to language. This is always necessary when certain language dependent special characters are not contained in the ANSI code. The language dependent fonts change automatically: When you change the editing language in ProTool. When the operator changes from one language to another on the operating unit.
5-213
Release 12/02
5.13.5 Language dependent keyboard assignment
Language dependence The characters on a PC keyboard are language dependent. For example, no German or French special characters are available on an English keyboard. Further, the letters are arranged somewhat differently. As soon as you change the editing language in ProTool, it modifies the assignment of your keyboard to the layout of the foreign language concerned.
On-screen keyboard In order to facilitate the assignment of the characters printed on your keyboard and those actually entered, ProTool displays a language-dependent on-screen keyboard. You can see on the on-screen keyboard where the deviating characters are located. There are two options to choose from for entering a language-specific character: Orientate yourself on the on-screen keyboard and enter the character on the keyboard of the configuration computer. Click your mouse to enter the character directly via the on-screen keyboard.
Example of language-dependent on-screen keyboard with French as the editing language The on-screen keyboard is hidden automatically as soon as you reset the editing language back to the current Windows language. You can also enable and disable display of the on-screen keyboard by choosing "View" > "Keyboard". Note You can only use the on-screen keyboard if the corresponding keyboard layout has been installed under Windows. Enable the keyboard at "Start" > "Settings" > "Control Panel" > "Keyboard". If you have not done it, ProTool will resort to the international (US) layout. For entering Asian characters,
5-214
Release 12/02
5.13.6 Reference text
Principle When you create a project for several languages, you normally configure all the pieces of text in your native tongue first. If you then change the editing language to enter text in a foreign language, all the text fields appear blank again. ProTool features a user-friendly reference text function so that you have a basis for your translations. In dialog boxes and in screen editors, you can display an additional window with blocks of reference text in the original language.
Reference text In the editor you can insert the translation of the blocks of text in the reference window text without having to switch from one language to another. Note Text can be exported by choosing "Edit" > "Language" > "Export" from the menu or by using the shortcut menu in the project window. The blocks of text can be translated independently of ProTool in this way, too, and then imported in your project.
5-215
Release 12/02
5.13.7 Steps to creating a multilingual project
Scenarios The basic approach is identical no matter whether: You configure a project in a language other than that of your ProTool installation. (Example: you have ProTool in German and would like to create a French project.) You want to sell a project to several countries, in the language of the countries concerned. (Example: you are sending a machine to Germany, England and France. You want all pieces of text to be displayed on the operating unit in the language of the countries concerned.) You supply a project to a multilingual country. (Example: you are selling a machine to Switzerland. You want the operator to be able to choose between German, French and Italian on the operating unit.)
In any case, you should always attempt to create and test the project in one language first. This language then acts as your reference language for the translations. Steps Configuring in foreign languages consists of the following specific work steps: 1. 2. 3. Satisfy the necessary system requirements. Define the configured languages (choose "Edit" > "Language" > "Select" from the menu). Select a language as the first editing language (choose "Edit" > "Language" > "Select" from the menu). Create and test the complete project in this language first, before proceeding to translate all the pieces of text together later. Set the font (choose "System" > "Fonts" from the menu). Configure a language switch (only if you want to offer several languages simultaneously on one operating unit). Translate the pieces of text. If you want to enter blocks of text in a foreign language, switch the "editing language" (choose "Edit" > "Language" > "Select" from the menu). You select the language in which you have created the project to be your "reference language" (likewise option "Edit" > "Language" > "Select"). You can now have reference language text displayed and enter the text in the editing language. If you want to send text for translation, you can export it in csv format (choose "Edit" > "Language" > "Export" on the menu). After being translated external to ProTool, you can accept them into your project (choose "Edit" > "Language" > "Import" from the menu). Select the languages to be downloaded to a specific operating unit (choose "System" > "Language Assignment" from the menu). You can select up to three languages simultaneously. Compile the project. Download the project to the operating unit.
4. 5. 6.
7.
8. 9.
5-216
Release 12/02
Note Avoid moving fields in event messages and alarm messages when you modify a project that has been created in several languages. Since there is no permanent assignment between the field and its position within the text, you should move the pieces of text if necessary instead of the fields.
5-217
Release 12/02
5.13.8 Exchanging text with translators
Editing blocks of text external to ProTool If you configure a project in several languages, the simplest approach is to create and test the complete project in one language first. You can then pass all the blocks of text to translation and, after that, include the translated text in your project. The advantages of this procedure are as follows: The workload of the configuration engineer is reduced, since he only has to create the user interface in a language familiar to him. The translator can edit the blocks of text outside ProTool, either in Excel or a text editor. The translated blocks of text will be complete and consistent.
Scope of text export/import Using the ProTool's text export/import function, you can export and import blocks of text for the whole project, text from specific editors or text of separate objects. The scope of export/import depends on the command: Export/import blocks of text for the complete project. When you issue a command to export/import text by choosing "Edit" > "Language" > "Export" or "Import" on the menu, all blocks of text for the complete project are exported or imported. The import operation cannot be undone. But you can remove all blocks of text in a language from the project by deleting that language. You will find detailed information by referring to "Deleting a project language". Export/import blocks of text of a certain editor or object. You can start exporting/importing text in the project window by means of the shortcut menu (right-click) of the editors and objects. Only those blocks of text can be exported or imported that belong to the selected editor or object. A text import operation started from the shortcut menu can be undone.
Exporting different text types When exporting, you can select the types of text you would like to export: Text visible on the screen (such as labeling, names) It is stored in the file called "Labeling.csv". Info text (such as Help text for screen objects and messages) It is stored in the file called "InfoTexts.csv". Message text (event messages and alarm messages) It is stored in the file called "MessageTexts.csv". Other text (message settings, text lists) It is stored in the file called "OtherTexts.csv".
5-218
Release 12/02
The default setting is export of all text types. The classification of the text types is done in accordance with the requirements that have to be taken into account in translation. For example, the placeholders have to be preserved in message text, and when text visible on the screen is translated it might be necessary to take the limited
Importing text You can insert translated blocks of text in your project by choosing "Edit" > "Language" > "Import" or by using the shortcut menu of the editors and objects in the project window. The individual blocks of text are automatically assigned to the objects in the project. Note You can undo an import of alarm message text. To view imported text in foreign languages, set the editing language to the language concerned. If you did not specify a target language for the translation when you exported the text, you must specify the language into which the text was translated when you import it. Give due consideration to the following points: The same fonts must be configured as for the source language, especially the font size. To do this, you must create the target language in ProTool before you start importing ("System" > "Assign Language"). You must then set the same font size as for the source project for language-dependent font settings at "System" > "Fonts". If you do not comply with this procedure, the imported blocks of text might not all be applied. Note Remember not to change or add text manually in the time between exporting and importing the text but to have these changes translated in good time. Manually changed or added text will be overwritten by the text in the import file on being imported.
5-219
Release 12/02
5.13.9 Requirements for configuring in Asian languages
Asian Windows system A requirement for creating a project with Asian blocks of text is an Asian Windows system or Windows 2000 multilingual as the operating system. The necessary character sets can only be accessed in these Windows systems. To assist you with entering Asian characters, the "Input Method Editor" (IME) is available on such systems, and you can use it to define text as phonetic transliterations, for example. ProTool's on-screen keyboard is therefore not made available. Even the compilation must be carried out on an Asian Windows system, otherwise the project language will be ignored during compilation. Under certain conditions, it is possible to download projects in which an Asian project language has been selected, on a non-Asiatic Windows system. For this, the *.fud or *.fwd file created during compilation on an Asian Windows system has to be available in the same directory as the *.pdb project file. The *.pdb project file can only be opened before the download operation, but not modified any more. Note Many projects are multilingual and use, for example, English in addition to an Asian language. In such cases you can first create and test your project on a non-Asiatic Windows system. Not until it is completed do you change to an Asiatic system, on which you configure and compile the Asiatic text and perform the download operation. You can work most efficiently if you have both an Asian and a non-Asian Windows system installed on your computer or if you work on a network with different computers for the languages concerned.
5-220
Release 12/02
5.13.10 Constraints on projects in Asian languages
Supported languages Chinese (PRC), Chinese (Taiwan), Korean and Japanese are the languages currently supported.
Configuration memory Use different character sets as sparingly as possible in a project. Every character set you use reduces the amount of memory available for projects. Every font size you load is a separate character set. 64 kB of configuration memory are available per character set, which approximates to 1900 different Chinese characters, for example. If you configure more different Chinese characters, you obtain an error message during compilation to the effect that the maximum number of characters has been exceeded. At the same time, a list of the most infrequently used characters in the project is output.
Special characters Special characters are ASCII characters higher than 127 for example, , , , , . If you use a non-Chinese character set in text in an Asian Windows system, you should not configure any special characters, because they are not displayed correctly in a large number of cases.
Messages All system messages are also available in Asiatic languages. Message number, message status (active, cleared, acknowledged), date/time and acknowledgement group remain in alphanumeric characters in Asian projects and cannot be displayed in Asian characters. Messages created with Asian characters cannot be exported or imported with ProTool. STRING tags in symbolic languages Do not use STRING type tags in configurations with symbolic languages, since the characters are not output correctly to the operating unit. You can use STRING tags without constraints for internal operations without display functions. Switching between Asian languages under Windows 2000 With language support installed in Windows 2000, you can switch between the Asian languages offered in order to display a project. You can only enter text in the displayed language, however, when the operating system has also been switched to the desired language.
5-221
Release 12/02
Print jobs on the operating unit When using an Asian language, all the print jobs are output in graphics mode to the operating unit printer.
Field length Field lengths depend on the width of the characters used. With Asiatic character sets, the number of configurable characters in fields can be reduced as a result of the double character width.
Standard projects Standard projects and examples are also available in Asiatic languages.
5-222
Release 12/02
5.13.11 Instructions for configuring on foreign languages

These instructions tell you how to: Choose project languages. Switch languages on the operating unit, the editing language and the reference language. Show reference text. Handle special characters in foreign languages. Configure a language switch. Export text for translation and importing it in your project after translation.
5-223
Release 12/02
5.13.11.1 How to choose project languages
Defining configurable languages in a project Procedure: 1 Choose "Edit" > "Language" > "Select" from the menu. The "configured languages" selection list in the "Set Language" dialog box shows the languages available for the configuration. If you cannot find a language in the selection list, you have to load the language in Windows or install Windows in the language version you require. You will find detailed information on this subject in "System requirements for foreign languages". 2 To add a language to the project, click the "New" button and select a language from the list. The list contains all the languages supported by the Windows configuration of your system.
5-224
Release 12/02
5.13.11.2 How to delete a project language
Deleting languages from a project
Note Deletion of a language cannot be undone. If you have inadvertently deleted a language, close your project without saving it. In this instance all the changes you made to it since the last time it was saved will be lost. Procedure: 1 Choose "System" > "Language Assignment" from the menu. The "configured languages" selection list in the "Set Language" dialog box shows the languages available for the configuration. If you cannot find a language in the selection list, you have to load the language in Windows or install Windows in the language version you require. You will find detailed information on this subject in "System requirements for foreign languages". 2 To remove a language from your project, select the desired language from the list of "configured languages" and click the "Delete" button. The language is deleted after a prompt. The delete action does not take effect until ProTool has been restarted. Caution All blocks of project text in this language will be removed from the project. The last remaining project language cannot be deleted. Note If you are configuring with ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7, use the menu in SIMATIC Manager if you wish to delete project languages without opening the project.
5-225
Release 12/02
5.13.11.3 How to select online languages for the operating unit
Procedure: To define which of the project languages should be transferred when downloading to the operating unit: Procedure: 1 Choose "System" > "Language Assignment" from the menu to open the "Set Language" dialog box. You will see the languages created in the project on the "configured languages" selection list. The "online languages" selection list displays which of the configured languages are downloaded to the operating unit during the Download operation and are thus available to the operator at run time. 2 To add a language to the online languages, select the desired language from the configured languages and click the arrow on the right of the "online languages" selection list. You can select up to three languages simultaneously as online languages. The language at the top of the list is the default language which is displayed after the operating unit starts up. For the operator to be able to toggle between the online languages, you must provide him with a suitable control. 3 To remove a language from the "online languages" column, select the language and click the arrow on the left of the "online languages" selection list.
Note You should only transfer languages that are really required, particularly for operating units with little storage space. Take note of the details provided for the "system limits" in this respect.
5-226
Release 12/02
5.13.11.4 How to change the editing language
Requirements The desired language must be contained in the list of configured languages. If it is not, you must first add it by clicking "New" in the "Set Language" dialog box.
Switching the editing language Procedure: 1 2 Choose "Edit" > "Language" > "Select" from the menu. Select the language you want to use for editing from the configured languages and click the arrow next to the "Editing language" field. The selected language is transferred to the "Editing language" field and displayed on the toolbar and in the status bar. Alternatively, you can change the editing language using the "Editing language" list on the toolbar.
5-227
Release 12/02
5.13.11.5 How to work with the reference language
Reference text With multilingual projects, create the blocks of text in one language first (usually you native tongue). Select this language as your reference language. When translating, you can display the blocks of text that you created in your reference language at the same time as you display the text in a foreign language.
Setting the reference language Procedure: 1 2 Choose "Edit" > "Language" > "Select" from the menu. Select the language which you want to use as a basis for the foreign-language text from the configured languages and click the arrow next to the "Reference language" field. The selected language is transferred to the "Reference language" field.
Displaying reference text Reference text can be displayed in different dialog boxes and in the message and screen editors: Procedure: 1 In dialog windows: If the reference text is not displayed automatically, click "Reference". The reference text is displayed. In the message or screen editor: choose in the active editor the "View" > "Reference Text" option. A small window opens and the reference text is displayed for that screen or message that is currently being edited.
5-228
Release 12/02
5.13.11.6 How to enter foreign-language special characters
Principle When the current editing language in ProTool is different from the language of your Windows system, ProTool automatically displays a window containing the modified keyboard assignment (on-screen keyboard). Note The availability of special characters always depends on the character set that you set.
Procedure: Procedure: 1 2 If the on-screen keyboard is not visible on the screen, choose "View" > "Keyboard" from the menu. There are two options for entering a language-specific character: Orientate yourself on the on-screen keyboard and enter the character on the keyboard of the configuration computer. Click your mouse to enter the character directly via the on-screen keyboard. Note Holding down SHIFT or ALT GR changes the characters on the displayed keyboard.
Alternative entry options If you do not want to use the on-screen keyboard, you can enter special characters at any time in the usual way under Windows: Use the Windows character map. Enter special characters on the numeric keypad on the keyboard. To do this, hold down ALT and enter the digits "0XXX" in quick succession, where "XXX" represents the ANSI code for the character concerned.
5-229
Release 12/02
5.13.11.7 How to export text from ProTool
Exporting text Using the ProTool's text export/import function, you can export blocks of text for the whole project, text from specific editors or text of separate objects for translation. Note When you export text from ProTool, control characters (in < >) are also paged out to the CSV file. These control characters must not be modified during translation. Procedure: 1 Activate text export: If you wish to export text for the complete project, bychoosing "Edit" > "Language" > "Export" from the menu. If you just wish to export text created in a specific editor, in the left half of the project window using the shortcut menu (right-click) of the editor, "Export" option. If you just wish to export text created for a specific object, in the right half of the project window using the shortcut menu (right-click) of the object, "Export" option. 2 3 4 5 Define in the "Storage location (path)" field the directory in which you want to store the export file(s). Select as the "source language" the reference language in which you developed the project. Select as the "target language" the language into which you want to have the project text translated. If you want to limit export to certain text types, click the "Select" button. In the "Select Text Types" dialog box, set the text types you want to have exported. The default setting is export of all text types. 6 Start export by clicking OK. During an export operation, a separate *.csv file is created for each text type. The file name is assigned by ProTool in keeping with the text type. If a file of the same name already exists in the export directory, you can expand or overwrite it. When you have configured new language-dependent objects, select "Expand". The new objects will then be attached to the existing export file. If you have modified or deleted existing language-dependent objects, select "Overwrite" to avoid export files being too big. Note When editing in Excel, open Excel first and then the export file by choosing "File" > "Open" from the menu. If you open a *.csv file by double-clicking in Explorer, it will frequently be difficult to read and edit.
5-230
Release 12/02
Note for export to several languages If you want to have blocks of text translated into several languages, start text export for each language. Create
Note If you only which to export blocks of message text to edit them in an external editor, there are also import and export options available to you in ProTool's message editor.
5-231
Release 12/02
5.13.11.8 How to import text into ProTool
Importing text Using the ProTool's text import function, you can import translated blocks of text for the whole project, text from specific editors or text of separate objects. Procedure: 1 Activate text import by performing the following steps: To import text of the complete project: bychoosing "Edit" > "Language" > "Import" from the menu. To import text created in a specific editor, in the left half of the project window using the shortcut menu (right-click) of the editor, "Import" option. To import text of a specific object, in the right half of the project window using the shortcut menu (right-click) of the object, "Import" option. 2 3 Define in the "Storage location (path)" field the directory from which you want to read in the import file(s). Start the import operation by clicking OK. The files of all text types in the import directory are always imported. If the language for which the blocks of text are imported is not yet present as a project language, it is created automatically in the project. If you have manually changed blocks of text in a project language in your project after exporting them, or added text, the changed blocks of text will be overwritten when the project language is imported. You can only import files that are not open in another program (such as Excel or an editor). 4 If you did not specify a target language for the translation in the export operation, you must specify the language into which the text was translated in the "Import user text" window. This assigns imported text to the correct language in the project. The imported text appears in your project when you switch to the correct editing language.
5-232
Release 12/02
5.13.11.9 How to configure a language change
Purpose If you want to download a project in several languages to the operating unit, you have to create an option for changing languages on the operating unit.
Switching languages in standard projects If you have built your project on one of the standard projects, this can be done with the help of the standard screen called Z_SETTINGS.
Language function If you want to configure a custom language switch, you can use the "Language" function to do so. You can use this function to: Set a specific language using individual function keys, soft keys or buttons in each case. Switch cyclically between languages using a single function key, a single soft key or a single button (toggle function). Select the language you require by means of a symbolic input/output field from a list.
At the same time you can display the current language in an output field. Configuring a function for a key or button Procedure: 1 2 3 Select the first of the keys with which you want to set the languages. Go to the "Function" tab in the Properties dialog box and select the Language function. Set the constant value 0 for the function parameter Language (key). The function then causes the language at the top of the list of "online languages" in the "Language Settings" dialog box to be activated. 4 5 For the Language (field) function parameter, select the tag with which you want to control the output field for displaying the current language. Follow the same procedure for the other keys. For the constant, use, say, the value 1 or 2 corresponding to the language. For the tag, always use the same tag. 6 7 8 9 Create an output field for displaying the current language. Select "Text" or "Graphic" as the display type. Create a text list using the language names or create a graphics list, for example using the flags of the nations concerned. For the tag, select the tag you specified in step 4.
5-233
Release 12/02
Function as toggle You can also use the Language function as a toggle function. In this case, you use one key to switch between the languages. Configure it as described above but just set one key. Specify 1 as the value for the constant. If the operator selects this key, the system switches between the languages that have been downloaded to the operating unit: Language 1 > Language 2 > Language 3 > ... > Language 1.
Configuring a function for an input/output field Procedure: 1 2 Create a symbolic input/output field with a tag on a screen. It must be an INTEGER type tag. Configure the Language function for the tag. ProTool proposes the constant value 1 for the Language (key) function parameter. This value is not evaluated, however, the function is configured via the variable. 3 4 Select the same tag for the Language (field) function parameter as you selected for the input/output field. Create a text list using the language names or create a graphics list, for example using the flags of the nations concerned.
5-234
Release 12/02
5.13.11.10
How to print special characters on the operating unit printer
Objective If the printer does not reproduce the special characters as desired, you have the option of outputting print jobs on the operating unit in graphics mode. The print process is then considerably slower, but all special characters are shown correctly.
Procedure: To activate graphics printing for a specific language, perform the following steps: Procedure: 1 2 3 4 Choose "System" > "Functions" from the menu. In the "Global Functions" dialog box, select the "Initializations" event. Select the Automatic Graphics Printing function. Enter the numbers (1-3) as the parameters for the language whose text you want to have printed in Graphics mode. The sequence defined by choosing "System" > "Language Assignment" from the menu applies to the numbers. 5 If you want graphics printing to be performed for several languages, you can trigger the function several times over using different parameters. To do so, repeat steps 3 and 4. All print jobs are then performed automatically in Graphics mode as soon as one of the specified languages is active.
5-235
Release 12/02
Testing projects
Testing projects
Principle Once you have completed your entire project or self-contained parts within it, the "test phase" starts. The following steps must be taken: 1. 2. 3. Compile your project: Your project is transformed into a file that is capable of running on the operating unit. Download your project: The project is downloaded to the operating unit. You have to perform some settings for this. Test your project: Should you find other errors, troubleshoot them and start again at step 1.
Note If you are using a SIMATIC S5 or S7, configure "Status/Force" in order to test specific tags in the PLC program.
6-1
Testing projects
Release 12/02
6.1
Transferring the executable project file
Basic procedure To download the project file, you have to do the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Set the transfer mode. Select an interface on the configuration computer. Select a storage medium on the operating unit. Download the project file.
Special features These deviations from the basic procedure are only to be carried out the first time: Download mode: The first download is always a "serial download". Firmware: Before a compiled project file can be downloaded to the operating unit for the first time, the firmware of the operating unit is downloaded automatically. A corresponding status message is issued.
Loading an earlier configuration (OP 25, OP 35, OP 37, TP 37) If you wish to overwrite the current configuration on the OP with a configuration that was created with an earlier version of ProTool, the OP might not run up correctly. To avoid this, clear the flash memory or the memory card of the OP before transferring, or power the OP down and then up again after the configuration has been transferred.
Download not possible If no connection to the operating unit can be established, a status message to this effect is output. Check the physical connection between the operating unit and the configuration computer. Note The project file must not be downloaded directly from the configuration computer to the module, but must first be loaded into the flash memory on the operating unit, since the memory organization of the two storage media differs. If the project file were to be downloaded directly to the module and then loaded into the flash memory on an operating unit, error states can result. In the DRAM the data are lost when the operating unit is switched off.
6-2
Release 12/02
Testing projects
Note In the case of Serial Download, you should always select the highest transfer rate possible. This applies in particular to the Backup/Restore function to the transfer of option packs, image files or large configurations (especially for initial commissioning). At low transfer rates, it can easily take hours to transfer the quantities of data.
Note The following memory cards have been released for use on graphics-based operating units: 6ES7 952 1KL00 0AA0 2 MB 6ES7 952 1KM00 0AA0 4 MB 6ES7 952 1KP00 0AA0 8 MB 6ES7 952 1KS00 0AA0 16 MB
6-3
Testing projects
Release 12/02
6.2
Peculiarities of MPI download
Requirements MPI download is possible with the following operating units: all graphics displays and OP 3, C7-623, and C7-624. An MPI module is required on the configuration computer. The configuration computer and operating unit are connected physically to the MPI network. An MPI network can only be set up with a SIMATIC S7 PLC.
Setting the MPI address on the operating unit If you have downloaded the compiled project file for the first time, and serially at that, the operating unit has the configured MPI address. To carry out an "MPI download", the standard screen "System Settings" must be configured in the project and the "MPI Download" operating mode must be selected.
Multiple operating units in the MPI configuration If you want to integrate multiple operating units in the MPI configuration, you can only do it successively. 1. 2. 3. Connect the first operating unit physically. Change to serial transfer mode, and download first the firmware and then the compiled project file. Then connect the next operating unit physically, and so on.
Note If you were to connect several operating units physically and then download the project, this would lead to an address conflict. All the operating units would have the same default MPI address, namely 1 which is not permissible in the MPI configuration.
6-4
Release 12/02
Testing projects
6.3
Directly accessing values on the PLC (Status/Force tag)
Purpose At runtime you can directly access the connected PLC (SIMATIC S5 and SIMATIC S7) from the operating unit to read and write values. This means you can monitor and change the PLC operands easily on the operating unit without having to connect a programming device or PC to the PLC as well. This is very advantageous particularly during the testing and commissioning phase of your project.
Requirements In order to be able to access values on the PLC directly at runtime, the following requirements must be met: The connected PLC must be a SIMATIC S5 or SIMATIC S7 You must have integrated the two standard screens "Status Tag" and/or "Force Tag" in your project.
Standard screens The programming device function "STATUS TAG" is called in the standard screen "Status Tag". This allows you to monitor PLC operands on the operating unit. Write access is not possible in this screen. The programming device function "FORCE TAG" is called in the standard screen "Force Tag". This allows you to monitor and change PLC operands on the operating unit. You will find detailed descriptions about working with the two standard screens in the "equipment manual" for your operating unit.
6-5
Testing projects
Release 12/02
6.4
Troubleshooting
If error messages are issued in the course of working with your project, such as when you are compiling or downloading your project, you will learn here how you take remedial action.
6-6
Release 12/02
Testing projects
6.4.1
Error messages during compilation
Possible messages While the ProTool compiler is compiling a project, status messages on the progress of the compilation process are output to a window. The following messages make a check of your project necessary: Notes: It is possible that logical operations in the project are either not correct or do not exist. Check the project for logical relationships in accordance with the messages. The compilation process has been properly completed. Warnings: The project contains errors that might result in incomplete display on the operating unit. The full compilation process has been completed. Errors: Correct the errors listed and recompile the project. The compilation process is not completed.
6-7
Testing projects
Release 12/02
6.4.2
Error messages while downloading
Possible problems while downloading While a project is being downloaded to the operating unit, status messages on the progress of the compilation process are output to a window. If problems occur while the project is being downloaded to the operating unit, the cause in the majority of cases is too high a baud rate or the simultaneous use of other drivers on the configuration computer for example, when connected to a network. The most common causes of discontinuation of the download process are listed below.
Downloading is aborted after a line Error message Possible Cause The connecting cable is too long. The connecting cable is poorly shielded or spurious signals are imported onto the cable by other devices. Computer performance is inadequate. Another driver is running in the background for example, with networking. Action Select a lower baud rate. Select a lower baud rate.
Select a lower baud rate. Select a lower baud rate.
Downloading stops and crashes. Possible Cause Computer performance is inadequate. Action Select a lower baud rate.
6-8
Release 12/02
Testing projects
Downloading does not take place Possible Cause Connection to the operating unit cannot be established (message in the system message window). The standard communication driver is not entered in the Windows device manger. Interrupt problems. Various modules are using the same interrupt. Other programs block the interface for example, STEP 5. Action Check the physical connection between the configuration computer and the operating unit. The operating unit must also be in Download mode. Check the device status of the COM port in the Properties window of the device manager. Modify the configuration of your computer or install ProTool on a standalone computer. Exit from the programs and reboot your computer, if necessary.
MPI/DP Download does not work Possible Cause For the CP which has to be used for the Download operation the "configured mode" is set (such as when using the SIMATIC NET CD 7/2001). Action Go to the "Configuration Console" tool and set "PU operation" for the CP. Check the network parameters (baud rate, MPI address). Perform the download from ProTool CS. Reset the "configured mode" for the CP. Go to the "PU/PC Panel" tool or, if you are using the SIMATIC NET CD 7/2001, to the "Configuration Console" tool and set the S7ONLINE access point to the device you require. Check the network parameters (baud rate, MPI address). Perform the download from ProTool CS. Reset the S7ONLINE access point to the original device.
On the PU/PC Panel, the S7ONLINE access point is not on a physical device (CP5611 (MPI), for example). This might be the case with an installed SIMATIC NET CD 7/2001, for example.
6-9
Testing projects
Release 12/02
6.5
Instructions for testing projects

Here you will learn how to: Compile a project. Download the project file.
6-10
Release 12/02
Testing projects
6.5.1
How to compile the project
Procedure: Choose "File" > "Compile" from the menu in order to create an executable *.fud file on the operating unit based on your *.pdb project file. During the compilation process, a consistency check is performed on the project. Status messages are output in a window. Note If you move the cursor into the line containing an error message and press "F1", you open direct Help.
6-11
Testing projects
Release 12/02
6.5.2
How to localize screen objects
Principle If, when you are compiling a project, error messages occur that refer to a screen object on a screen in the project, the object name is output with the message as a reference. Such errors can occur when a function is using an object name as a parameter value. Using the "Go to..." function in ProTool, you can quickly and simply find the screen objects in your project by means of their object name.
Localizing screen objects Procedure: 1 2 Open the project containing the screen object. From the "Edit" menu, implement the command "Go to...". The "Go to..." window appears. In the left half of the window there is a list of all the screens contained in the project, including the fixed window. 3 In the left half of the window, select the screen containing the screen object you are looking for. In the right half of the window, all the object names of the screen objects appear that are contained on the selected screen. 4 Double-click the object name you are looking for. The screen is opened, the screen object you are looking for is selected and the associated properties dialog box is opened.
6-12
Release 12/02
Testing projects
6.5.3
How to download the executable project file
Procedure: To download the executable project file to the operating unit, proceed as follows: Procedure: 1 Set the Download mode: "Modem" or "MPI", and enter the MPI address of the operating unit. If there is only one Download mode available on the operating unit, the corresponding dialog box appears immediately. Note in this respect the "Special features associated with MPI download". 2 3 Select the interface for downloading on the configuration computer. Choose "File" > "Download" from the menu to start downloading of your executable project file to the operating unit. If you start the download without first compiling the file, compilation is carried out automatically. If the connection to the operating unit has been established, select the storage medium, depending on the operating unit you are using, to which you want to download the project file: FLASH Module DRAM 5 When downloading has been completed, the operating unit starts up and displays the "start screen".
Note The project file must not be downloaded directly from the configuration computer to the module, but must first be loaded into the flash memory on the operating unit, since the memory organization of the two storage media differs. If the project file were to be downloaded directly to the module and then loaded into the flash memory on an operating unit, error states can result. In the DRAM the data are lost when the operating unit is switched off.
6-13
Testing projects
Release 12/02
6.5.4
Serial transfer
Procedure: To download the project from the configuration computer to the operating unit, the following steps must be taken: Procedure: 1 2 Connect the operating unit and configuration computer using the connecting cable (see the equipment manual). Set the operating unit to the Download mode: "Starting up" with the key combination ESC + Cursor or by an overall reset with ESC + Cursor + Cursor Touch panels only: During startup with the SERIAL DOWNLOAD button in the boot menu of the touch panel or by means of an overall reset of the TP: touch the top left corner of the screen during startup. While the operating unit is operating, for example by means of the standard screen "System Settings". You will find more information on the transfer mode in the equipment manual. 3 4 Choose the "File" > "Settings" > "Download" command from the menu to set the interface of the configuration computer. Start downloading of the project by choosing "File " > "Download" from the menu. When downloading has been completed, the operating unit starts up and displays the "start screen".
6-14
Release 12/02
Testing projects
6.5.5
MPI download
Procedure To download the project from the configuration computer to the operating unit, proceed as follows: Procedure: 1 2 Connect the configuration computer and operating unit physically to the MPI network. Switch the operating unit to the "MPI Download" mode using the standard screen "System Settings", for example. You will find more information on the transfer mode in the equipment manual. Choose "File" > "Settings" > "Download" and enter the MPI address for the operating unit. Note in this respect the "Special features associated with MPI download". 4 Start downloading of the project by choosing "File" > "Download" When the download operation is completed, the operating unit starts up and displays the "start screen" (in the case of graphics devices) or outputs the "standby message" (in the case of text-based displays).
6-15
Testing projects
Release 12/02
6-16
Release 12/02
Documenting and managing projects

This chapter details the multiplicity of functions offered by ProTool for printing out, documenting and managing and archiving your project data.
7-1
Release 12/02
7.1
Printing project data
Print function ProTool provides a comprehensive printout function that can be accessed by choosing "File" > "Print" from the menu. It provides detailed lists for documenting all project-relevant data such as screens, messages, tags, symbol tables, etc.
Print function in ProTool In this way it provides the facility for documenting your complete project. An up-todate printout can also be very helpful while you are configuring. Note When configuring, as an alternative to the printout function, there is also the userfriendly cross-reference function offered by ProTool.
Chapter ProTool subdivides printouts into chapters arranged by subject according to object types. For example, one chapter contains all the definitions on the subject of screens, another contains a list of all the tags and yet another a list of all the defined text or graphic lists. You can print several chapters at once or just print single chapters.
7-2
Release 12/02
Reports ProTool offers you the facility of customizing printouts to suit your individual requirements. You can limit a printout to single chapters or single pages. You can set the order in which the chapters appear. You can decide which data you want to output within a chapter. You can set margins, define your own headers and footers and embed your own graphic in the cover.
These definitions are stored in a "report". Frequently required reports have been defined in ProTool in advance. But you can also create your own reports, as you wish. All reports are common to all projects. Every time you want to print, you choose the report with which you would like your output to conform.
7-3
Release 12/02
7.2
Project management with integrated operation
ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 If you are working with ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7, use SIMATIC Manager to manage your projects. You can then copy, move, back up and restore your projects in the same way as you have been used to from SIMATIC STEP 7. For further information refer to the documentation on SIMATIC Manager. Note ProTool's Project Manager is not available to you in the event of integrated operation. ProTool data can no longer be viewed independently in this event, since the data is always linked to a SIMATIC STEP 7 project. It therefore has to be managed and backed up using this application.
7-4
Release 12/02
7.3
Managing projects in stand-alone operation
Project Manager If you installed ProTool as a "stand-alone" application in other words, if you are not operating it under SIMATIC STEP 7 there is a user-friendly project manager integrated in ProTool instead of SIMATIC Manager. You can use it to manage your projects in a user-friendly way.
Usage With Project Manager, it is simple for you to: Archive projects (Backup), using more than one floppy disk too Restore archived projects (Restore) Open projects Delete projects
Backup and restore The Backup and Restore functions are not possible between devices of different types. Backup and Restore are directly possible on the operating units. Refer to your equipment manual for further information.
Call You start Project Manager by choosing "File" > "Project Manager" from the menu. When you call Project Manager for the first time, the "Find" dialog box is displayed initially. Here you choose the drives and directories which have to be searched for ProTool files. Only those projects that are located within these directories are displayed by Project Manager.
7-5
Release 12/02
"Find" dialog box After you have selected the appropriate directories, or when you call Project Manager later again, the Project Manager window proper appears.
7-6
Release 12/02
Display
Project Manager In the left segment of the Project Manager you will see a hierarchical structure of all the projects located in the directories in which Project Manager searched. Here you can select a project in order to open it, delete it or back it up. In the center segment of the window you will find detailed information on the project highlighted on the list. Using the buttons in the area on the right, you can extend the list of scanned directories ("Find" button), have the directories searched again ("Update" button) and have the list sorted by different project data such as "project name", "device type", "date created", etc. ("Sort" button).
7-7
Release 12/02
7.4
Constraints with printing
Printer drivers Note the following constraints with certain printer drivers: It might not be possible to print the project with CANON drivers. Printing will be discontinued in this case. With the Apple laser printer, the first line is not printed. This problem does not occur with drivers for the HP LaserJet III, PostScript or PostScript printers.
ASCII character set With some printers, it is not enough simply to set the ASCII character set in the project. Make sure the ASCII character set is set on the printer too.
7-8
Release 12/02
7.5
Instructions for documenting and managing projects

We will show you here how to: Print data. Customize a printout. Work with Project Manager. Create a project backup and restore the project. Delete a project.
7-9
Release 12/02
7.5.1
How to print selected data
Principle You can print either the whole project data or specifically selected files. For example, you can limit your printout to screen information, tag definitions etc.
Printing complete chapters To print selected or all the chapters of the current project, perform the following steps: Procedure: 1 2 Choose "File" > "Print" from the menu. Select the report on which you want the printout to be based by choosing "Reports". By default, reports have been defined in advance in ProTool for every object type and also for a complete printout of all the project data. To these must be added user-defined reports, if appropriate. If you do not select a section in the list of "contents", all the sections listed will be printed. If you select one or more chapters, only those chapters will be printed. 3 Before you start to print, you should click the "Preview" button and check that the results will be as you expect. If you do not require all the data, you can adapt the degree of detail in the individual sections. If you would like to change the appearance of the printout, you can change the width of the margins and customize the headers and footers. 4 Finally, click the OK button to initiate the printing process proper.
7-10
Release 12/02
Printing single pages or single messages If you have selected only a single chapter in the "Print" dialog box at "Contents", or only a single chapter is contained in the report you selected, you can limit the printout to a specific range of pages. If the chapter deals with event messages or alarm messages, an alternative would be to limit the printout to a specific range of message numbers. To limit printing to a range of pages, perform the following steps: Procedure: 1 2 Select the "Pages" option. Specify at "From" and "To" the range of page numbers which you want to have printed.
To limit printing to a range of message numbers, perform the following steps: Procedure: 1 2 Select the "Symbols" option. Specify at "From" and "To" the range of message numbers which you want to have printed.
Note Alternatively, you can print a chapter from a specific page or message number to the end of the section. To do this, enter the beginning of the print range at "From". At "To", enter a number that is larger than the last page number or the highest message number, as the case may be.
7-11
Release 12/02
7.5.2
How to determine the degree of detail on a printout
General The data that are printed depend on: The report you are using for printing. It sets the chapters that are going to be printed and thus determines the scope of the printout. The data that are going to be printed within a specific chapter and those that are going to be inhibited. This determines the degree of detail of a printout.
These settings can differ from report to report.
Procedure: To set the information which needs to be printed from within a specific chapter of a specific report, perform the following steps: Procedure: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Choose "File" > "Print" from the menu. In the "Print" dialog box, click the "Reports" button. At "Reports", select the report to which you want the new settings to apply. Select in the "Contents" list the line with the section whose scope you which to modify. Click the "Parameters" button. Select in the "Parameters" dialog box all the data that you want to appear on the printout. Confirm by clicking OK.
7-12
Release 12/02
7.5.3
How to define the layout of a printout
Principle You can customize the layout of every report to suit your own requirements.
Procedure: To modify the width of the margins and set individual headers and footers, perform the following steps: Procedure: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Choose "File" > "Print" from the menu. In the "Print" dialog box, click the "Reports" button. At "Reports", select the report to which you want the new settings to apply. Click the "Page" button. Set the margins in the "Page" dialog box and specify a string of text for the header and footer. Repeat steps 3 through 6 for other reports as necessary. Confirm by clicking OK.
To embed your own graphic in the cover, perform the following steps: Procedure: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Choose "File" > "Print" from the menu. In the "Print" dialog box, click the "Reports" button. At "Reports", select a report that uses the cover sheet, such as the Complete report. Select the "Cover Sheet" line from the "Contents" list. Click the "Parameters" button. Select an existing screen object from the "Cover Sheet" dialog box, or create a new graphic. Confirm by clicking OK.
7-13
Release 12/02
7.5.4
How to create your own printed reports
General A report determines which chapters are printed. ProTool already contains a number of reports which have been defined in advance and whose contents you cannot modify. However, you can influence the degree of detail for the printout. You can also define your own reports to suit your own requirements. This means that you can afterwards print exactly the information that you really require. You can determine: Which sections you want to have printed. The order in which the sections are printed.
Procedure: Procedure: 1 2 3 4 5 Choose "File" > "Print" from the menu. In the "Print" dialog box, click the "Reports" button. Click the "New" button. In the "Report Name" dialog box, enter the name under which you wish the new report to be addressed and click OK. In the "Reports" dialog box in the "Selection" list, select the order in which you want the sections to be included in the printout. Apply the sections by clicking the ">>" button in the "Contents" list. 6 The sections will be printed afterwards in the order in which they are listed in the "Contents" list. If required, rearrange the order with the "Up" and "Down" buttons. 7 8 You can now customize the degree of detail for the different sections, as required. Finally, confirm your settings by clicking OK.
7-14
Release 12/02
7.5.5
How to work with Project Manager
General In Project Manager you can view a list of all the ProTool projects contained in your project directories. Note Project Manager is available only in stand-alone operation. If you integrated ProTool into SIMATIC STEP 7 when you installed it, use SIMATIC Manager to manage your projects.
Opening Project Manager Procedure: 1 From the menu, choose "File" > "Project Manager". When you call Project Manager for the first time, the "Find" dialog box is displayed. 2 Here you specify the directories in which your ProTool projects are located. (You will find a precise description of this lower down in "Extending the list of scanned directories".) Confirm by clicking OK. The Project Manager window then opens. Note When you call Project Manager again, the "Find" dialog box is not displayed any more.
Displaying project information saved with a project Procedure: 1 2 Move the selection bar in the "Configurations" column to the name of the project file concerned. Double-click the symbols "+" and "-" to display and hide the projects in subdirectories or groups, as the case may be. In the center segment of the display you will now see the following project data: "file name", "device type", "date created", "date last changed", "date compiled", "created by" and "system description".
7-15
Release 12/02
Sorting a display To find a specific project quickly, you can sort the project list according to different project data for example, by date of creation or author: Procedure: 1 2 Click the "Sort" button. From the "Sort" dialog box, select the sort criterion you want and confirm by clicking OK. The display is then arranged hierarchically according to the new sort criterion.
Extending the list of scanned directories If a project does not appear on the list, you might possibly have to add directories to the list in which Project Manager searches for data You can also select whole drives. The more you can narrow your selection, the more quickly will the search process be completed. Procedure: 1 2 3 Click the "Find" button. Go to the "Find" dialog box and at "Format" select the data which you would like to see in Project Manager: "projects", "backups", or both. At "Directories", select the drives or sub-directories in which you want Project Manager to search and apply the selection by clicking the "Add" button. Alternatively, you can apply more than one directory. 4 5 If you want Project Manager to search all the sub-directories as well, select the "Include sub-directories" check box. Confirm your selection by clicking OK. ProTool will then search through the directories you specified for data. This process may take some time.
Updating a display If you want to create a new project or move existing projects, you must update Project Manager. Procedure: 1 Click the "Update" button. Project Manager then searches through all the directories again and updates the display.
7-16
Release 12/02
7.5.6
How to back up a project
General Project Manager makes the Backup and Restore functions available to create a backup of your projects and to restore them. Project Manager supports project backup and restore operations extending over several floppy disks. This is useful with projects take up more space than is available on a single floppy disk. Note Project Manager is available only in stand-alone operation. If you integrated ProTool into SIMATIC STEP 7 when you installed it, use SIMATIC Manager to manage your projects.
Procedure: Procedure: 1 2 3 4 5 6 Choose "File" > "Project Manager" from the menu. If the project you want to archive is not shown in the list, extend the list of scanned directories, or update the display. Select from the list the project for which you wish to make a backup. Click the "Backup" button. Use the "Backup" dialog box to select the drive and the directory to which you want to have the backup written. Specify the name of the backup file. ProTool suggests a name for the project file, followed by the file extension .arh. If you wish, you can overtype the name but leave the file extension .arh as it is. 7 Confirm by clicking OK. ProTool now compresses the data and writes them to the archive. If you are saving to floppy disks, ProTool will prompt you to insert another floppy disk, if necessary. The backup process is interrupted in that case until you insert a new data medium and have acknowledged that you have done so in the dialog box displayed. Note When you are creating backups involving more than one floppy disk, note the disk numbers on the floppy disks. This ensures that data are later restored from the backups in the correct order.
7-17
Release 12/02
7.5.7
How to restore a project
General Project Manager makes the Backup and Restore functions available to create a backup of your projects and to restore them. Project Manager supports project backup and restore operations extending over several floppy disks. This is useful with projects take up more space than is available on a single floppy disk. Note Project Manager is available only in stand-alone operation. If you integrated ProTool into SIMATIC STEP 7 when you installed it, use SIMATIC Manager to manage your projects.
Procedure: Procedure: 1 2 Choose "File" > "Project Manager" from the menu. If the archived file is not shown in the list, extend the list of scanned directories, or update the display. Make sure in particular that the format at "Find" is set to "Backups" or "Configurations/Backups". 3 4 5 6 Select the project you wish to restore in the list. Click the "Restore" button. In the "Restore" dialog box, select the drive and the directory to which you want to have the project written. Specify the name of the project file. ProTool suggests a name for the project file, followed by the file extension .pdb. If you wish, you can overtype the name but leave the file extension .pdb as it is. 7 Confirm by clicking OK. ProTool then unpacks the backup. You can now update Project Manager and open the project.
7-18
Release 12/02
7.5.8
How to delete a project
General Using Project Manager, you can delete projects or backups in a user-friendly manner. Note Project Manager is available only in stand-alone operation. If you integrated ProTool into SIMATIC STEP 7 when you installed it, use SIMATIC Manager to manage your projects.
Procedure: Procedure: 1 2 3 4 5 Choose "File" > "Project Manager" from the menu. If the project or the archived file is not shown in the list, extend the list of scanned directories, or update the display. Select the project you wish to delete on the list. Click the "Delete" button. ProTool asks once more whether you really want to delete the file. Confirm by clicking OK. The object concerned is deleted and disappears from the list in Project Manager.
7-19
Release 12/02
7.6
Example of documenting a project

This example shows you how to create a customized printout.
7-20
Release 12/02
7.6.1
How to create a customized printout
Objective You wish to print all the data in your project. Unlike the default setting, you do not want the ProTool graphic but your company logo, which you have already used in your project under the name of LOGO, to be printed on the cover sheet. You want to leave a margin for handwritten comments on the right side of the printout.
Procedure: Procedure: 1 2 3 Open the project from which you wish to print data. Choose "File" > "Print" from the menu. In the "Print" dialog box at "Reports", choose the Complete report. You will now see the individual chapters in the "Contents" list in the order in which they will later be output.
7-21
Release 12/02
Procedure: 4 Click the "Preview" button. The print preview shows you how your printout will look later. You want to replace the graphic on the first page (cover) with your company logo. You want the right border to be much wider.
5 6
Exit from the preview by clicking the "Print" button. To perform the changes you require, click the "Reports" button. The "Reports" dialog box is opened.
7-22
Release 12/02
Procedure: 7 8 To modify the margin, click the "Page" button. Enter the value you require for the right border at "Right" - for example, 3 for 3 cm. If you like, you can specify a piece of text here for the headers and footers at the same time.
9 10 11 12 13
Confirm your input by clicking OK. You are now back in the "Reports" dialog box. To modify the definition for the cover sheet, select the entry Cover Sheet in the "Contents" list and click the "Parameters" button. In the "Cover Sheet" dialog box, select the graphic called LOGO with your company logo at "Graphic". Click OK twice until you are back in the "Print" dialog box. Finally, click the OK button to start the printing process.
7-23
Release 12/02
7-24
Release 12/02
Tips for efficient configuration

Here you can obtain useful tips on how to design your configuration in ProTool even more efficiently.
8-1
Release 12/02
8.1
Optimizing performance
Principle If you want to optimize performance to the maximum possible while the operating unit is operating, the best way to achieve this is by having the best possible setting for the "update time and acquisition cycle". The acquisition times specified for the area pointers and the acquisition times of the tags are important factors for the update times that can actually be achieved. The following applies to calculation of the update time: Update time = acquisition cycle plus transfer time plus processing time. You achieve optimum update times by taking the following points into account while you are configuring: Create the different data areas as small as possible and as large as necessary. Define contiguous data areas where they belong. The actual update time improves if you create one large area instead of several small ones. If you select too small an acquisition cycle, it has an adverse degrades overall performance. Set the acquisition cycle in line with the update rate of the process values.
Example: The temperature variation of a furnace, for example, is considerably less dynamic than the variation in speed of an electric drive. The guide figure for the acquisition cycle is approx. 1 second. If necessary, dispense with the cyclic download of user data areas (data entry cycle 0) to improve update times. Instead, use PLC jobs to download user data areas spontaneously. Place all message or screen tags in a data area. For the operating unit to be able reliably to detect changes on the PLC, the changes must be queued during the actual acquisition cycle.
8-2
Release 12/02
8.2
Making optimum use of graphics
Optimizing graphic applications It may take a relatively long time to load and save projects, especially if you use a large number of Designer, Corel Photo Paint or Corel Draw graphics. Save As Save at "Save As ..." from time to time. This optimizes data storage and makes the *.pdb file smaller. Graphics editor Avoid large numbers of Designer, Corel Photo Paint and Corel Draw graphics. Program sections of these editors are used when graphics are processed. Some of these editors are very slow. The best times are achieved with Paint. Reduce the color depth The memory requirements for graphics increases in proportion to the number of colors you use. Therefore use only the absolutely essential color availability in your graphics.
Efficient creation of graphics To create graphics as efficiently as possible, take the following recommendations into consideration: Use pixel graphics primarily in those cases where the size of the window is fixed, as with icons for soft keys or buttons, for example. You should use vector graphics for graphics whose size has to be subsequently modified. Always create your graphics with the same aspect ratio as the clicked and dragged field in ProTool. In doing so, it should be borne in mind that a graphic having a size of, say, 10 cm 20 cm cannot be displayed faithfully from a pixel point of view in a field of 1 cm 2 cm. Information is lost in such a case.
Saving large graphics If a large number of graphic elements are used in a configuration (for example, as a background image or in graphics lists), there may be storage problems in the following cases. The reason is that the working memory is too small. The following cases can occur: While you are configuring, you reach the limit of the working memory. The following message appears: "Could not find the server application program, the source file or the element..." When you are compiling, you reach the limit of the working memory. The following message appears: "Insufficient memory." You open a sizable configuration on a computer that does not have sufficient memory. The following message appears: "Could not open document."
If one of these cases occurs, check, and if necessary, modify the size of the virtual memory. Increase the size of the physical random access memory (RAM).
8-3
Release 12/02
8.3
Creating graphics
Efficient creation of graphics The following tips are designed to help you create graphics as efficiently as possible: Use pixel graphics primarily in those cases where the size of the window is fixed, as with icons for soft keys or buttons, for example. You should use vector graphics for graphics whose size has to be subsequently modified. If you use the same graphic in different sizes, more than one graphic has to be created for it in ProTool. ProTool cannot scale to several sizes from one graphic. Duplicate the graphic in this case and store it in different sizes. Always create your graphics with the same aspect ratio as the clicked and dragged field in ProTool. In doing so, it should be borne in mind that a graphic having a size of, say, 10 cm 20 cm cannot be displayed faithfully from a pixel point of view in a field of 1 cm 2 cm. Information is lost in such a case.
8-4
Release 12/02
8.4
Libraries in ProTool
Purpose Libraries are collections of preconfigured screen objects. They add to the number of screen objects available and enhance the effectiveness of your configuration by repeated and multiple use of "finished parts".
Standard libraries Once ProTool is installed, the following libraries are available to you in the \Library directory: File name Bmp-Graphics.lib Vector-Graphics.lib Content Technical standard symbols Pipes, pumps, tanks and valves Buttons Buttons Suitable for devices All All Windows systems, except TP 170 A TP 27, TP 37 All Windows systems, specifically touch devices, such as TP 170 A, TP 170 B, TP 270
Touch-Switches.lib TP 170A-TOUCH-Switches.lib
You can add further libraries to this directory yourself and then use them in ProTool. Files must be of the *.lib type and have the same format as a ProTool library.
Managing libraries As soon as you open a screen in a project, you have access to the menu options under "Edit" > "Libraries" and to the icon button. Once you open the first library, the library window on the screen is active. The first library opened and all those subsequently opened are shown together here, as a tree structure.
8-5
Release 12/02
The following functions are available to assist you in managing your libraries: Adding a library: You insert a file (of the *.lib type or in ProTool library format) in the \Library directory. Use the "New" option on the shortcut menu to create a new, empty library. Save a library under a different name and then edit it. Renaming or deleting a library: Use the Windows functions in Explorer of the library. Deleting library objects or folders: Use the shortcut menu of the library. Restructuring a library: Edit the overview by dragging with the Windows functions. Use "New Folder" on the shortcut menu to add a new folder. To rename folders or library objects, click twice or press "F2".
Note You cannot edit a write-protected library.
Editing library objects You cannot edit library objects directly, you can only edit them in a project. Paste the object in question to a screen in your project, edit it there and move it back to the associated library. Delete the original object and give the one you have just added the same name as the old one.
8-6
Release 12/02
8.5
Using a tag in several fields
Background If you use a tag on the operating unit in an input field and simultaneously in an output field, this may result in unexpected display behavior. The value of the tag at this address can be modified both by the PLC and by means of an input on the operating unit. Example: You enter a new value on the operating unit. The output field is updated immediately with the new value. In the meantime, a value is read from the PLC which is still the old value. The old value is then displayed briefly in the output field and in the input field. While that is happening, the new value is being transferred to the PLC. The new value is then displayed in both fields upon the next update.
Action We recommend for this reason that you configure different tags for the input field and the output field.
8-7
Release 12/02
8.6
Tags with configured decimal places
Special features when inputting limit values Limit values for tags are entered without a point. The constant for the limit value is interpreted differently, depending on whether decimal places have been specified for the tag. The number of specified decimal places determines how many places of the limit value are interpreted as decimal places. The table shows an example. Decimal places 0 1 2 Limit Value Entered 2275 2275 2275 Interpreted by ProTool 2275 227,5 22,75
8-8
Release 12/02
8.7
Tips on touch panels
Special points about configuring touch panels The following tips apply specifically to projects that you create for touch panels: Input fields and input/output fields are touch-sensitive on TPs. Select for the field a background color that differs from that of the current screen. In this way the touch-sensitive are on the TP can be recognized by the size of the colored field. Always dimension input fields and input/output fields as a multiple of the touch grid. If, for example, you are using the 8 8 character set and position two input fields or two input/output fields within a grid line, then one of the two fields cannot be operated on the TP. Help text is particularly helpful with input fields and input/output fields, since the assignment of input field to input window on the TP is not directly evident from the position of the input window. The touch panel display a maximum of 26 characters in the input field for symbolic values. You should therefore avoid long text entries in your text list.
8-9
Release 12/02
8-10
Release 12/02
Reference
Reference
The Reference allows you to look up information on the following topics: Functions PLC jobs Standard screens Communication for non-SIMATIC PLCs Working with libraries Recommended printers System limits
9-1
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1
Functions Reference
Principle ProTool features a large number of predefined functions that you can embed in your projects. Every function can be linked to an object or with another entry point, as well as to an event. The function is triggered as soon as the event occurs during operation. Under the heading "Configurable Events" you will find a list of all objects for which you can configure functions. Alphabetic and subject indexes allow you to access detailed information relating to the intended use and to the parameters of all available functions.
9-2
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.1
Configurable Events
General Every function has to be linked to an object (or with another entry point) and to an event. The function is triggered as soon as the event occurs. The events that you can define depend on the object concerned and on the function selected. Note The name "key" in the following descriptions applies to keys Fx and Kx for OP 27/37 and OP 25/35 and to the configurable buttons for TP 27/37 units.
Object-linked functions The following overview lists all the objects for which you can configure functions and explains the events which may trigger them. Object Tag Event Initialization Value input Explanation The function is triggered when the tag is initialized. The function is triggered after a value has been entered in the input field. Not until after that is the value entered in the tag of the input field. The function is triggered before a value, which has changed, is entered in the tag by the PLC. The function is triggered after the data record tag has been read by the data medium and before its contents are stored. The function is triggered after the message tag has been read and before the contents of the message view is output in a message. The function is triggered when the value is applied to the trend buffer. The function is executed when the control is pressed. The function is released when the control is pressed. The function is executed repeatedly as long as the control remains pressed (only available on touch panels).
Value output
Read data record tag
Read message tag
Apply Value to Trend Buffer Function key, Press button button Release key Repeat key
9-3
Reference
Release 12/02
Object Field
Event Select screen Exit from Field
Explanation The function is triggered when the field is selected. The function is triggered when you exit from the field. After building: the function is triggered when the field is selected following building of the screen. Before building: the function is triggered when the field is selected prior to building of the screen.
Screen
Select screen
Exit from Screen Message Message Arrives Message departing Message Acknowledged
The function is triggered when you exit from the screen. The function is triggered when the message arrives. The function is triggered when the message departs. The function is executed when the alarm message is acknowledged.
9-4
Release 12/02
Reference
Global functions You can configure global functions too. Global functions are not assigned to any particular objects but are linked to specific entry points. The following table shows the conditions under which the functions can be triggered for the different entry points. Entry point Recipes Initializations Print Miscellaneous Explanation The function is triggered when a data record is read or written. The function is triggered when a tag is initialized or a system startup is initiated. The function is enabled when the Print Screen or Print Screen List function is triggered. The function is triggered when values are entered, the message buffer overflows or the message buffer is deleted.
9-5
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.2
Functions, thematically
The following functions are defined in ProTool for graphics displays. Not all functions are ever available at any one time, however. The functions that are actually made available always depend on the type of the object assigned to the function and also on the type of PLC and the type of the operating unit for which the project has been created.
Screens Automatic Graphics Printing Select Screen Dynamic Screen Selection 1 Dynamic Screen Selection 2 Select Previous Screen Print Screen List Graphics Mode with Print Screen List PROFIBUS Screen Number (TP only)
Bit editing Initialize Bit in Startup Reset Bit Reset Bit in Word Set Bit Set Bit on Pressing Button Set Bit in Word Set/Reset Bit in Word Set/Reset Bit Reset BOOL Tag (not TP) Set BOOL Tag (not TP) Direct Key (TP only) PROFIBUS Screen Number (TP only)
9-6
Release 12/02
Reference
Data record Because of their complex contexts, the following functions are configured on a standard screen and not described here. Use the corresponding standard screen to employ one of these functions: The operation of the standard screens is explained in the device manuals. Select Data Record Edit Data Record Delete Data Record Data Record: DAT > OP Data Record: DAT > OP/PLC Data Record: OP > DAT Data Record OP > PLC Data Record PLC > OP Data Record: PLC > OP/DAT Format Data Medium
Date/Time Date and Time Date Display/Edit Time Display/Edit
Print Automatic Graphics Printing Print Screen List Graphics Mode with Print Screen List Start/Stop Print Screen Print Messages Print Messages with Filter 1 Print Messages with Filter 2 Message Log ON/OFF
9-7
Reference
Release 12/02
Because of their complex contexts, the following functions are configured on a standard screen and not described here. Use the corresponding standard screen to employ one of these functions: The operation of the standard screens is explained in the device manuals. Printer parameters Printer Parameters (Anchor) Color Assignment for Printer Print Screen Parameters Print Screen Parameters (Anchor)
9-8
Release 12/02
Reference
Messages Event Message Window Delete event buffer Display Events Short Message Page Screen (TP only) Change EM Page/Buffer Operate Message Screen (TP only) Message Log ON/OFF Display Messages Print Messages Print Messages with Filter 1 Print Messages with Filter 2 Message Filter Buffer Overflow Change AM Page/Buffer Delete alarm buffer Display Alarms Alarms - Display First/Last
Password Because of their complex contexts, the following functions are configured on a standard screen and not described here. Use the corresponding standard screen to employ one of these functions: The operation of the standard screens is explained in the device manuals. Define Password Define Password Level Enter Password Display Passwords
9-9
Reference
Release 12/02
Calculation Set Tag Initial Value Scaling Linear 1 Scaling Linear 2 Scaling Square 1 Scaling Square 2 Tag: Minus/Plus Value Tag: Set Value
Status/Force Tag Because of their complex contexts, the following functions are configured on a standard screen and not described here. Use the corresponding standard screen to employ one of these functions: The operation of the standard screens is explained in the device manuals. S5: Status/Force Init_1 S5: Status/Force Init_2 S5: Force Tag S5/S7: Status Start/Stop S5/S7: Status Tag S5/S7: Deselect Status/Force S5/S7: Select Status/Force S5/S7: Force Input S5/S7 Hide Status/Force (TPs only) S5/S7 Status/Force ID (TPs only) S7 Status/Force Init 1 S7: Force Tag
System settings Backup/Restore Module (except TP 27) Blank Screen Display Help Text (TP only) Adjust Contrast (TP 27 only) Clean Screen (TP only) Acoustic Signal (TP only) Touch Calibration (TP 37 only)
9-10
Release 12/02
Reference
Keyboard Scroll UP Scroll DOWN Direct Key (TP only) Display Help Text (TP only) PROFIBUS Screen Number (TP only)
Switching Mode (function) Language (function)
9-11
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.3
Functions, alphabetically
The following functions are defined in ProTool for graphics displays. Not all functions are ever available at any one time, however. The functions that are actually made available always depend on the type of the object assigned to the function and also on the type of PLC and the type of the operating unit for which the project has been created. Note Functions in complex contexts are not explained in this Help. However, they are fully configured on the standard screens. The operation of the standard screens is explained in the device manuals.
A Automatic Graphics Printing Acoustic Signal (TP only) Adjust Contrast (TP 27 only) Alarms - Delete Buffer Alarms - Display First/Last
B Backup/Restore Module (except TP 27) Blank Screen Buffer Overflow
C Change AM Page/Buffer Change EM Page/Buffer Clean Screen (TP only)
D Date and Time Date Display/Edit Direct Key (TP only) Display Alarms Display Events Display Help Text (TP only)
9-12
Release 12/02
Reference
Display Messages Dynamic Screen Selection 1 Dynamic Screen Selection 2
E Event Window Events - Delete Buffer
G Graphics Mode with Print Screen List
I Initialize Bit in Startup
L Language
M Message Filter Message Log ON/OFF Mode
O Operate Message Screen (TP only)
P Print Messages with Filter 1 Print Messages with Filter 2 Print Messages Print Screen List PROFIBUS Screen Number (TP only)
9-13
Reference
Release 12/02
R Reset Bit in Word Reset Bit Reset BOOL Tag (not TP)
S Scaling Linear 1 Scaling Linear 2 Scaling Square 1 Scaling Square 2 Scroll DOWN Scroll UP Select Previous Screen Select Screen Set Bit in Word Set Bit on Pressing Button Set Bit Set BOOL Tag (not TP) Set Tag Initial Value Set/Reset Bit in Word Set/Reset Bit Short Message Page Screen (TP only) Start/Stop Print Screen
T Tag: Minus/Plus Value Tag: Set Value Time Display/Edit Touch Calibration (TP 37)
9-14
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.4
Acoustic Signal (function)
Constraint The Acoustic Signal function is only available on TPs.
Usage This function enables or disables the acoustic acknowledgement of operation of a touch-sensitive control (button or input field) on the TP. Note By default, the acoustic signal is enabled when the TP is restarted. While the TP is starting up, you can disable the acoustic signal by activating the function at "System" > "Functions" from the "Initialization" entry point.
Key Configurable on X
Tag X
Global
Example on standard screen Z_SETTINGS
Parameters - None -
Example: triggering by means of keys Objective You wish to switch the acoustic signal for operation of a button or input field by means of a button. Tips on configuring Configure a button and assign the Acoustic Signal function to it. Procedure on the operating unit Output of the acoustic signal alternates between the following states when the button is touched: TP 37 On - Off TP 27 Loud - Quiet - Off
9-15
Reference
Release 12/02
Example: triggering by means of tags Objective You wish to switch the acoustic signal for operation of a button or an input field by means of an input/output field. Tips on configuring Create an input/output field having a random tag on a screen. Configure the Acoustic Signal function for this tag. Procedure on the operating unit As soon as the value of the tag changes, output of the acoustic signal is switched alternately between the following states: TP 37 On - Off TP 27 Loud - Quiet - Off
9-16
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.5
Adjust Contrast (function)
Constraint The Adjust Contrast function is available only on the TP 27. The function is not operative on devices having a TFT display (active control). Usage You use this function to adjust the contrast of the screen. Key Configurable on X Tag Global -
Parameters Contrast Minus/Plus 0 = Reduce contrast 1 = Increase contrast
Example Objective You want to increase and reduce the contrast of the screen on the TP 27 by means of a button for each option. Tips on configuring Configure two buttons. Assign the Adjust Contrast function to the two buttons. Enter the following parameters: 0 = Reduce contrast 1 = Increase contrast Procedure on the operating unit The contrast is increased or reduced by one level whenever you touch one of the two buttons.
9-17
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.6
Usage
Alarms - Delete Buffer.
With this function you delete the alarm messages from the buffer. All messages that are waiting to be serviced or have yet to be acknowledged are not deleted. Key Configurable on X Tag X Global X
Example on standard screen Z_MESSAGES
Parameters - None -
Example: triggering by means of keys Objective You wish to delete the alarm buffer by means of a key. Tips on configuring Select the key which you wish to use for deleting the alarm buffer. Assign the Alarms - Delete Buffer function at "Selected functions". Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered as soon as the value of the input/output field is modified. The alarm buffer is deleted. Example: triggering by means of tags Objective You wish to delete the alarm buffer by means of an input or output field on the screen. Tips on configuring Create an input/output field having a random tag on a screen. For this tag, configure the function you selected, Alarms - Delete Buffer. Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered as soon as the value of the input/output field is modified. The alarm buffer is deleted.
9-18
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.7
Alarms - Display First/Last (function)
Usage With this function you set whether the first or last message to arrive is displayed. This setting also affects display of the event page and of the alarm page. Key Configurable on X Tag Global
Parameters First/Last (key) 0 = display last message 1 = display first message 1 = toggle First <=> Last First/Last (field) Tag of the BOOL type: 0 = Display last message 1 = Display first message
Special feature You can use a toggle function. In this instance, you choose by means of a single key whether the first or last message should be displayed. Configure it as described above but just set one key. Specify 1 as the value for the constant. If you press the key, the function is triggered, and the first message to arrive is displayed. If the key is pressed a second time, the last message to arrive is displayed, and so on.
9-19
Reference
Release 12/02
Example Objective You wish to set, by means of two keys, whether the first or last message to arrive should be displayed. Tips on configuring Select the key you want to use for setting the last message to arrive as the message to be displayed. Select the Alarms - Display First/Last function and define the following parameters: a constant which applies to the Last setting: First/Last (Key): 0 and a tag: First/Last (Field).
Follow the same procedure for the second key, For the constant, use the corresponding value, 1, to first display the first message to arrive. For the tag, always use the same tag. So that you can recognize whether the first or last message to arrive is being displayed on the screen, configure a symbolic output field to which the tag that you configured above is assigned. Also, create a text list and assign the values 0 and 1 to the corresponding states Last and First. Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered whenever you press on one of the keys. The constant is evaluated, and the first or last message to arrive is displayed accordingly. The value of the constant is transferred to the tag, and the output field is updated.
9-20
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.8
Automatic Graphics Printing (function)
Usage This function is used to print all print jobs on the operating unit (messages, screen shot etc.) specifically for a language in graphics mode. The function does not affect any other language in the project. Key Configurable on Tag Global X
Example on standard screen -None-
Parameters Language 0 = project language 1 1 = project language 2 2 = project language 3
Example Objective In your project, you are using a language with graphic characters which cannot be represented as ASCII characters. You therefore require all the print jobs in that language to be performed on the operating unit in graphics mode. Tips on configuring The Automatic Graphics Printing function is a global function. Choose "System" > "Functions" from the menu to attach the function to the Initializations entry point. Enter for the parameter the number (0 ...2) of the language for which automatic graphics printing is to apply. The language number follows the order in which they were configured at "System" > "Language Assignment". Procedure on the operating unit If the language set as the parameter on the operating unit is active, all print jobs are printed automatically in graphics mode. Note Compared to an ASCII printout, printing in graphics mode is noticeably slower.
9-21
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.9
Backup/Restore (function)
Usage You use this function to write data from data areas of the operating unit to the memory modules or from these modules to the data areas of the operating unit. There are three data areas: Firmware, Project, and Data Records. Key Configurable on X Tag X Global X
Example on standard screen Z_BACKUP
Parameters Direction Scope 0 = operating unit > module 1 = module > operating unit 0 = firmware + project + data records 1 = firmware + project 2 = data records
Example: triggering by means of keys Objective You wish to write data records from the operating unit to the module or from the module to the operating unit by means of two keys. Tips on configuring Select first the key to be used to set the operating unit > module direction. At the Backup/Restore Module function you selected, set the following parameters: Constant Direction = 0 and Constant Scope = 2. Follow the same procedure for the second key, For the Direction constant use here the value 1. For the Scope constant use the value 2 again. Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered whenever you press on one of the keys. The constants are evaluated, and the data records are written, depending on the direction, to either the module or the operating unit.
9-22
Release 12/02
Reference
Example: triggering by means of tags Objective You wish to write data records from the operating unit to the module using an input/output field on the screen. Tips on configuring Create an input/output field having a random tag on a screen. For this tag, configure the function you selected - Backup/Restore Module - with the parameters Constant Direction = 0 and Constant Scope = 2. Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered as soon as the value of the input/output field is modified and the values of the constants are evaluated. The data records are written from the operating unit to the module.
Example: global triggering Objective You want to load a project automatically from the memory card onto the operating unit when the operating unit starts up in order, for example, to download project data onto another operating unit without using a configuration computer. Tips on configuring Choose "System" > "Functions" from the menu to attach the function to the Initializations entry point. Enter the following parameters: Direction = 1, Scope = 0 or 1. Procedure on the operating unit To load the project onto the operating unit when the operating unit starts up, perform the following steps: Procedure: 1 2 3 Insert the memory card holding the data you want to load into the operating unit Power up the operating unit. It detects the inserted memory card upon starting up. Confirm the prompt as to whether a Restore operation should be performed by clicking OK. While starting up, the operating unit loads the stored data (firmware/project/data records) into the internal memory. On completion of the Restore operation, the operating unit switches to Transfer mode. Withdraw the memory card from the device so that the operating unit does not have to perform another Restore operation for the memory card the next time it starts up. Start loading the project by canceling Download mode by choosing OK.
9-23
Reference
Release 12/02
Memory cards released for graphics-based operating units The following memory cards have been released for use on graphics-based operating units: 6ES7 952 1KL00 0AA0 2 MB 6ES7 952 1KM00 0AA0 4 MB 6ES7 952 1KP00 0AA0 8 MB 6ES7 952 1KS00 0AA0 16 MB
9-24
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.10 Blank Screen (function)
Usage With this function, the back-lighting of the screen is switched off after a set time if there is no operator input on the operating unit. The back-lighting is switched on again when a key is pressed on the operating unit. Note The type of blanking circuit depends on the device. With the OP 27 and TP 27, the intensity of the backlighting is reduced so much that you can still read the contents of the screen. On all other devices, the backlighting is turned off completely. To increase the operating life of the LCD back-lighting, the function is configured with a delay time of 30 minutes in the standard projects for the OP 27 and the TP 27. You can change this setting by choosing "System" -> "Functions" from the menu and then the entry point "Initializations" and operating the "Functions" button. Key Configurable on X Tag X Global X
Parameters Idle Time (min)" " from 0 to 50 minutes
Example: triggering by means of keys Objective You want to use a key to blank the screen on the operating unit. Tips on configuring Select the Blank Screen function for the key you want to use to blank the screen. However, the Idle Time (min) parameter is not evaluated when the function is triggered using a key. Procedure on the operating unit The screen is blanked as soon as you operate the key.
9-25
Reference
Release 12/02
Example: global triggering Objective You want to automatically blank the screen on the operating unit if there is no operator input. Tips on configuring Select the Blank Screen function for the key you want to use to blank the screen. However, the Idle Time (min) parameter is not evaluated when the function is triggered using a key. Procedure on the operating unit The function is initiated and the Idle Time parameter is evaluated as soon as you power up the operating unit. If there is no operator input on the operating unit within the time configured, the screen is blanked. The time count starts after any input made by the operator on the operating unit.
9-26
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.11 Buffer Overflow Warning (function)
Usage With this function you enable and disable a warning on buffer overflow. Key Configurable on X Tag Global
Parameters ON/OFF (key) 0 = disable warning 1 = enable warning 1 = toggle ON <=> OFF ON/OFF (field) BOOL type tag: 0 = disable warning 1 = enable warning
Special feature You can use a toggle function. In this instance, you enable and disable a warning on buffer overflow by means of a single key. You configure in the manner described above, the only difference being that you define just one key. Specify 1 as the value for the constant. If you press the key, the function is triggered and Warn on Buffer Overload is enabled. If the key is pressed a second time, Warn on Buffer Overload is disabled, and so on.
9-27
Reference
Release 12/02
Example Objective You wish to enable and disable a warning on buffer overflow by means of two keys. Tips on configuring Select the key you wish to use to enable output of a warning when a buffer overflows. Select the Buffer Overflow function and define the following parameters: A constant for enabling the message log: ON/OFF (Key): 1 and A tag: ON/OFF (Field).
Follow the same procedure for the second key, For the constant, use the value 0 to disable. For the tag, always use the same tag. To be able to recognize on the screen whether Warn on Buffer Overload has been enabled or disabled, configure a symbolic output field to which the tag you configured above is assigned. Also, create a text list and assign the values 0 and 1 to the corresponding conditions OFF and ON. Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered whenever you press on one of the keys. The constant is evaluated, and Warn on Buffer Overload is enabled or disabled accordingly. The value of the constant is transferred to the tag, and the output field is updated.
9-28
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.12 Change AM Page/Buffer (function)
Usage With this function you always open the alarm message page first. Every time the function is triggered thereafter, it toggles between the alarm message page and the alarm buffer. Press ESC to exit from the function and close the alarm message page and the alarm buffer. Key Configurable on X Tag Global
Parameters - None -
Condition This function is allowed only for function keys (Kx). In the case of touch panels, the function must be attached to a button that is globally available (e.g. in the permanent window). Note Never use soft keys (Fx), since all the soft keys are disabled on the alarm message page and you therefore cannot toggle between the alarm message page and the alarm buffer.
Example Objective You wish to select the alarm message page by means of a key and, whenever the key is pressed toggle between the alarm message page and the alarm buffer. Tips on configuring Select the key you wish to use for selecting the alarm message page. Assign the Change AM Page/Buffer at "Selected functions". Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered whenever you press the key. The alarm message page is opened. Every time the key is pressed, it toggles between the alarm message page and the alarm buffer.
9-29
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.13 Change EM Page/Buffer (function)
Usage With this function you always open the event message page first. Every time the function is triggered thereafter, it toggles between the event message page and the event buffer. Press ESC to exit the function and close the display of the event message page and the event message buffer. Key Configurable on X Tag Global
Parameters - None -
Condition This function is allowed only for function keys (Kx). In the case of touch panels, the function must be attached to a button that is globally available (e.g. in the permanent window).
Example Objective You wish to select the event message page by means of a key and, whenever the key is pressed toggle between the event message page and the event buffer. Tips on configuring Select the key which you wish to use for selecting the event message page. Assign the Change EM Page/Buffer function at "Selected functions".
Note Never use soft keys (Fx), since all the soft keys are disabled on the event page and you therefore cannot toggle between the event page and the event buffer. Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered whenever you press the key. The event message page is opened. Every time the key is pressed thereafter, it toggles between the event message page and the event buffer.
9-30
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.14 Clean Screen (function)
Constraint The Clean Screen function is available only on touch panels.
Usage When the touch screen of the TP has to be cleaned in normal operation, there is a risk of unscheduled functions being triggered. The Clean Screen function disables the touch screen for the time set. Thus cleaning of the touch screen is permitted without functions being triggered inadvertently. A bar indicating the time to go is displayed for as long as the touch screen is disabled. Key Configurable on X Tag Global
Parameters Time (secs) Permissible range of values: 10 to 300 seconds
Example Objective You want to disable the touch screen by means of a button. Tips on configuring Configure a button that you want to use as a key to disable the touch screen. Assign the Clean Screen function to the button. For the parameter, specify the period of time for which you want the touch screen to be disabled when the button is pressed. Procedure on the operating unit As soon as you touch the button, the function is triggered and the touch screen is disabled. The bar shown on the display indicates the time to go until the touch screen is enabled again.
9-31
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.15 Date and Time (function)
Usage With this function you display for a few seconds the current date and time of the operating unit. The display appears on the "OP" on a line "TP" in a window Key Configurable on X Tag Global
Parameters - None -
Example Objective You wish to display a line containing the current date and the current time by means of a key. Tips on configuring Select the key you wish to use for displaying a window containing the date and time. Assign the Date and Time function at "Selected functions". Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered whenever you press the key. The window containing the date and time is displayed and disappears again a short time later.
9-32
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.16 Date Display/Edit (function)
Usage With this function you show the current date of the OP. At this point you can also modify the date. Key Configurable on Tag X Global
Parameters - None -
Condition The tag for which the function is configured, has to be in KC (SIMATIC S5) or STRING (SIMATIC S7) format. For this, the I/O field must contain the String format.
Special feature Use the same tag for all the date fields. Only then are changes made by the operator displayed and updated in all the fields. Note The field length of the I/O field and the tag length must be at least ten for it to be possible to enter the complete date.
Example Objective You wish to view the current date and modify it, if necessary. Tips on configuring Create an input/output field having a random tag on a screen. For this tag, configure the function you selected, Date Display/Edit function. Procedure on the operating unit The date is displayed in the I/O field. If the cursor is located in the I/O field, you can modify the date.
9-33
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.17 Direct Key (function)
Constraint The Direct Key function is only available on TPs.
Usage You use this function to implement shortcuts on the TP without communicationrelated delays. Shortcuts are, for example, a condition for typewriter mode. The function has two possible uses depending on the configuration: DP direct keys DP direct keys If ProTool has been integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 and a DP area has been configured in SIMATIC STEP 7, a bit is set in the I/O area of the CPU when you click the button. Releasing the button resets the bit. Direct key module If the TP is equipped with a direct key module, actuating the button drives one of the modules ports. Key Configurable on X Tag Global
Parameters Bit number/Port number Permissible bit numbers: TP 37: 0 to 39 TP 27: 0 to 23 Permissible port numbers: TP 37: 1 to 16 TP 27: 1 to 8 Note The Direct Key function can be used only once per button. Simultaneous use of DP direct keys for the direct key module is not possible within the same project.
9-34
Release 12/02
Reference
Example: usage as DP direct keys Objective You want to set bits in the I/O area of a SIMATIC S7 directly on the TP. Requirements At the time your project is generated, ProTool is installed and integrated. During operation the Touch Panel is connected to a SIMATIC S7 via the PROFIBUS-DP. You have defined in SIMATIC STEP 7 the bit area for direct keys (refer to the "Communication Manual" for its configuration).
If all these requirements have not been fulfilled, ProTool interprets the configured button as a direct key for driving the direct key module. Tips on configuring Configure a button which you want to use as a direct key. Assign the Direct Key function to the button. Specify as the parameter the number of the bit which you require to be set when the key is pressed. Procedure on the operating unit The bit is set when the direct key is touched and reset when the key is released or when you quit the screen.
Example: usage as DP direct keys for direct key module Objective You want to drive the ports of the optional direct key module of the TP by means of a button. Requirements The TP is equipped with a direct key module and the requirements for PROFIBUS direct keys are not met. Tips on configuring Configure a button which you want to use as a direct key. Assign the Direct Key function to the button. Specify as the parameter the number of the port which you require to be set when the key is pressed. Procedure on the operating unit The port is set when the direct key is touched and reset when the key is released or when you quit the screen.
9-35
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.18 Display Alarm Messages (function)
Usage With this function you open the alarm message page or the alarm message buffer. Press ESC to exit from the function and close the alarm message page and the alarm buffer. Key Configurable on X Tag Global
Parameters Display 0 = Page 1 = Buffer Note If you are working with the software package "ProAgent for OP", please note the following: if the function Display Events or the function Display Alarms is configured outside the message screen, the operating unit will not show any reaction for a project with diagnosis capability. If necessary, therefore, remove these functions from your project.
Example Objective You wish to select the alarm message page or the alarm message buffer by means of two keys. Tips on configuring Select the key you wish to use for selecting the alarm message page. Under the function you selected, Display Alarms, set the following parameters: the constant for displaying: Page or Buffer: 0 Follow the same procedure for the second key, For the constant, use the corresponding value to display the alarm message buffer: 1. Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered whenever you press one of the keys. The constants are evaluated. The alarm message page or the alarm message buffer is opened.
9-36
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.19 Display Event Messages (function)
Usage With this function you open the event message page or the event message buffer. Key Configurable on X Tag Global
Parameters Display 0 = Page 1 = Buffer Note If you are working with the software package "ProAgent for OP", please note the following: if the function Display Events or the function Display Alarms is configured outside the message screen, the operating unit will not show any reaction for a project with diagnosis capability. If necessary, therefore, remove these functions from your project.
Example Objective You wish to select the event message page or the event message buffer by means of two keys. Tips on configuring Select the key which you wish to use for selecting the event message page. At the function you selected, Display Events, set the following parameters: Constant for opening the event message page : display: 0 Follow the same procedure for the second key, For the constant, use the corresponding value to display the event message buffer: 1. Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered whenever you press one of the keys. The constants are evaluated. The event message page or the event message buffer is opened. Press ESC to close the event message page or the event buffer.
9-37
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.20 Display Help Text (function)
Constraint The Display Help Text function is only available on touch panels.
Usage This function is used to display the Help text for the active screen. Key Configurable on X Tag Global X
Parameters - None -
Example Objective You want to call up the configured Help text for the current screen on the TP by means of a button. Tips on configuring Configure a button with which you want to call up the Help text. Assign the Display Help Text function to the button. Procedure on the operating unit The Help text is displayed on the TP as soon as you touch the button. If no Help text has been configured for the current screen, a system message to that effect is displayed.
9-38
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.21 Display Messages (function)
Usage Event messages and alarm messages are displayed when they arrive. Using parameters, you set the message type (alarm messages or event messages) you want to have displayed and the messages (page or buffer) you want to have displayed. The message page displays all the messages that are ready to be displayed. The message buffer displays all message events (message active, cleared or acknowledged). Key Configurable on X Tag Global
Parameters Message type Display 0 = Alarm messages 1 = Event messages 0 = message page 1 = message buffer 1 = toggle page <=> buffer
Example: calling via key or button Objective You want to display the active event messages or alarm messages using several keys or buttons. Tips on configuring Select a key with which you want to trigger the function. At the selected function Display Messages set the following parameters: Constant for message type: alarm messages or event messages Constant for display mode: page or buffer
Proceed in a similar manner to assign to other keys. For the touch panels, configure a button to which you assign one of the abovenamed functions. The position of the button is optional.
9-39
Reference
Release 12/02
Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered whenever you press one of the keys or buttons and the values of the constants are evaluated.
Example: calling by means of a screen (brief message screen) Objective You want to have the message page or message buffer open already when you call a specific screen. In this case the display for messages does not cover the whole of the screen. There is space at the lower border of the display to show icons for soft keys on key-operated devices or to configure buttons on touch panels. If you have called this function once on the operating unit, the window for the buffer and page become smaller than the entire screen. Tips on configuring If you attach this function to a screen, you have to configure the function by choosing "Screen" > "Attributes". Under the function you selected - in other words, Display Messages - set the following parameters: Constant for message type: alarm messages or event messages Constant for display mode: page or buffer
On the screen, configure - in the case of key-operated devices - soft keys with functions for switching from the alarm buffer to the event buffer or for exiting the screen. In the case of touch panels, the Operate Message Screen function is available to you for configuring buttons for operating and exiting the message screen. On the screen, configure buttons for operating the message screen. Procedure on the operating unit This function is triggered whenever you call up the screen. The constants are evaluated. The message display appears on the operating unit. Icons or buttons for operating purposes are still visible along the bottom border of the screen.
9-40
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.22
Usage
Dynamic Screen Selection 1 (function)
With this function you call another screen. Key Configurable on Constraint The tag must not be a CHAR type tag. Example on standard screen -NoneParameters Screen name Name of the screen to be called. X Tag X Global
Example: triggering by means of keys Objective You wish to select another screen by means of a key. Tips on configuring Select the key with which you wish to select the screen. Select the Select Screen function and define the Screen Name: parameter. Procedure on the operating unit Whenever you press the key, the function is triggered and the contents of the Screen Name: parameter are evaluated. The corresponding screen is shown on the display. Example: triggering by means of tags Objective You wish to select another screen using an input or output field. Tips on configuring Create an input/output field having a random tag on a screen. For this tag, configure the function you selected, Select Screen, and define its Screen Name: parameter. Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered as soon as the value of the input/output field is modified. The contents of the Screen Name: parameter are evaluated, and the screen is changed.
9-41
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.23 Dynamic Screen Selection 2 (function)
Usage With this function you call other screens. Specify the number of the screen you wish to be able to call up by operator input on the TP or OP or from the PLC. Key Configurable on X Tag X Global
Parameters Screen number Tag of the INTEGER type
Example: triggering by means of keys Objective You want to select a different screen by means of a key (function key or button). Specify the screen you wish to change to by means of its screen number. Tips on configuring 1. 2. 3. 4. Select the key with which you wish to select the screen. Assign the function Dynamic Screen Selection 2 to the key. For the parameter, specify the tag to which the screen number is to be written. You have to configure an input field before you can enter a screen number in a screen. Assign the tag for the screen number to the input field. To allow the operator to call a situation-dependent screen, you can also write the screen number to the tag from the PLC. In this instance, the tag must be connected to the PLC.
Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered as soon as the key is pressed and the corresponding screen is displayed on the operating unit.
9-42
Release 12/02
Reference
Example: triggering by means of tags Objective You wish to select another screen by means of an input field. Tips on configuring Create an input field with a random tag on a screen. For this tag, configure the function you selected - in other words, Dynamic Screen Selection 2. In this instance, do not specify any function parameters. Procedure on the operating unit As soon as the operator has entered the screen number and confirmed the entry pressing ENTER, the screen concerned is activated.
9-43
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.24 Events - Delete Buffer (function)
Usage With this function you delete the event messages from the buffer. Messages that are still queued are not deleted. Key Configurable on X Tag X Global X
Parameters - None -
Example: triggering by means of keys Objective You wish to delete the event buffer by means of a key. Tips on configuring Select the key which you wish to use for deleting the event buffer. Assign the Events - Delete Buffer function at "Selected Functions". Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered whenever you press the key. The event buffer is deleted
Example: triggering by means of tags Objective You wish to delete the event buffer by means of an input or output field on the screen. Tips on configuring Create an input/output field having a random tag on a screen. For this tag, configure the function you selected, Events - Delete Buffer. Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered as soon as the value of the input/output field is modified. The event buffer is deleted
9-44
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.25 Event Window (function)
Usage With this function you open and hide the event window. Key Configurable on X Tag X Global
Parameters ON/OFF 0 = Hide 1 = Display 1 = Toggle (OFF ON)
Example: triggering by means of keys Objective You wish to open and hide the event window by means of two keys. Tips on configuring Select the key with which you wish to open the event window. Select the Event Window function and define the following parameters: the constant for opening the event window: ON/OFF: 1 Follow the same procedure for the second key, For the constant, use the corresponding value for hiding the event window, i.e. 0. Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered and the value of the constant is evaluated whenever either of the keys is pressed. The event window is opened or hidden accordingly. Special feature You can use a toggle function. In this instance, you open and hide the event window by means of a single key. You configure in the manner described above, the only difference being that you define just one key. Specify 1 as the value for the constant. If you press the key, the function is triggered, and the event window is enabled. If you press the key a second time, the event window is disabled, and so on.
9-45
Reference
Release 12/02
Example: triggering by means of tags Objective You wish to open and hide the event window by means of an input and an output field. Tips on configuring Create an input/output field having a random tag on a screen. For this tag, configure the function you selected, Event Window, to which the following parameter applies: the constant for opening the event window: ON/OFF: 1 Procedure on the operating unit Whenever the value in the input or output field is modified, the function is triggered and the value of the constant is evaluated. The event window is opened or hidden. Special feature You can also open and hide the event window by means of two input or output fields, which may even be located on different screens. To do this, configure two input or output fields. For the constant, specify 1 as the value on the first occasion and 0 as the value on the other occasion. As soon as the values in the input or output field are modified, the function is triggered, and the event window is opened or hidden accordingly. To trigger the function from the PLC, proceed as follows: Procedure: 1 2 3 Configure a PLC tag and set "Read Continuously" for it. Define the Event Window function for this tag. On the "Functions" tab, select "Value Output" as the condition at "Events".
The function is triggered whenever the value is modified by the PLC.
9-46
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.26 Graphics Mode for Print Screen List (function)
Usage This function is used to output, in Graphics mode, a screen that you want to print using the function Print Screen List. This means that you can also see, for example, the current trends or bar graphs being displayed at the time of printing. Key Configurable on Tag Screen X
Parameters - None -
Example Objective You want to print a screen, which is output when the screen list is being printed, automatically in graphics mode. Tips on configuring Select a screen and choose "Edit" > "Properties" from the menu and Graphics Mode for Print Screen List at "Functions". You do not have to specify a parameter. Procedure on the operating unit If the Graphics Mode for Print Screen List function is configured for a screen and this is to be output when the screen list is being printed, the screen is automatically printed in graphics mode Note Compared to an ASCII printout, printing in graphics mode is noticeably slower.
9-47
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.27 Initialize Bit in Startup (function)
Usage With this function you assign a specific status to a tag when the operating unit starts up. Key Configurable on Tag X Global
The tag for which the function has been configured must be in BOOL format. With the SIMATIC S5, therefore, the tag can only be an internal tag.
Parameters Status after System Startup 0 = FALSE, reset 1 = TRUE, set
Example Objective You wish to set a tag to a specific state when the operating unit starts up (for example, you wish to define in the PLC that the operating unit has started up). Tips on configuring Create a random tag. For this tag, configure the function you selected, Initialize Bit in Startup, to which the following parameter applies: Constant: Status after System Startup: 1 Proceed in a similar manner if you specifically wish to reset a tag in the operating unit. Appropriately, use 0 as the value for the constant. Procedure on the operating unit The operating unit starts up. The function is triggered, and the value of the constant is evaluated at the same time. The tag is set or reset.
9-48
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.28 Language (function)
Usage This function is used to change the language on the operating unit. This means that system text and all items of configured text are displayed in the new language that you have selected. You create your project in various languages. However, only three languages can be downloaded to the operating unit. You define these languages by choosing "System" > "Language Assignment". The operating unit detects how many languages have been downloaded and assigns the languages numbers from 0 to 2 in the order that they were configured. This number will be used again when you configure the function. Key Configurable on X Tag X Global
Parameters INTEGER tag for displaying Language (Field) Constant for Language (Key) with 0 = Language 1 1 = Language 2 2 = Language 3 1 = Toggle (Language 1 > 2 > 3 > ...)
Example: triggering by means of keys Objective You wish to toggle between three languages A, B and C by means of three keys. You wish to be able to see on the screen which language has been set. Tips on configuring Select the key with which you wish to set language A. Select the Language function and define the following parameters: a constant which is to apply to language A: Language (Key): 0 and a tag: Language (Field).
Proceed in a similar manner for the other two keys. For the constant, use 1 or 2 as the value, in line with the language. For the tag, always use the same tag.
9-49
Reference
Release 12/02
So that you can recognize the selected language on the screen, configure a symbolic output field to which the tag that you configured above is assigned. Also, create a text list and assign the values 0 to 2 to the languages A, B, and C. Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered whenever you press on one of the keys. The constant is evaluated and the corresponding language is set on the OP. The value of the constant is transferred to the tag, and the output field is updated. Special feature You can use a kind of toggle function. In this case, you use one key to switch between the languages downloaded to the operating unit. You configure in the manner described above, the only difference being that you define just one key. Specify 1 as the value for the constant. If you press the key, the function is triggered, and you toggle between the languages: language 1 > language 2 > language 3 > language 1. Note If you trigger the function by means of a key and have configured a symbolic output field to display the language and later modify operating unit languages with regard to their order, their number or their composition, remember to update your text list as well.
Example: triggering by means of tags Objective You wish to toggle between three languages - A, B and C - by means of a symbolic I/O field on the screen. Tips on configuring Create a symbolic input/output field with a tag on a screen. For this tag, configure the function you selected, Language, to which the following parameter applies: Tag: Language (Field): Use the same tag for the I/O field and for the function. The value 0 is entered for the constant Language (Key): by ProTool. This value is not evaluated, however, the function is configured via the variable. Also, create a text list and assign the values 0 to 2 to the languages A, B, and C. Procedure on the operating unit The language you selected is displayed in the symbolic I/O field. Using the list box, select another language. The function is triggered. The value of the tag is evaluated, and the corresponding language is set on the operating unit. The I/O field is updated.
9-50
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.29 Message Filters (function)
Usage If the alarm message screen or the event message page are open on the operating unit, message display can be filtered using this function. With the filter you can set the messages you want to have displayed. You can set whether only messages of a certain priority or acknowledgment group should be displayed or only diagnostic messages should be displayed. Key Configurable on X Tag X Global
Parameters Filter 0 = Filter off 1 = Filter on 1 = toggle ON OFF Priority Acknowledgement group Diagnostic messages Status 0 = Display all priorities 1 to 16 = Lowest priority still displayed 0 = Display all acknowledgement groups 1 ... 16 = Display only messages of this group 0 = Display all messages 1 = Display only diagnostic messages Assignment of bits to tag: 1. Bit = Priority (1 = filter enabled) 2. Bit = Acknowledgement group (1 = filter enabled) 3. Bit = Diagnostic messages (1 = filter enabled)
9-51
Reference
Release 12/02
Typical bit assignment for SIMATIC S5 and S7:
Note If you have enabled the filter for diagnostic messages, the filter settings do not apply to the priority and the acknowledgment group.
Example: triggering by means of keys Objective You want to use several keys to filter the messages displayed on the message screen or page according to certain criteria. This means that only the messages of immediate interest to you are displayed. For example, you want to display only high-priority messages or only the messages in a particular acknowledgment group. Tips on configuring 1. 2. 3. Select the key with which you wish to enable the filter. Under the function you selected - in other words, Message Filters - set the following parameters: a constant for enabling the filter: Filter: 1 and a constant for determining the priority: Priority 10 and leave the constants for acknowledgement group and diagnostic messages at 0. a random internal tag (- no PLC - ): Status. Follow the same procedure for the other keys. Leave the priority for the constants at 0, for example, and specify 1 for the acknowledgment group. For the tag, always use the same tag. So that you can recognize the current filter on the screen, configure a symbolic output field to which the tag that you configured above is assigned.
4.
9-52
Release 12/02
Reference
5.
Create a text list whose values 0 - 4 display the different enabled filters. Example of a text list: 0 1 2 3 4 = = = = = OFF Priority Acknowledgement group Priority and acknowledgement group Diagnostic messages
Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered whenever you press on one of the keys. The constant is evaluated and the corresponding filter is enabled. In the aforementioned example, all messages starting from the priority 10 are displayed when the message screen or page is called. The corresponding bit for the filter is set in the tag and the output field is updated.
Example: triggering by means of tags Objective You want to enable the filter for displaying messages on the message screen or page by means of a symbolic input/output field. Tips on configuring 1. 2. 3. Create a symbolic I/O field having a random internal tag on a screen. For this tag,configure the Filter Messages function which you selected and to which the following parameters apply: a constant for enabling the filter: Filter: 1 and a constant for determining the priority: Priority 10 and leave the constants for acknowledgement group and diagnostic messages at 0. the tag is not evaluated. Create for the internal tag a text list whose values 0 - 4 display the different enabled filters. Example of a text list: 0 1 2 3 4 = = = = = OFF Priority Acknowledgement group Priority and acknowledgement group Diagnostic messages
Procedure on the operating unit The current filter status is displayed in the symbolic input/output field. Select another filter setting from the list box. The function is triggered. The tag value is evaluated and the input/output field is updated. In the aforementioned example, all messages starting from the priority 10 are displayed when the message screen or page is called.
9-53
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.30 Message Log ON/OFF (function)
Usage With this function you enable and disable the automatic printout of messages. Messages having the Print attribute are printed whenever their status is modified (active, cleared or acknowledged). Key Configurable on X Tag Global
Parameters ON/OFF (key) 0 = disable printing 1 = enable printing 1 = toggle ON <=> OFF ON/OFF (field) Tag of the BOOL type: 0 = Disable printing 1 = Enable printing
Special feature You can use a toggle function. In this instance, you enable and disable the message log by means of a single key. You configure in the manner described above, the only difference being that you define just one key. Specify 1 as the value for the constant. If you press the key, the function is triggered, and the message log is enabled. If you press the key a second time, the message log is disabled.
9-54
Release 12/02
Reference
Example Objective You wish to enable and disable the message log by means of two keys. Tips on configuring Select the key you wish to use for enabling the message log. Select the Message Log ON/OFF function and define the following parameters: A constant for enabling the message log: ON/OFF (Key): 1 and A tag: ON/OFF (Field).
Follow the same procedure for the second key, For the constant, use the value 0 to disable. For the tag, always use the same tag. So that you can recognize on the screen whether the message log has been enabled or disabled, configure a symbolic output field to which the tag you configured above is assigned. Also, create a text list and assign the values 0 and 1 to the corresponding conditions OFF and ON. Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered whenever you press on one of the keys. The constant is evaluated, and the message log is enabled or disabled accordingly. The value of the constant is transferred to the tag, and the output field is updated.
9-55
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.31 Mode (function)
Usage This function is used to change mode on the operating unit. There are five operating modes: Online, Offline, Serial Download, Loop-Through Connection and MPI Download. Key Configurable on X Tag X Global X
Parameters Operating mode (field) Operating mode (key) Tag of the INTEGER type 0 = Online 1 = Offline 2 = Serial download 3 = Loop-through operation 5 = MPI download Note Use only local tags not connected to the PLC for the input/output field tag. Since modes are changed immediately upon input, possibly without transferring the tag to the PLC, the old value is read from the PLC upon restarting after a change of modes.
Example: triggering by means of keys Objective You wish to set one of the four operating modes - Online, Offline, Serial Download or Loop-Through Connection - by means of one of four keys. You wish to be able to see on the screen which operating mode has been set. Tips on configuring Select the key you wish to use for setting the first operating mode. Select the Mode function and define the following parameters: a constant that applies to Online operating mode: Operating Mode (Key): 0 and a random internal tag (- No PLC -): Mode (Field).
9-56
Release 12/02
Reference
Proceed in a similar manner for the other three keys. For the constant, use the value 1, 2 or 3 corresponding to the modes. For the tag, always use the same tag. So that you can recognize the selected operating mode on the screen, configure a symbolic output field to which the tag that you configured above is assigned. Further, create a text list to whose values 0 to 3 the Online, Offline, Serial Download and Loop-Through Connection operating modes are assigned. Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered whenever you press on one of the keys. The constant is evaluated, and the corresponding operating mode is set on the operating unit. The value of the constant is transferred to the tag, and the output field is updated.
Example: triggering by means of tags Objective You wish to change from one of the four operating modes to another one by means of a symbolic I/O field on the screen. Tips on configuring Create a symbolic I/O field having a random internal tag on a screen. For this tag, configure the function you selected, Mode, to which the following parameter applies: Internal tag: Mode (Field): Specify for the function the same tag for which you are configuring the function. Example: You are configuring the MODE tag. You are defining the Mode function for this tag. The parameter of this function you select for Mode (Field) is the same tag: MODE. 0 is entered as the value by ProTool for the constant Mode (key):. This value is not evaluated, however, the function is configured via the variable. Further, create a text list to whose values 0 to 3 the Online, Offline, Serial Download and Loop-Through Connection operating modes are assigned. Procedure on the operating unit The operating mode you selected is displayed in the symbolic I/O field. Select another operating mode from the list box. The function is triggered. The value of the tag is evaluated, and the corresponding operating mode is set on the operating unit. The I/O field is updated.
9-57
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.32 Operate Message Screen (function)
Constraint The Operate Message Screen function is only available on touch panels.
Usage This function allows you to operate the message screen. Configure this function on different buttons with different parameters to scroll on the message screen, change to the message buffer or exit the message screen. Note You must have configured the short message page (attach the Display Messages function
Tag
Global
Parameters Operation 1 = Cursor one message up 2 = Cursor one message down 3 = Dynamically open message help 4 = Toggle (page buffer) 5 = Exit message screen
9-58
Release 12/02
Reference
Example Objective You want to switch to message buffer view once the message screen has been opened or leave the message screen. Tips on configuring Select a screen and, at "Edit" > "Properties", assign the Display Messages function. The messages are then showed in a window that is shorter than the display. There is space along the lower border of the display for buttons. At the bottom border of the screen, configure a button e. g. labeled "Browse" and assign it this function with parameter 2. Configure another button labeled "Buffer" parameter 4. Use a third button to exit the message screen and go to the previously opened screen (parameter 5). Procedure on the operating unit Open the message screen. Touch the buttons that you configured.
9-59
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.33 Print Messages (function)
Usage With this function you print all alarm messages or all event messages on the printer. Key Configurable on X Tag X Global
Parameters Message type 0 = Print alarm messages 1 = Print event messages Note If you wish to print both event messages and alarm messages, you have to call the function twice with a different parameter.
Example: Objective You want to print all event messages by means of a key. Tips on configuring Configure the Print Messages function with the parameter Message Type=1 on the key concerned. Procedure on the operating unit All the event messages stored in the message archive are printed on the attached printer as soon as you press the key on the operating unit.
9-60
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.34 Print Messages with Filter 1 (function)
Usage With this function you print a filtered selection of alarm messages or event messages. You can link the filter criteria to tags and thus modify them online on the operating unit. Key Configurable on X Tag X Global
Parameters Message type Priority Status 0 = Print alarm messages 1 = Print event messages 1 to 16 = Lowest priority still displayed 0 = Print all messages 1 = Print only active messages 2 = Print only cleared messages 3 = Print only acknowledged messages (for alarm messages) 4 = Print active and cleared messages 5 = Print active and acknowledged messages 6 = Print cleared and acknowledged messages Text No characters or spaces = print all messages Any text without spaces = print only messages containing this text Date The date format must correspond to the conventions specified at "System" > "Settings": no characters or spaces = print all messages any date = print only messages with this date Acknowledgement group Note Only messages that pass through all set filters are printed. 0 = Display all acknowledgement groups 1 ... 16 = Display only messages of this group
9-61
Reference
Release 12/02
Example Objective You want to print, by means of a key, the alarm messages that the user has selected on a list: active messages, cleared messages or acknowledged messages. Tips on configuring Create an input/output field with the Text display mode. For the tag, use the tag which you will later want to control message printing. On the key required to trigger printing, configure the Print Messages With Filter 1 function. Select the following parameters: Message type = 0 Priority = Tag with value 1 Text = Tag with a space Date = Tag with a space Acknowledgement group = Tag with value 0 Select the same tag for the status parameter as you selected for the input/output field you configured previously. Procedure on the operating unit The operator selects the entry "acknowledged messages", for example, on the text list and then clicks the configured key. All the acknowledged alarm messages contained in the message archive are then printed on the attached printer.
9-62
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.35 Print Messages with Filter 2 (function)
Usage With this function you output a filtered selection of alarm messages or event messages. You can choose between: the printer attached to the operating unit to a file (not possible on OP 25, OP 27, or TPs) Key Configurable on X Tag X Global
Parameters Message type Priority Status 0 = Print alarm messages 1 = Print event messages 1 to 16 = Lowest priority still displayed 0 = Print all messages 1 = Print only active messages 2 = Print only cleared messages 3 = Print only acknowledged messages (for alarm messages) 4 = Print active and cleared messages 5 = Print active and acknowledged messages 6 = Print cleared and acknowledged messages Text No characters or spaces = print all messages Any text without spaces = print only messages containing this text Date The date format must correspond to the conventions specified at "System" > "Settings": no characters or spaces = print all messages any date = print only messages with this date Acknowledgement group Output medium 0 = Display all acknowledgement groups 1 ... 16 = Display only messages of this group 0 = Printer 1 = Disk (not OP 25, OP 27, or TPs)
9-63
Reference
Release 12/02
File name File extension
File name for output to disk, maximum of eight characters permitted. Start value of 0 to 999 Each time the function is triggered, the operating unit increments the file extension by one.
Separator
Any separator to separate the columns for output to a file.
Note Only messages that pass through all the set filters are printed or written to a file.
Example Objective You want to write certain groups of alarm messages by means of a key to a file on a floppy disk. You want the different entries to be separated by semicolons. The file name you wish to use is ERROR. You want the operator to be able to choose from a list whether active messages, cleared messages or acknowledged messages are output. Tips on configuring Create an input/output field with the Text display mode. For the tag, use the tag which you will later want to control message printing. On the key required to trigger printing, configure the Print Messages With Filter 2 function. Select the following parameters: Message type = 0 Priority = Tag having the value 1 Text = Tag having a space Date = Tag having a space Acknowledgement group = Tag having the value 0 Output medium = Tag having the value 1 File name = Tag having the value ERROR File extension = Tag having the value 001 Separator = ; Select the same tag for the status parameter as you selected for the input/output field you configured previously. Procedure on the operating unit The operator selects the entry "acknowledged messages", for example, on the text list and then clicks the configured key. All the acknowledged alarm messages contained in the message archive are then written to the ERROR.001 file. If the key is pressed later, output is sent to the ERROR.002 file, etc.
9-64
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.36 Print Screen List (function)
Usage With this function you print a screen list which you have set for your configuration. Key Configurable on X Tag X Global
Parameters Page1 > Screen number ... Page20 > Screen number 1 to x = Screen number -1 = Unassigned
Example: triggering by means of keys Objective You want to use a key to print a screen list comprising three screens. Tips on configuring Select the key with which you wish to initiate printing of the screen list. Select the Print Screen List function and define the following parameters: Page 1 Screen number: screen number Page 2 Screen number: screen number Page 3 Screen number: screen number
All the other constants have a default value of 1. Do not modify these values. Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered whenever you press on the key, and the parameters are evaluated. The corresponding screens are then printed.
9-65
Reference
Release 12/02
Example: triggering by means of tags Objective You want to use an input/output field to print a screen list comprising five screens. Tips on configuring Create an input/output field having a random tag on a screen. For this tag, configure the function you selected, Print Screen List, and set the following parameters: Page 1 Screen number: screen number Page 2 Screen number: screen number Page 3 Screen number: screen number Page 4 Screen number: screen number Page 5 Screen number: screen number
All the other constants have a default value of 1. Do not modify these values. Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered as soon as the value of the input/output field is modified and the parameters are evaluated. The corresponding screens are then printed.
9-66
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.37 PROFIBUS Screen Number (function)
Constraint The PROFIBUS Screen Number function is only available on TPs.
Usage If DP direct keys use identical bits for different functions on different screens, the S7 has to differentiate between the functions concerned by means of the screen number. To avoid delayed updating of the screen number on the PLC following a change of screens, there is the PROFIBUS Screen Number screen function. Since the screen number in the screen number area is updated via the standard clock pulse following a change of screens but the bits have to be set immediately in the I/O area of the PLC, the assignment of control bit and screen number is not always clear. Using the PROFIBUS Screen Number function, you can set random bits within the bit area for direct keys for identification of the screen and simultaneously transfer them with the direct key bits to the PLC. This means that a clear assignment between control bit and screen number is ensured at all times. Depending on the mapping of the bits, different numbers of shortcut functions are available to you: TP 37: for example 400 (20 screens each with 20 direct keys) or 256 (8 screens each with 32 direct keys) TP 27: for example 144 (12 screens each with 12 direct keys) or 80 (4 screens each with 20 direct keys) Key Configurable on Tag Screen X
Parameters Bit number Permissible bit numbers: TP 27-10/TP 37: 0 to 39 TP 27-6: 0 to 23
9-67
Reference
Release 12/02
Example Objective You are using PROFIBUS direct keys in your configuration and want to use the same bit on several screens for different tasks. Tips on configuring Choose "Screen" > "Attributes" and assign the PROFIBUS Screen Number function to the screen. For the parameter, specify a PROFIBUS bit that you want to have reserved for the screen number and have set when the key is pressed. If you assign the PROFIBUS Screen Number function several times to the screen, you can define a random bit pattern for the screen number. Procedure on the operating unit The bits are set when the screen is opened and reset when you quit the screen.
9-68
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.38 Reset Bit (function)
Usage With this function you reset a tag. This function is not available on the SIMATIC S5. Key Configurable on X Tag X Global X
Parameters Bit Tag of the BOOL type
Special feature With this function you require a separate function key for every tag that you wish to reset. Depending on the key that you press, the corresponding tag is reset. To reset different BOOL tags with one key, there is the function Reset BOOL Tags.
Note Do not use a local tag or else the function will not be executed.
Example Objective You wish to reset a tag by means of a key. Tips on configuring Select the key you wish to use for resetting a tag. Select the Reset Bit function and define the following parameters: the PLC tag: Bit: Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered whenever you press the key. When you do so, the tag is reset.
9-69
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.39 Reset Bit in Word (function)
Usage With this function you reset a bit in the word of a tag. The tag is transferred to the PLC. Key Configurable on X Tag X Global X
Parameters Word Bit Tag of the INTEGER type Bit number 0 ... 15
Conditions The value of the tag must not be modified by the PLC. When using the Reset Bit in Word function, the bits must not be modified by the PLC or an operator input. This means that Read Continuously must not be specified for the tag, either. Avoid using the Reset Bit in Word function with PLCs which support BOOL tags for example, SIMATIC S7. Instead, use the Reset Bit function for BOOL tags.
Example Objective You wish to reset a bit in the word of a tag by means of a key. The tag will then be transferred to the PLC. Tips on configuring Select the key you wish to use for resetting a bit in the word of a tag. Select the Reset Bit in Word function and define the following parameters: a PLC tag that applies to the word: Word: a constant that applies to the bit: Bit:
9-70
Release 12/02
Reference
Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered whenever you press on the key, and the parameters are evaluated. The corresponding bit is then reset in the word of the tag, and the tag is transferred to the PLC.
9-71
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.40 Reset BOOL Tag (function)
Constraint This function is not available on TPs.
Usage With this function you reset a BOOL tag. To do so, the cursor must be located in an input field for which this BOOL tag was configured. Key Configurable on X Tag Global
Parameters - None -
Condition The tag for which the function has been configured must be in BOOL format. With the SIMATIC S5, therefore, the tag can only be an internal tag.
Special feature Use this function to reset different BOOL tags with a key. To do this, configure several input fields, to which you assign BOOL tags. The position of the cursor will determine which BOOL tags are reset when the key is operated. If you require a separate function key for every bit that has to be reset, there is the function Reset Bit.
9-72
Release 12/02
Reference
Example Objective You wish to set a BOOL tag by means of a key. Tips on configuring Configure an input field, to which you assign a BOOL tag. Select the key you wish to use to reset a BOOL tag. Assign the Reset BOOL Tag function at the "Selected functions". Procedure on the operating unit Whenever the key is pressed and the cursor is located in the input field, the function is triggered. The BOOL tag is then reset.
9-73
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.41 Scaling Linear 1 (function)
Usage With this function values are scaled linearly. Scaling Linear 1 is the inverse function of Scaling Linear 2. Values from the PLC are scaled prior to being displayed on the operating unit. Inputs on the operating unit are scaled prior to the values being transferred to the PLC. The formula for scaling is: Y = a * X + b Y is the read PLC value. Key Configurable on Tag X Global -
Parameters A B Multiplication factor (constant) Constant to be added
The maximum accuracy of calculation is 8 digits, since FLOAT values are used for calculation internally.
Example Objective You wish to scale a value from the PLC by linear conversion before it is displayed on the operating unit, or you wish to scale an input on the operating unit before it is transferred to the PLC. Tips on configuring Create an input/output field having a random tag on a screen. For this tag, configure the function you selected, Scaling Linear 1, to which the following parameters apply: constant for the slope: a
9-74
Release 12/02
Reference
constant for the offset: b
Procedure on the operating unit A value Y is transferred from the PLC. The tag is updated and the scaling function activated. The converted value is displayed in the input/output field as the value X. If the operator enters a value X on the operating unit, the function is activated. The value is scaled and subsequently transferred to the PLC as the value Y. Example: You have configured a value of 3 for the slope a, and a value of 3 for the offset b. The value 21 is transferred from the PLC. It is included in the scaling function: 21 = 3 * X + 6. This results in 5 being the value for X. This is the value displayed on the operating unit.
9-75
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.42 Scaling Linear 2 (function)
Usage With this function values are scaled linearly. Scaling Linear 2 is the inverse function of Scaling Linear 1. Values from the PLC are scaled prior to being displayed on the operating unit. Inputs on the operating unit are scaled prior to the values being transferred to the PLC. The formula for scaling is: Y = a * X + b Y is the display value on the operating unit. Key Configurable on Tag X Global
Parameters a b Multiplication factor (constant) Constant to be added.
The maximum accuracy of calculation is 8 digits, since FLOAT values are used for calculation internally.
Example Objective You wish to scale a value from the PLC by linear conversion before it is displayed on the operating unit, or you wish to scale an input on the operating unit before it is transferred to the PLC. Tips on configuring Create an input/output field having a random tag on a screen. For this tag, configure the function you selected, Scaling Linear 2, to which the following parameters apply: constant for the slope: a constant for the offset: b
9-76
Release 12/02
Reference
Procedure on the operating unit A value X is transferred from the PLC. The tag is updated and the scaling function activated. The scaled value is displayed in the input/output field as the value Y. If the operator enters a value Y on the operating unit, the function is activated. The value is converted and subsequently transferred to the PLC as the value X. Example: You have configured a value of 3 for the slope a, and a value of 3 for the offset b. The value 21 is transferred from the PLC. It is included in the scaling function: Y = 3 * X 21 + 6. This results in 69 being the value for Y. This is the value displayed on the operating unit.
9-77
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.43 Scaling Square 1 (function)
Usage With this function values are scaled quadratically. Scaling Square 1 is the inverse function of Scaling Square 2. Values from the PLC are scaled prior to being displayed on the operating unit. Inputs on the operating unit are scaled prior to the values being transferred to the PLC. The formula for scaling is: Y = a * X^2 + b * X + c Key Configurable on Tag X Global
Parameters a b c Constant for the slope Constant for the slope Constant for the offset
Example Objective You wish to scale a value from the PLC by square conversion before it is displayed on the operating unit, or you wish to scale an input on the operating unit before it is transferred to the PLC. Tips on configuring Create an input/output field having a random tag on a screen. For this tag, configure the function you selected, Scaling Square 1, to which the following parameters apply: constant for the slope: a constant for the slope: b constant for the offset: c
Procedure on the operating unit A value Y is transferred from the PLC. The tag is updated and the scaling function activated. The converted value is displayed in the input/output field as the value X.
9-78
Release 12/02
Reference
If the operator enters a value X on the operating unit, the function is activated. The value is scaled and subsequently transferred to the PLC as the value Y. Example: You have configured a value of 2 for slope a, 3 for slope b and 6 for the offset c. A value of 71 is transferred from the PLC. They are included in the scaling function: 71 = 2 * X^2 + 3 * X + 6. This results in 5 being the value for X. This is the value displayed on the OP.
9-79
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.44 Scaling Square 2 (function)
Usage With this function values are scaled quadratically. Scaling Square 2 is the inverse function of Scaling Square 1 Values from the PLC are scaled prior to being displayed on the operating unit. Inputs on the operating unit are scaled prior to the values being transferred to the PLC. The formula for scaling is: Y = a * X^2 + b * X + c. Key Configurable on Tag X Global
Parameters a b c Constant for the slope Constant for the slope Constant for the offset
Example Objective You wish to scale a value from the PLC by square conversion before it is displayed on the operating unit, or you wish to scale an input on the operating unit before it is transferred to the PLC. Tips on configuring Create an input/output field having a random tag on a screen. For this tag, configure the function you selected, Scaling Square 2, to which the following parameters apply: constant for the slope: a constant for the slope: b constant for the offset: c
Procedure on the operating unit A value X is transferred from the PLC. The tag is updated and the scaling function activated. The scaled value is displayed in the input/output field as the value Y.
9-80
Release 12/02
Reference
If the operator enters a value Y on the operating unit, the function is activated. The value is converted and subsequently transferred to the PLC as the value X. Example: You have configured a value of 2 for slope a, a value of 2 for slope b, and a value of 6 for the offset c. A value of 71 is transferred from the PLC. They are included in the scaling function: Y = 2 * 71^2 + 3 * 71 + 6. This results in 10301 being the value for Y. This is the value displayed on the operating unit.
9-81
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.45 Scroll DOWN (function)
Usage This function is used to scroll down one page in the following displays: Message page Message buffer Text lists Password list
This function scrolls one page at a time instead of one line at a time using the cursor. Key Configurable on X Tag Global
Parameters - None -
Example Tips on configuring Assign the function to a key (function key, soft key or button). Procedure on the operating unit The display scrolls one page down when the key is pressed.
9-82
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.46 Scroll UP (function)
Usage This function is used to scroll up one page in the following displays: Message page Message buffer Text lists Password list Data record list box Data record editing window
This function scrolls one page at a time instead of one line at a time using the cursor. Key Configurable on X Tag Global
Parameters - None -
Example Tips on configuring Assign the function to a key (function key, soft key or button). Procedure on the operating unit The display scrolls one page up when the key is pressed.
9-83
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.47 Select Previous Screen (function)
Usage You use this function to return to the previous screen. Key Configurable on X Tag Global
Parameters - None -
Special features Take note of the following notes to ensure that the Select Previous Screen function Use the function only for screens which do not switch to other screens. Do not use the function for screens which are called simultaneously by means of the PLC job Select Screen.
Example Objective You wish to return to the screen called previously by means of a key. Tips on configuring Assign the function to a key or button. Procedure on the operating unit The previous screen is re-selected when you press the key.
9-84
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.48 Select Screen (function)
Usage With this function you call another screen. Key Configurable on X Tag X Global
Parameters Screen name Name of the screen to be called.
Example: triggering by means of keys Objective You wish to select another screen by means of a key. Tips on configuring Select the key with which you wish to select the screen. Select the Select Screen function and define the Screen Name: parameter. Procedure on the operating unit Whenever you press the key, the function is triggered and the contents of the Screen Name: parameter are evaluated. The corresponding screen is shown on the display.
Example: triggering by means of tags Objective You wish to select another screen using an input or output field. Tips on configuring Create an input/output field having a random tag on a screen. For this tag, configure the function you selected, Select Screen, and define its Screen Name: parameter. Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered as soon as the value of the input/output field is modified. The contents of the Screen Name: parameter are evaluated, and the screen is changed.
9-85
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.49 Set Bit (function)
Usage With this function you set a tag. This function is not available on the SIMATIC S5. Key Configurable on X Tag X Global X
Parameters Bit Tag of the BOOL type
Special feature With this function you require a separate function key for every tag that you wish to set. Depending on the key that you press, the corresponding tag is set. To reset different BOOL tags with one key, there is the function Set BOOL Tag.
Note Do not use a local tag or else the function will not be executed. Example Objective You wish to set a tag by means of a key. Tips on configuring Select the key you wish to use for setting a tag. Select the Set Bit function and define the following parameters: the PLC tag: Bit: Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered whenever you press the key. When you do so, the tag is set.
9-86
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.50 Set Bit in Word (function)
Usage With this function you set a bit in the word of a tag. The tag is transferred to the PLC. Key Configurable on X Tag X Global X
Conditions The value of the tag must not be modified by the PLC. When using the Set Bit in Word function, the bits must not be modified by the PLC or an operator input. This means that Read Continuously must not be specified for the tag, either. When the function Set Bit In Word is used, the tag must not be displayed on the same screen under any circumstances whatsoever. Avoid using the Set Bit in Word function with PLCs which support BOOL tags for example, SIMATIC S7. Instead, use the Set Bit function for BOOL tags.
Note Whenever possible, use bit processing functions that have a bit tag as a parameter.
9-87
Reference
Release 12/02
Example Objective You wish to set a bit in a word of a tag by means of a key. The tag will then be transferred to the PLC. Tips on configuring Select the key you wish to use for setting a bit in a word of a tag. Select the Set Bit in Word function and define the following parameters: a PLC tag that applies to the word: Word: a constant that applies to the bit: Bit:
Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered whenever you press on the key, and the parameters are evaluated. The corresponding bit is then set in the word of the tag, and the tag is transferred to the PLC.
9-88
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.51 Set Bit When Key Is Pressed (function)
Usage With this function you set a bit in the word of a tag. The bit remains set until the key is released. Note Should you wish to configure the functions Set Bit when Key is Pressed or Alarms - Delete Buffer on a key or button, for example, the Alarms - Delete Buffer function should be initiated for the execute condition Release Key (default settings: Press Key) in order to ensure that the bit set by the Set Bit When Key Is Pressed is reset when the key is released. If the Alarms - Delete Buffer function is initiated for the execute condition Press Key, the bit is not reset and the function is not executed (system message: "Cannot execute function").
Condition The value of the tag must not be modified by the PLC. Key Configurable on X Tag Global
Parameters Word Bit Tag Bit number 0 ... 15
9-89
Reference
Release 12/02
Special features When using the Set Bit When Key Is Pressed function, the bits must not be modified by the PLC or an operator input. This means that Read Continuously must not be specified for the tag, either. When the function Set Bit When Key Is Pressed is used, under no circumstances must the tag be used on the same screen. If you have also configured the Select Screen PLC job, it might occur just when the key having the Set Bit When Key Is Pressed function is pressed on the operating unit In this case the set bit cannot be reset when the key is released since the key assignment cannot be modified after the screen has been changed. Configure, therefore, the Reset Bit function for the screen with the Leave Screen execution condition. This means that the bit is reset when you leave the screen. Avoid using the Set Bit When Key Is Pressed function with PLCs which support BOOL tags for example, SIMATIC S7. Instead, use the two functions Set Bit with the execute condition Press Key and Reset Bit with the execute condition Release Key.
Bit processing on the SIMATIC S7 You should preferably use the bit-processing functions that have a bit tag as a parameter - for example, "Set Bit" or "Reset Bit". If possible, do not use bitprocessing functions that have a word tag as a parameter, such as "Set Bit When Key Is Pressed" or "Set Bit In Word". If you have to use a bit-processing function with a word tag as a parameter because, say, the PLC does not support bit tags, the word tag must not be read simultaneously. You can prevent this as follows: The same tag must not be displayed on the same screen. The tag must not have the attribute "Read continuously".
Example Objective You wish to set a bit in a word of a tag by means of one key for such time until you release the key. Tips on configuring Select the key you wish to use for setting a bit in a word of a tag. Select the Set Bit When Key Is Pressed function and define the following parameters: a PLC tag that applies to the word: Word: a constant that applies to the bit: Bit:
Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered whenever you press on the key, and the parameters are evaluated. The corresponding bit is then set in the word of the tag, and the tag is transferred to the PLC. The bit remains set until the key is released.
9-90
Release 12/02
Reference
9-91
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.52 Set BOOL Tag (function)
Constraint This function is not available on TPs.
Usage With this function you set a BOOL tag. To do so, the cursor must be located in an input field for which this BOOL tag was configured. Key Configurable on X Tag Global
Parameters - None -
Condition The tag for which the function has been configured must be in BOOL format. With the SIMATIC S5, therefore, the tag can only be an internal tag.
Special feature Use this function to set different BOOL tags with a key. To do this, configure several input fields, to which you assign BOOL tags. The position of the cursor will determine which BOOL tags are set when the key is operated. If you require a separate function key for every bit that has to be set, there is the function Set Bit.
Example Objective You wish to set a BOOL tag by means of a key. Tips on configuring Configure an input field, to which you assign a BOOL tag. Select the key you wish to use for setting a BOOL tag. Assign the Set BOOL Tag function at "Selected functions".
9-92
Release 12/02
Reference
Procedure on the operating unit Whenever the key is pressed and the cursor is located in the input field, the function is triggered. The BOOL tag is then set.
9-93
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.53 Set Initial Tag Value (function)
Usage When the operating unit starts up, the value of a tag is set and simultaneously written to the PLC. This function ensures that the tag value is written to the PLC as soon as communication is established to the PLC. That value can be either number or a string. Key Configurable on Tag Global X
Parameters Tag Default setting Tag to be set Value (constant), preset for the tag when the OP starts up.
Example Objective You wish to assign a default value to a tag on the PLC to as early as when the operating unit runs up. Tips on configuring Choose "System" > "Functions" from the menu. At the "Initializations" entry point, you can configure the Set Initial Value of Tag function. Specify the relevant tag and the desired value as parameters. Procedure on the operating unit When the operating unit starts up, the tag is assigned the initial value and written to the PLC.
9-94
Release 12/02
Reference
Adjust Contrast function to the two buttons. Enter the following parameters: 0 = Reduce contrast 1 = Increase contrast Procedure on the operating unit The contrast is increased or reduced by one level whenever you touch one of the two buttons.
9-95
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.54 Set/Reset Bit (function)
Usage You can use this function to set or reset a tag; the function is not available on the S5. Key Configurable on X Tag X Global X
Parameters Bit Special feature If a bit is required to be set on the PLC for as long as a key or soft key is pressed, use the "Set Bit" function for the "Press key" event and the "Reset Bit" function for the "Release key" event. The "Set/Reset Bit" function should not be used in order to prevent an undesired response. If, for example, a voltage failure occurs on the operating unit when a key is pressed, the bit remains set on the PLC. After it has been rebooted, the "Set/Reset Bit" function behaves in exactly the opposite manner as before. Example Objective You wish to set and reset a tag by means of a key. Tips on configuring Select the key you wish to use for setting and resetting a tag. Under the Set/Reset Bit function that you selected, define the following parameters: the PLC tag: Bit: Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered whenever you press the key. When you do so, the tag is set. If you press the key a second time, the bit is reset. The reason for this is that it is a toggle function. Tag of the BOOL type
9-96
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.55 Set/Reset Bit in Word (function)
Usage With this function you set a bit in the word of a tag and reset a bit in the word of a tag. The tag is transferred to the PLC. Key Configurable on X Tag X Global X
Conditions The value of the tag must not be modified by the PLC. When using the Set/Reset Bit in Word function, the bits must not be modified by the PLC or an operator input. This means that Read Continuously must not be specified for the tag, either. Avoid using the Set/Reset Bit in Word function with PLCs which support BOOL tags for example, SIMATIC S7. Instead, use the Set/Reset Bit function for BOOL tags.
Example Objective You wish to set and reset a bit in the word of a tag by means of a key. The tag will then be transferred to the PLC. Tips on configuring Select the key you wish to use for setting and resetting a bit in the word of a tag. Select the Set/Reset Bit in Word function and define the following parameters: a PLC tag that applies to the word: Word: a constant that applies to the bit: Bit:
9-97
Reference
Release 12/02
Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered whenever you press on the key, and the parameters are evaluated. The corresponding bit is then set in the word of the tag, and the tag is transferred to the PLC. If you press the key a second time, the corresponding bit is reset. The reason for this is that it is a toggle function.
9-98
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.56 Short Message Page Screen (function)
Constraint The Short Message Page Screen function is supported only by touch panels.
Usage The message screen is called by touching the alarm message indicator. The screen representing the message screen is defined with this function. The message screen displays the message page (messages still queued) or the message buffer (all messages). Further, attach the Display Messages function to this screen to display the short message page. In the case of the short message page there is still space along the bottom border of the display for buttons for you to operate the message screen. Operating the message screen means: Scrolling through the messages Switching from the message page to the message buffer Exiting the message screen
Configure buttons for operating the message screen using the Operate Message Screen function. Key Configurable on Tag Global X
Parameters Screen name Name of the screen called
9-99
Reference
Release 12/02
Example Objective You want to call the message page for alarm messages by touching the alarm message indicator. Tips on configuring Choose "System" > "Functions" from the menu and configure at the "Initializations" entry point the function Short Message Page Screen. This sets the screen that is called when triggering is performed via the alarm message indicator. On this screen, the message page for alarm messages which are still queued is displayed and there is space along the bottom border of the screen for buttons you have configured yourself for operating the message screen. To do this, use the Operate Message Screen function. With this function you can set the following operations by means of parameters: browse through the messages switch to message buffer for alarm messages exiting the message screen
Configure buttons with comprehensible text or icons to operate the message screen. Procedure on the operating unit Touch the alarm message indicator. The alarm message page is opened. Buttons enabling you to operate the message screen are visible on the screen containing the alarm message page.
9-100
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.57 Start/Stop Print Screen (function)
Usage With this function you print the current screen. Key Configurable on X Tag Global
Parameters - None -
Example Objective You wish to print the current screen by means of a key. Tips on configuring Select the key you wish to use for initiating the print function. Assign the Start/Stop Print Screen function at "Selected functions". Procedure on the operating unit The function is triggered whenever you press the key. The current screen is printed. If you press the key a second time, the print function is aborted. Note The setting of Print Screen Parameters is then applied from the Z_PRINTER standard screen.
9-101
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.58 Tag: Set Value (function)
Usage With this function you assign a value to a tag. That value can be either number or a string. Whatever the value, it is entered in this function as a parameter. Key Configurable on X Tag
Parameters Tag Default setting Tag to be set Value (constant), assigned to the tag on the operating unit
Example Objective You wish to be able to assign a tag a predefined value by pressing a key or selecting a button, for example. Tips on configuring Assign the Tag: Set Value function to a key or button and specify the corresponding tag and its predefined value as the parameter. Procedure on the operating unit As soon as you press the key or button configured for it, the predefined value is assigned to the tag. This value is displayed on the operating unit and transferred to the PLC.
9-102
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.59 Tag: Value Minus/Plus (function)
Usage This function is used increase or decrease the value of a tag by a constant amount at the press of button. Formula for scaling: new tag = old tag /+ constant Note To make sure that the Tag: Minus/Plus Value function accesses the valid tag value, select the "read continuously" attribute for the tag on the "Options" tab. If you do not, a value modified on the PLC might be overwritten by the old value still on the operating unit
Tag
Global
Parameters Tag Default setting Tag whose value you wish to modify Signed constant to be added to the tag (-32768 ... +32767)
9-103
Reference
Release 12/02
Example Objective You wish to add or subtract a constant to or from the value of a tag by means of a function key or a button. Tips on configuring Select the button with which you wish to modify the tag and assign the Tag: Minus/Plus Value function to the Press Key event. Define the following parameters: Tag whose value you wish to modify Signed constant to be added to the tag. The addition of a negative value is the equivalent of a subtraction.
Procedure on the operating unit As soon as you press the key, the variable is recalculated and used with its new value.
9-104
Release 12/02
Reference
9.1.60 Time Display/Edit (function)
Usage With this function you display the current time of the operating unit. At this point you can also modify the time. Key Configurable on Tag X Global
Parameters - None -
Condition The tag for which the function is configured, has to be in KC (SIMATIC S5) or STRING (SIMATIC S7) format. For this, the I/O field must contain the String format.
Special feature Use the same tag for all the time fields. Only then will changes made by the operator be displayed in all the fields. Note The field length of the I/O field and the tag length must be at least eight for it to be possible to enter a complete time.
Example Objective You wish to view the current time and modify it, if necessary. Tips on configuring Create an input/output field having a random tag on a screen. For this tag, configure the function you selected, Time Display/Edit. Procedure on the operating unit The time is displayed in the I/O field. If the cursor is located in the I/O field, you can modify the time.
9-105
Reference
Release 12/02
9.1.61 Touch Calibration (function)
Constraint The Touch Calibration function is available only on the TP 37.
Usage You use this function to calibrate the touch-sensitive screen of the TP 37. Key Configurable on X Tag Global
Parameters - None Note As protection against unauthorized handling, you should assign a password level > 0 to the touch calibration button. Special feature If you use the Touch Calibration function in a configuration created in ProTool 3.0, delete the calibration picture from your project before recompiling it and, instead, assign the Touch Calibration function to the calling button. Example Objective You wish to calibrate the touch screen of the TP 37 by means of a button. Tips on configuring Configure a button and assign the Touch Calibration function to it. Procedure on the operating unit The calibration window on the TP 37 opens when the button is touched. Operator prompting is in English. The TP 37 prompts you to touch three points in succession: top left, bottom right and top right. If the TP 37 detects invalid touches, the calibration operation is restarted. The setting is saved on the TP 37 so that it is safe even in the event of a power failure.
9-106
Release 12/02
Reference
9.2
PLC jobs reference
Function Functions on the operating unit can be triggered by means of PLC jobs by the PLC program - for example: Display Screen Set Date and Time Modify general settings
You will find an overview in alphabetical order and another in job number order relating to all possible PLC jobs in this online Help.
Structure A PLC job consists of four data words. The first data word contains the job number. Up to three parameters are transferred in data words 2 to 4, depending on the function. The basic structure of a PLC job is shown in the following figure:
Structure of a PLC job
Requirements Generally speaking, jobs can be triggered by the PLC only when the operating unit is in Online mode.
9-107
Reference
Release 12/02
9.2.1
PLC jobs in alphabetical order
A Alarms - Delete Buffer (PLC job No. 50) Alarm Message Display Mode (PLC job No. 21) Alarm Message Overflow Warning ON/OFF (PLC job No. 38)
B Blank Screen (PLC job No. 2)
D Drive Port/Set Relay (PLC job No. 4)
E Events - Delete Buffer (PLC job No. 49) Event Message Overflow Warning ON/OFF (PLC job No. 37)
F Fetch Acknowledgement Area from PLC (PLC job No. 45) Fetch Alarm Message Area from PLC (PLC job No. 44) Fetch Event Message Area from PLC (PLC job No. 43) Fetch LED Area from PLC (PLC job No. 42)
L Language (PLC job No. 13)
M Message Logging ON/OFF (PLC job No. 12)
P Password Logout (PLC job No. 24) Position Cursor on Current Screen (PLC job No. 72) Print Screen (PLC job No. 3)
9-108
Release 12/02
Reference
R Transfer Recipe Data Record from TP/OP to PLC (PLC job No. 70) Transfer Recipe Data Record from PLC to TP/OP (PLC job No. 69)
S Select Screen (PLC job No. 51) Set Date (BCD-Coded) (PLC job No. 15) Set Password Level (PLC job No. 23) Set Time (BCD-Coded) (PLC job No. 14)
T Transfer Date/Time to PLC (PLC job No. 41) Transfer LED Area Directly to Operating Unit (PLC job No. 47)
9-109
Reference
Release 12/02
9.2.2
PLC jobs in numerical order

2 Blanking 3 Print Screen 4 Drive Port/Set Relay 12 Enable/Disable Message Logging 13 Language 14 Set Time (BCD-Coded) 15 Set Date (BCD-Coded) 21 Alarm Message Display Mode 23 Set Password Level 24 Password Logout 37 Event Message Overflow Warning ON/OFF 38 Alarm Message Overflow Warning ON/OFF 41 Transfer Date/Time to PLC 42 Fetch LED Area from PLC 43 Fetch Event Message Area from PLC 44 Fetch Alarm Message Area from PLC 45 Fetch Acknowledgement Area from PLC 47 Transfer LED Area Directly to Operating Unit 49 Events - Delete Buffer 50 Alarms - Delete Buffer 51 Select Screen 69 Transfer Recipe Data Record from PLC to TP/OP 70 Transfer Recipe Data Record from TP/OP to PLC 72 Position Cursor on Current Screen
9-110
Release 12/02
Reference
9.2.3
Alarm Message Display Mode (PLC job No. 21)
Constraint Not available on the TD 17.
Parameters Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 0: First (oldest) message 1: Last (latest message)
9.2.4
Alarm Message Overflow Warning ON/OFF (PLC job No. 38)
Parameters Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 0: Off 1: On
9.2.5
Alarms - Delete Buffer (PLC job No. 50)
Parameters Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3
9-111
Reference
Release 12/02
9.2.6
Blank Screen (PLC job No. 2)
9.2.7
Drive Port/Set Relay (PLC job No. 4)
Parameters for Drive Port Parameter 1 Port number: 1 to 8 (OP 25/OP 27/TP 27) 1 to 16 (OP 35/OP 37/TP 37) Parameter 2 Keyboard number (not applicable to TPs) LB: 1 RB: 0 Parameter 3 0: Off 3: On
Parameters for Set Relay Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 0 LB: FF (hex) RB: FF (hex) 0: Off 3: On
9-112
Release 12/02
Reference
9.2.8
Event Message Overflow Warning ON/OFF (PLC job No. 37)
9.2.9
Events - Delete Buffer (PLC job No. 49)
9.2.10 Fetch Acknowledgement Area from PLC (PLC job No. 45)
Parameters Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Area pointer no.: 1 to 8
9.2.11 Fetch Alarm Message Area from PLC (PLC job No. 44)
9-113
Reference
Release 12/02
9.2.12 Fetch Event Message Area from PLC (PLC job No. 43)
9.2.13 Fetch LED Area from PLC (PLC job No. 42)
Constraint Not available on the TP 27 or TP 37.
9.2.14 Language (PLC job No. 13)
Parameters Parameter 1 0: 1. Language 1: 2. Language 2: 3. Language Parameter 2 Parameter 3
9-114
Release 12/02
Reference
9.2.15 Message Logging ON/OFF (PLC job No. 12)
9.2.16 Password Logout (PLC job No. 24)
9.2.17 Position Cursor on Current Screen (PLC job No. 72)
Parameters Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Field number (1 to 255)
9-115
Reference
Release 12/02
9.2.18 Print Screen (PLC job No. 3)
9.2.19 Select Screen (PLC job No. 51)
Parameters Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Field number (1 to 255) Output fields are not taken into account in the serial number. RB: screen number (1 to 255)
9.2.20 Set Date (BCD-Coded) (PLC job No. 15)
Parameters Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 LB: RB: Weekday (1 to 7: Sunday through Saturday) LB: Day (1 to 31) RB: Month (1 to 12) LB: Year
9-116
Release 12/02
Reference
9.2.21 Set Password Level (PLC job No. 23)
Parameters Parameter 1 0 to 9 0 = Lowest password level 9 = Highest password level Parameter 2 Parameter 3
9.2.22 Set Time (BCD-Coded) (PLC job No. 14)
Parameters Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 LB: RB: hours (0 to 23) LB: minutes (0 to 59) RB: seconds (0 to 59)
9-117
Reference
Release 12/02
9.2.23 Transfer Date/Time to PLC (PLC job No. 41)
Special features Date and time are stored in the "Date/Time" area pointer when the PLC job is triggered. Transfer is carried out in OP format. Note If this job is triggered too frequently, overloading might result There should therefore be an interval of at least five seconds between any two jobs.
9.2.24 Transfer LED Area Directly to Operating Unit (PLC job No. 47)
Parameters Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 LED assignment area number: 1 to 4 LED assignment: word 1 LED assignment: word 2
Special features Unlike job No. 42 (Fetch LED Area from PLC), the LED assignment is transferred directly in this instance in the PLC job and thus quicker driving of the light-emitting diodes is achieved. Note The specified LED area must not be configured larger than 2 DW.
9-118
Release 12/02
Reference
9.2.25 Transfer Recipe Data Record from PLC to TP/OP (PLC job No. 69)
Parameters Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Keyword 1 Keyword 2 Keyword 3
9.2.26 Transfer Recipe Data Record from TP/OP to PLC (PLC job No. 70)
Parameters Parameter 1 Parameter 2 Parameter 3 Keyword 1 Keyword 2 Keyword 3
9-119
Reference
Release 12/02
9.3
Standard screens reference
Screens in standard projects The "standard projects" supplied with ProTool contain various screens that have already been configured; these are called standard screens. The names of the screens all start with the character "Z_. You can use standard screens in your projects without changing them or you can customize them to suit your requirements. The following table shows the applications implemented in the different standard screens. Note Many of the screens and functions listed below are not available for all operating units. Screen Name Z_BACKUP Z_FORCE Z_MESSAGES Usage Archive data (backup) Read in archived data (restore) Force VAR Edit messages such as Open event message window Open event buffer/event message page Delete event buffer Open alarm buffer/alarm message page Delete alarm buffer Z_PASSWORD Assign and modify password Log in Z_PRINTER Set printer and printer parameters. On the OP 27 and the TP 27m you can go from this screen to the following standard screens: Z_HARDCOPY Z_COLOR Z_HARDCOPY Z_COLOR Z_RECORD 1 Set parameters for Print Screen (ASCII/graphic) Clear individual colors or modify color assignments for printing Basic functions for using data records OP 27 and TP 27 only OP 27 and TP 27 only Constraints
9-120
Release 12/02
Reference
Screen Name Z_RECORD 2 Z_SETTINGS
Usage Extended functions for using data records General System settings such as mode change language switch screen blanking enter date and time display first/last alarm message message logging ON/OFF buffer overflow warning ON/OFF acoustic signal (for TPs) contrast (for TPs) calibration (for TPs)
Constraints
Z_STATUS Z_SYSTEM_MEN
Status tag for PLC diagnostics Overview screen for standard screens. You can go from this screen to the following standard screens: Z_PASSWORD Z_PRINTER Z_STATUS Z_SETTINGS Z_MESSAGES
9-121
Reference
Release 12/02
9.4
Communication areas for non-SIMATIC PLCs
Non-SIMATIC PLCs This description applies to communication with the following PLCs: Allen-Bradley Mitsubishi Modicon Omron Telemecanique
The data areas for the SIMATIC PLCs are described in the "Communication User's Manual". The operating unit and the PLC communicate with each other via these data areas: Interface area Keyboard assignment LED assignment
The data areas are only required if you want to use the corresponding functions on your operating unit. Create the required data areas on the PLC, and enter them as area pointers in your project, in the project window, at "Area pointers". The table provides you with an overview of which user areas are in principle possible with which operating unit. Device-specific user data areas: User data area Event messages Alarm messages PLC jobs Recipes System keyboard assignment Function keyboard assignment LED assignment Date and time User version Screen number User version Trend request area Trend transfer area Operating Unit OP 25, OP 27, OP 35, OP 37, TP 27, TP 37 OP 25, OP 27, OP 35, OP 37, TP 27, TP 37 OP 25, OP 27, OP 35, OP 37, TP 27, TP 37 OP 25, OP 27, OP 35, OP 37, TP 27, TP 37 OP 25, OP 27, OP 35, OP 37 OP 25, OP 27, OP 35, OP 37 OP 25, OP 27, OP 35, OP 37 OP 25, OP 27, OP 35, OP 37, TP 27, TP 37 OP 25, OP 27, OP 35, OP 37, TP 27, TP 37 OP 25, OP 27, OP 35, OP 37, TP 27, TP 37 OP 25, OP 27, OP 35, OP 37, TP 27, TP 37 OP 25, OP 27, OP 35, OP 37, TP 27, TP 37 OP 25, OP 27, OP 35, OP 37, TP 27, TP 37
9-122
Release 12/02
Reference
9.4.1
Structure of the interface area for non-SIMATIC PLCs
Use of the interface area The interface area is required when you use the functions for the following: Sending PLC jobs to the operating unit Comparing the date and time between the PLC and the operating unit Checking the version number Editing recipes (downloading data records) Detecting the startup of the operating unit in the PLC program Determining the operating mode of the operating unit in the PLC program Determining the life bit of the operating unit in the PLC program
Setting up the interface area Set the interface area in the project window at "Area pointers". The area must also exist on the PLC. The figure below shows the structure of the interface area.
Structure of the interface area in data words
9-123
Reference
Release 12/02
Note You will find a description of the interface area for SIMATIC PLCs in the "Communication User's Manual".
9-124
Release 12/02
Reference
9.4.2
Control and acknowledgement bits for non-SIMATIC PLCs
Count direction of the bits The count direction of the bits in a data word depends on the PLC. Each data word is shown below in two figures. In the explanation of the bits, the bit number is represented as follows depending on the count direction: From right to left (right > left), beginning with 0: without bracket From left to right (left > right), beginning with 1: with bracket
Structure of the control and acknowledgement bits One word each is available in the interface area for the control and acknowledgement bits: "Word n+0" Contains the control bits. These are written by the PLC and read by the operating unit. "Word n+6" Contains the acknowledgement bits. These are written by the operating unit and read by the PLC.
The figures below show in detail the structure of the control and acknowledgement bits for different count directions.
Control and acknowledgement bits for the count direction right > left
9-125
Reference
Release 12/02
Control and acknowledgement bits for the count direction left > right
Operating unit startup "Bit 0 (16) in acknowledgement bits": 1 = Operating unit has started up 0 = Operating unit is starting up The bit is set by the operating unit on completion of startup.
Operating unit operating mode "Bit 1 (15) in acknowledgement bits": 1 = operating unit is offline 0 = operating unit is in normal mode The bit is set if the operating unit is switched offline by the operator. When the operating unit is online, the bit is at 0.
Life bit "Bit 2 (14) in acknowledgement bits": The purpose of the life bit is to detect any interruption of the connection from the operating unit to the PLC immediately. The operating unit inverts the life bit in the interface area at regular intervals.
9-126
Release 12/02
Reference
Synchronizing the download of data records Control bits: "Bit 10 (6)" 1 = Data record/tag has an error 0 = No evaluation has taken place "Bit 9 (7)" 1 = Data record/tag is error-free 0 = No evaluation has taken place Acknowledgement bits: "Bit 9 (7)" 1 = Data transfer completed 0 = No evaluation has taken place "Bit 8 (8)" 1 = Data mailbox is inhibited 0 = Data mailbox is free The control and acknowledgement bits in the interface area synchronize the transfer of data records. By default the transfer is initiated by the operator at the operating unit.
Download from the operating unit to the PLC The sequence described below indicates how the operating unit sets the synchronization bits and how the PLC program must respond to it. 1. The operating unit checks bit 8 (8) of the acknowledgement bits. If the bit is set to 1 (data mailbox inhibited), the transfer is terminated with a system error message. If the bit is set to 0 (data mailbox free), the operating unit sets the bit to 1. The operating unit enters the identifiers in the data mailbox. In the case of a data record to be transferred "indirectly" (not with text-based displays), the values of the tags are written to the data mailbox. In the case of a data record to be transferred "directly", the tag values are written to the configured address. 4. 5. The operating unit sets bit 9 (7) of the acknowledgement bits to 1 (data transfer terminated). Acknowledge in the PLC program whether or not the transfer was error-free: Error-free: control bit 9 (7) is set to 1 Failed: control bit 10 (6) is set to 1 6. 7. The operating unit resets bits 9 (7) and 8 (8) of the acknowledgement bits. Reset control bits 10 (6) and 9 (7) in the control program.
2. 3.
9-127
Reference
Release 12/02
Note You will find a description of the control and acknowledgement bits for SIMATIC PLCs in the "Communication User's Manual".
9-128
Release 12/02
Reference
9.4.3
Data areas in the interface area for non-SIMATIC PLCs
Overview The PLC triggers an action on the operating unit via the job mailbox. All the other bytes are areas to which the operating unit writes data. These areas can be evaluated by the PLC program.
Job mailbox Word n+2 to n+5: You can transfer PLC jobs to the operating unit via the job mailbox and thus trigger actions on the operating unit. The job mailbox consists of four words. The job number is in the first word of the job mailbox. The job parameters (up to 3) are entered in the subsequent words. The figure below shows the structure of the job mailbox.
Structure of the job mailbox If the first word of the job mailbox is not equal to zero, the operating unit evaluates the PLC job. The operating unit then sets this data word to zero again. For this reason the parameters must be entered in the job mailbox first, followed by the job number. You will find a list of all possible PLC jobs with job numbers and parameters in "PLC jobs in alphabetical order" and "PLC jobs in numerical order".
Version number Word n+8: The operating unit enters the version number of the driver in word n+8. You can evaluate the version number in the PLC program.
9-129
Reference
Release 12/02
Date and time Time: Word n+9 to n+11 Date: Word n+12 to n+14 PLC job 41 allows you to initiate the transfer of the date and time from the operating unit to the PLC. The figure below shows the structure of the data area. All the information is BCDencoded.
Structure of the "time" and "date" data areas
Note You will find a description of the interface area for SIMATIC PLCs in the "Communication User's Manual". In order to be able to verify that the date and time have been transferred, you should set the data words to 0 before sending off the PLC job.
9-130
Release 12/02
Reference
9.4.4
Keyboard assignment of the operating unit for non-SIMATIC PLCs
Usage and prerequisite Keystrokes executed on the operating unit can be transferred to and evaluated by the PLC. This means, for example, that you can issue a message to notify the operator of incorrect usage of a key. In order to be able to do this, you must set up corresponding data areas known as assignments in the PLC and specify them as "area pointers" during configuration.
Note on the touch panel Area pointers for the keyboard and LED assignments are not supported for touch panel configuration.
Download The keyboard assignments are downloaded spontaneously to the PLC. The download takes place whenever a change is registered on the operating unit. It is therefore not necessary to configure a polling time. In the case of operating units with a graphical display, a maximum of two simultaneously depressed keys are transferred. The following applies to the keys of the operating unit (except to SHIFT): For as long as the key is held down, the relevant bit in the keyboard assignment has a value of 1. Otherwise, it has a value of 0.
Note If the operating unit is switched off or disconnected from the PLC with a key held down, the corresponding bit in the keyboard assignment remains set.
System keyboard assignment The system keyboard assignment is a data area with a fixed length of three data words. In order to be able to use the system keyboard assignment, you must set up a data area of the type "system keyboard" in your project at "Area Pointers". Precisely one bit in the system keyboard assignment is assigned to each key on the system keyboard on a fixed basis. The figures below show the keyboard assignments for units OP 25/OP 27 and OP 35/OP 37.
9-131
Reference
Release 12/02
Keyboard assignment for the OP 25/OP 27
Keyboard assignment for the OP 35/OP 37
Note Bits that are not used must not be evaluated by the PLC program (neither read nor write). You will find the system keyboard assignment in the Communication manual. Keyboard communication bit The keyboard communication bit is a control bit. Each time the keyboard assignment is transferred from the operating unit to the PLC, it is set to 1 and should be reset by the user program after evaluation of the data area. Regular reading of the communication bit makes it possible in the user program to establish whether the assignment of the system keyboard has been transferred again.
9-132
Release 12/02
Reference
Function keyboard assignment The assignment of the function keyboard can be subdivided into up to 8 separate data areas. The total length of these data areas must not exceed 8 data words. In order to be able to use the function keyboard assignment, you must set up a data area of the type "function keyboard" in your project at "Area Pointers". Key assignment Set the assignment of the individual keys to the bits of the data areas when you "configure the function keys". For each key you specify the number in the assignment area. Keyboard communication bit The highest bit in the last data word of "each" data area is the keyboard communication bit. This is a control bit. Each time the keyboard assignment is downloaded from the operating unit to the PLC, the keyboard communication bit is set to 1. After the data area has been evaluated by the user program, the keyboard communication bit should be reset. Regular reading of the communication bit makes it possible in the user program to establish whether a block has been downloaded again. Note You will find a description of the keyboard assignment for SIMATIC PLCs in the "Communication User's Manual".
9-133
Reference
Release 12/02
9.4.5
LED assignment of the operating unit for non-SIMATIC PLCs
Usage The light-emitting diodes (LEDs) on the function keys of the operating unit can be driven on the PLC. This makes it possible, for example, for a key LED to show the operator which key to press in a particular situation.
Data areas The LED assignment can be subdivided into up to 8 separate data areas. The total length of these data areas must not exceed 16 data words. In order to be able to use the LED assignment, you must set up a data area of the type "LED assignment" in your project at "Area Pointers".
Polling time If you specify a polling time of 0 for a data area, this is not downloaded cyclically to the operating unit. You must then use "PLC job" No. 42 to drive the LEDs.
LED assignment Set the assignment of the individual LEDs to the bits of the data areas when you "configure the function keys". For each LED you specify the number of the assignment area and the bit number in this area. Bit number n in the following tables designates the first of two successive bits that control a total of four different LED states. Bit n + 1 0 0 1 1 Bit n 0 1 0 1 LED function Off Flashing at approx. 2 Hz Flashing at approx. 0.5 Hz On continuously
LED function for the right > left count direction
9-134
Release 12/02
Reference
Bit n + 1 0 0 1 1
Bit n 0 1 0 1
LED function Off Flashing at approx. 0.5 Hz Flashing at approx. 2 Hz On continuously
LED function for the left > right count direction Note You will find a description of the LED assignment for SIMATIC PLCs in the "Communication User's Guide".
9-135
Reference
Release 12/02
9.5
Libraries in ProTool
Purpose Libraries are collections of preconfigured screen objects. They add to the number of screen objects available and enhance the effectiveness of your configuration by repeated and multiple use of "finished parts".
Standard libraries Once ProTool is installed, the following libraries are available to you in the \Library directory: File name Bmp-Graphics.lib Vector-Graphics.lib Content Technical standard symbols Pipes, pumps, tanks and valves Buttons Buttons Suitable for devices All All Windows systems, except TP 170 A TP 27, TP 37 All Windows systems, specifically touch devices, such as TP 170 A, TP 170 B, TP 270
Touch-Switches.lib TP 170A-TOUCH-Switches.lib
You can add further libraries to this directory yourself and then use them in ProTool. Files must be of the *.lib type and have the same format as a ProTool library.
Managing libraries As soon as you open a screen in a project, you have access to the menu options under "Edit" > "Libraries" and to the icon button. Once you open the first library, the library window on the screen is active. The first library opened and all those subsequently opened are shown together here, as a tree structure.
9-136
Release 12/02
Reference
The following functions are available to assist you in managing your libraries: Adding a library: You insert a file (of the *.lib type or in ProTool library format) in the \Library directory. Use the "New" option on the shortcut menu to create a new, empty library. Save a library under a different name and then edit it. Renaming or deleting a library: Use the Windows functions in Explorer of the library. Deleting library objects or folders: Use the shortcut menu of the library. Restructuring a library: Edit the overview by dragging with the Windows functions. Use "New Folder" on the shortcut menu to add a new folder. To rename folders or library objects, click twice or press "F2".
Note You cannot edit a write-protected library.
Editing library objects You cannot edit library objects directly, you can only edit them in a project. Paste the object in question to a screen in your project, edit it there and move it back to the associated library. Delete the original object and give the one you have just added the same name as the old one.
9-137
Reference
Release 12/02
9.5.1
How to work with the SIMATIC HMI Symbol Library
Purpose From the SIMATIC HMI symbol library, it is easy to paste the most varied screen objects into your screen.
Pasting an object To paste an object from the SIMATIC HMI symbol library, perform the following steps: Procedure: 1 2 On the "Screen objects" toolbar, click on the adjacent button and then in the screen, at the place where you want the object to appear. The "Symbol Library" dialog box opens. 3 4 On the "Symbols" tab, select the topic subject concerned at bottom left, at "Category" and, on the right, select the screen object you require. On the "Style" tab, set the characteristics you require for the object that has to be pasted. The foreground color cannot be changed in the "Shaded" Foreground mode 5 On the "Color" tab, set the colors for the foreground and background, as well as for flashing, as required, and for the upper and lower limits being exceeded (of a configured tag). Select the "Attributes" tag if you want to modify the foreground and background colors, for example, in Runtime, or to enable and disable flashing. If you have enabled flashing on the "Color" tab and on the "Attributes" tab, flashing enabled at "Set color" will be ignored. 7 Select the "Functions" tab if you want to trigger a function when selecting or exiting the symbol (not useful on key-operated devices). To make this clear to the operator, you can select the "Display mouse pointer" check box on the "Style" tab. The lightning symbol then appears next to the cursor in ProTool/Pro RT. 8 Select the "Position" tab to set the position of the symbol exactly to the pixels. On this tab you set whether the position is static or it is dynamically modified in Runtime. Select the "Name" tab if you want to assign the symbol a specific name. You can use this name as a parameter, for example in functions that refer to the symbol. Assign a password level to the symbol on the "Enable" tab, as necessary, to enable data entry only by authorized persons. Open the screen in question.
10
9-138
Release 12/02
Reference
Procedure: 11 12 Similarly, set on the "Enable" tab, as necessary, the conditions under which you want the symbol to be displayed or hidden in Runtime. Confirm by clicking OK. The symbol from the library is now included in the screen, with the settings you selected.
9-139
Reference
Release 12/02
9.6
Abbreviations
Overview The meanings of the abbreviations used in this documentation are as follows: ANSI AS 511 ASCII CPU DP HMI LED MPI OLE OP PC PU RAM PLC TP PRC American National Standards Institute Protocol of the PU interface on the SIMATIC S5 American Standard Code for Information Interchange Central Processing Unit Distributed I/O Human Machine Interface Light-emitting diode Multipoint Interface (SIMATIC S7) Object Linking and Embedding Operator panel Personal computer Programming unit Random access memory: memory with random access (working memory) Programmable logic control Touch panel People's Republic of China
9-140
Release 12/02
Index
Index
Assigning icons to function keys 5-190 Assigning operator permissions 5-195 Attribute dynamisieren (Instructions) 5-200 Automatic Graphics Printing (function) 9-21
A
Abbreviations 9-140 acknowledgement 5-103, 5-129 Acknowledging ALARM_S messages 5-129 Acknowledging messages 5-101, 5-129 Acoustic Signal (function) 9-15 acquisition cycle tag 5-61 Address 5-65 Address of tags 5-65 Adjust 9-95 Adjust Contrast (function) 9-95 Alarm Message Display Mode (PLC job No. 21) 9-111 Alarm Message Overflow Warning ON/OFF (PLC job No. 38) 9-111 ALARM_S 5-116 Acknowledgement 5-129 Communication process 5-127 Configure message text 5-123 Display classes 5-118 Print messages 5-130 Set 5-120 Update 5-125 ALARM_S messages 5-123 ALARM_S-messages 5-124 Alarms 9-18 Alarms - Delete Buffer (function) 9-18 Alarms - Delete Buffer (PLC job No. 50) 9-111 Alarms - Display First/Last (function) 9-19 AM 9-140 ANSI 9-140 Anti-alias 4-20, 5-16, 5-80 Area 4-12 Area pointers 5-112 Array 5-93 Array tags 5-55 Array tags for history trends 5-93 Array tags for pattern trends 5-93 ASCII 9-140 Asian languages 5-219, 5-220 Assign global function key 5-44 Assign local function key 5-45 Assign soft keys 5-45 Assigning function keys globally 5-44 Assigning function keys locally 5-45 Assigning icons for local function keys 5-190
B
Backing up a project (instructions) 7-17 Backup 7-17 Backup/Restore (function) 9-22 Bar graph 5-27 Multiplexing (example) 5-78 Multiplexing (guidance) 5-73 Bit trigger 5-19, 5-87, 5-92 Bitmaps 5-85 Edit 5-85 Blank Screen (function) 9-25 Blank Screen (PLC job No. 2) 9-112 Buffer Overflow 9-27 Buffer Overflow (function) 9-27 Buffer Overflow Warning (function) 9-27 Button 5-35 Light indicator 5-21, 5-29 Select Screen 5-35, 5-48 Set/Reset Bit 5-35, 5-49 Touch panel 5-35 Using as direct keys 5-38 Buttons with fixed functions 5-158
C
Call online Help Call online information Calling up information online Calling up online Help Change AM Page/Buffer (function) Change EM Page/Buffer (function) Change section OLE object Changing the editing language for multilingual projects (Instructions) Changing the operating mode with a current display (example) Character graphics Character sets Language dependent Choosing project languages (Instructions) Clean Screen (function) 1-8 1-8 1-3 1-3 9-29 9-30 5-86 5-86 5-226 5-164 5-24 5-212 5-212 5-223 9-31
I-1
Index
Release 12/02
Clock trigger 5-19, 5-87 Color 5-7 Combine multiple functions 5-156 Combined input/output fields 5-32 Combining multiple functions 5-156 Communication 9-122 Communication areas for messages 5-112 Communication areas for non-SIMATIC PLCs 9-122, 9-125 Interface area 9-123 Keyboard assignment 9-131 LED assignment 9-134 Communication sequence in the event of ALARM_S messages 5-127 Compilation 6-7 Compile the project (guidance) 6-11 Complete devices 1-10 Components of a ProTool project 4-8 Configuration 2-4, 5-120 Selecting display classes 5-120, 5-134 Configuration notes for touch panels 4-17 Configuration requirements in Asian languages 5-219 Configuration software 1-1 Configure printers 5-106, 5-135 Configuring a multilingual project 5-215 Configuring a trend view (Instructions) 5-28 Configuring alarm messages (example) 5-139 Configuring an input field for alphanumeric values (Instructions) 5-42 Configuring an input field for symbolic values (Instructions) 5-41 Configuring bar graphs (Instrcutions) 5-27 Configuring buttons (Instructions) 5-47 Configuring buttons (Touch Panel) (Instructions) 5-47 Configuring character graphics (Instructions) 5-24 Configuring color change 5-192 Configuring color change (Instructions) 5-200 Configuring combined input/output fields (Instructions) 5-43 Configuring controls 5-30 Configuring direct keys (instructions) 5-50 Configuring display elements 5-13 Configuring dynamic attributes 5-192 Configuring dynamic attributes (Instructions) 5-200 Configuring functions (guidance) 5-161 Configuring graphics 5-82 Configuring graphics (Instructions) 5-82 Configuring language changes (instructions) 5-232
Configuring light indicators (Instructions) 5-29 Configuring messages (instructions) 5-132 Configuring operator prompting 5-188 Configuring output fields for alphanumeric values (Instructions) 5-25 Configuring output fields for symbolic values (Instructions) 5-26 Configuring password protection (Instructions) 5-204 Configuring recipes 5-179 Configuring static text (Instructions) 5-23 Configuring tags (instructions) 5-59 Configuring the PROFIBUS Screen Number function 5-51 Configuring the Select Screen button 5-48 Configuring the Set/Reset Bit button 5-49 Configuring trends (instructions) 5-90 Configuring virtual buttons (Instructions) 5-47 Configuring with ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 3-1 Constraints 7-8 Constraints on projects in Asian languages 5-220 Constraints with printing 7-8 Context-sensitive Help 1-3, 1-8 Control and acknowledgement bits 9-125 Control and acknowledgement bits for nonSIMATIC PLCs 9-125 Convert a project 4-20 Convertible 4-20 Converting a project 4-34 Copying 5-133 Copying messages 5-133 CPU 9-140 Create a project 4-10 Create icons for function keys (guidance) 5-203 Creating 4-33 Creating a customized printout (example) 7-21 Creating a new project 4-33 Creating area pointers 4-12, 4-35 Creating distortion-free graphics 5-83 Creating graphics (Tips) 8-4 Creating icons for function keys 5-190 Creating your own printed reports (instructions) 7-14 Cross-Reference 4-29 Cross-reference (overview) 4-29 Cross-references displaying 4-36 Custom project user interface in ProTool 5-7
I-2
Release 12/02
Index
D
Data 5-65 Data areas for non-SIMATIC PLCs 9-122, 9-125 Interface area 9-123 Keyboard assignment 9-131 LED assignment 9-134 Data areas in the interface area 9-129 Data areas in the interface area for nonSIMATIC PLCs 9-129 Data mailbox 5-174 Data record 5-171 Create 5-177 Definition 5-171 Identify 5-174 Transfer 5-177 Transfer (example) 5-186 Date and time (function) 9-32 Date Display/Edit (function) 9-33 Decimal places of tags 8-8 Decimal places with tags 5-64 Degree of detail 7-12 Degree of detail when printing 7-12 Delete 7-19 Deleting a project (instructions) 7-19 Deleting project languages (Instructions) 5-224 Device overview for ProTool 1-10 Device type 4-30 Direct Key (function) 9-34 Direct keys 5-50 Direct transfer 5-186 Data records: 5-177 Directly accessing values on the PLC 6-5 Discard 4-26 Display 5-159 Display actual value as symbol 5-26 Display actual values 5-18, 5-25 Display Alarm Messages (function) 9-36 Display classes 5-118 Select 5-120 Display Event Messages (function) 9-37 Display Help Text (function) 9-38 Display in 4-29 Display Messages (function) 9-39 Display messages on the operating unit 5-107, 5-110 Displaying and changing the date on the operating unit (example) 5-169 Displaying date 5-159 Displaying messages 5-96, 5-110 Displaying messages on the operating unit 5-107 Displaying operating and process states 5-96
Displaying time 5-159 Displays 5-25 Actual values 5-18, 5-25 Symbolic values 5-26 Download 5-186, 6-4, 6-14, 6-15 Data records (example) 5-186 MPI 6-4 MPI (guidance) 6-15 Serial (guidance) 6-14 Download the project file 6-2 Downloading 6-8 Downloading the executable project file 6-2 Downloading the executable project file (instructions) 6-13 Downloading the project file (guidance) 6-13 Drive a port or relay 5-102 Drive Port/Set Relay (PLC job No. 4) 9-112 Drive ports 5-38 Driving LED (Instructions) 5-202 Driving light-emitting diodes (Instructions) 5-202 Driving light-emitting diodes (Instructios) 5-202 Driving the LED 5-194 Dynamic attributes 5-192 Dynamic Screen Selection 1 (function)9-41 Dynamic Screen Selection 2 (function)9-42
E
Edit Message standard screen on the TP 27 (example) 5-141 Editing language 5-207 Editing properties of function keys 5-46 EM 9-140 Enter setpoints 5-31, 5-32, 5-42, 5-43 Entering special characters (Instructions) 5-228 Entry points (functions) 9-3 Error messages during compilation 6-7 Error messages while downloading 6-8 Evaluate 5-201 Key operation (guidance) 5-201 Evaluating key operation 5-193 Evaluating key operation (instructions) 5-201 Evaluating key operation of function keys 5-193 Evaluating key operation of system keys 5-193 Event Message Overflow Warning ON/OFF (PLC job No. 37) 9-113 Event messages export file (example)5-148 Event Window (function) 9-45
I-3
Index
Release 12/02
Events - Delete Buffer (function) Events - Delete Buffer (PLC job No. 49) Events (functions) Events for triggering functions Exchanging text with translators Executing requirements (functions) Exporting message text Exporting text Exporting text multilingual projects (Instructions)
9-44 9-113 9-3 5-152 5-217 9-3 5-137 5-229 5-229
Graphics Mode for Print Screen List (function) Grouped screen objects
9-47 5-10
H
Hiding and Showing objects (Instructions)5199 Hiding objects 5-191 Hiding objects (Instructions) 5-199 HMI 9-140 How to assign operator authorization (Instructions) 5-204 How to change the editing language (Instructions) 5-226 How to display cross-references 4-36 How to enter foreign-language special characters (Instructions) 5-228 How to import text into ProTool 5-231 How to select online languages for the operating unit (Instructions) 5-225
F
Fetch Acknowledgement Area from PLC (PLC job No. 45) 9-113 Fetch Alarm Message Area from PLC (PLC job No. 44) 9-113 Fetch Event Message Area from PLC (PLC job No. 43) 9-114 Fetch LED Area from PLC (PLC job No. 42) 9-114 Fields 5-2 Fields flashing 5-192 Fixed window 5-2 Flashing 9-134 Fields (guidance) 5-200 LED (guidance) 5-202 Force VAR 6-5 Foreign languages 5-207, 5-228 Export/import 5-217 System requirements 5-206 Function key 5-33, 5-44, 5-45 Assign icon (guidance) 5-203 Evaluate key operation (guidance) 5-201 Function parameters 5-154 Functions 5-150, 9-2 Alphabetical order 9-12 By subject 9-6 Example 5-164, 5-169
I
Import 5-137 Message text 5-137 Text for translation 5-217, 5-231 Importing 5-137 Importing message text 5-137 Importing multilingual texts into ProTool (Instructions) 5-231 Incorporating ALARM_S messages in ProTool 5-124 Indirect transfer 5-186 Data records: 5-177 Information about the project 4-30 Information text 9-38 Initialize Bit in Startup (function) 9-48 Input 5-32 Input field 5-42 Guidance 5-43 Multiplexing 5-71 Multiplexing (guidance) 5-76 Input/output fields 5-32 Instance DB 3-1 Integrated operation 7-4 Interface area 9-123 Control and acknowledgement bits 9-125 Data areas 9-129 Interrupt 5-94 Data plotting on trends 5-94 Interrupt data plots on trends 5-94 Invincible buttons 5-7, 5-35
G
Getting started in ProTool Global function key Graphic displays Graphic lists Graphics Bar graph Bar graph (guidance) Bitmap Character graphics Create without distortion Trends 2-3 5-33 1-10 5-79 5-16, 5-80 5-20 5-27 5-85 5-15, 5-24 5-83 5-87
I-4
Release 12/02
Index
K
Keyboard assignment 5-213 Language dependence 5-213 Keyboard assignment of the operating unit 9-131 Keyboard assignment of the operating unit for non-SIMATIC PLCs 9-131
L
Label function keys (guidance) 5-203 Labeling function keys 5-190 Language 5-232 Language (function) 9-49 Language (PLC job No. 13) 9-114 Language dependence 5-213 Character sets 5-212 Keyboard assignment 5-213 Languages 5-207 Configurable 5-210 Export 5-217, 5-229 Import 5-217, 5-231 Requirements for Asian languages 5-219 Standard screens 5-210 System messages 5-210 Languages available 5-225 Languages in ProTool 5-207 LED 9-140 LED assignment of the operating unit 9-134 LED assignment of the operating unit for non-SIMATIC PLCs 9-134 LED is flashing 5-194 Libraries 8-5, 9-136, 9-138 In ProTool (overview) 8-5, 9-136 Use (guidance) 9-138 Libraries in ProTool 8-5, 9-136 Light indicator 5-29 Signal lamp 5-21, 5-29 Local function key 5-33 Assign icon (guidance) 5-203 Localizing screen objects (Instructions) 6-12 Localizing screen objects(Instructions) 6-12 Log messages 5-105 Logging messages 5-103, 5-105
message 5-103, 5-143 Message areas for SIMATIC S5 (Example) 5-143 Message areas for SIMATIC S7 (Example) 5-144 Message bit procedure 5-114 Message buffer 5-108 Message event 5-114 Acknowledged 5-114 Active 5-114 Cleared 5-114 Message Filters (function) 9-51 Message indicator 5-111 Message line 5-110 Message Log ON/OFF (function) 9-54 Message Logging ON/OFF (PLC job No. 12) 9-115 Message procedures 5-113 Message bit procedure 5-114 Message number procedure 5-114 ALARM_S 5-116 Set 5-120 Message procedures: 5-113, 5-114, 5-116, 5-120 Message text copying 5-133 Message window 5-110 Messages 5-96 acknowledgement 5-129 Communication areas 5-112 Properties 5-99 Use of resources 5-126 Mode (function) 9-56 Moving alarm messages to the background (example) 5-145 MPI 9-140 MPI download 6-4 MPI download (guidance) 6-15 Multilingual projects 5-214 Multiplexing 5-66, 5-73 Bar graph (example) 5-78 Bar graph (guidance) 5-73 Input/output fields 5-71 Input/output fields (guidance) 5-76 Trend tag (guidance) 5-75 Trends (guidance) 5-74 Multiplexing bar graphs 5-67 Multiplexing trend tags 5-69 Multiplexing trends 5-68
M
Making optimum use of graphics Managing Managing projects in stand-alone operation Memory requirements 8-3 7-5 7-5 4-30
N
Navigating in the Online Help Notes on the configuration computer 1-5 2-4
I-5
Index
Release 12/02
O
Objects in the project window 4-9 OLE 9-140 OLE object 5-86 Change section 5-86 Size 5-86 Online 1-3, 1-5 Online Help 1-8 Navigation 1-5 On-screen keyboard 5-213 OP 9-140 Opening 4-34 Opening an existing project 4-34 Operate Message Screen (function) 9-58 Operating 4-14 Operating philosophy 4-6 Operator 5-195 Operator panel 1-10 Optimize 8-2 Performance 8-2 System resources 2-4 Optimizing performance 8-2 Optimizing system resources 2-4 Optimum creation of graphics 8-3 Output field 5-25 Multiplexing 5-71 Multiplexing (guidance) 5-76 Overflow warning 9-27 Overview of area pointers 4-12 Overview of PLC drivers 4-11
P
Partition the display on the operating unit 4-14 Password Logout (PLC job No. 24) 9-115 Pattern trend 5-19, 5-87 PC 9-140 Peculiarities of MPI transfers 6-4 PLC 4-11, 9-107, 9-140 Select driver 4-11 PLC data types 5-65 PLC jobs 9-107 Alphabetical order 9-108 Port 5-99 Position Cursor on Current Screen (PLC job No. 72) 9-115 PPI 9-140 Print 7-8 Special characters 5-234 Print ALARM_S messages 5-130 Print messages 5-99 Print Messages (function) 9-60 Print Messages with Filter 1 (function) 9-61
Print Messages with Filter 2 (function) 9-63 Print Screen (PLC job No. 3) 9-116 Print Screen List (function) 9-65 Printing 7-2 Printing ALARM_S messages 5-130 Printing data (instructions) 7-10 Printing project data 7-2 Printing selected data (instructions) 7-10 Printing special characters on the operating unit printer (instructions) 5-234 Priority of messages 5-99 PROFIBUS direct keys 5-38 PROFIBUS Screen Number (function) 9-67 Project 4-10, 4-20, 4-33, 4-34, 4-38, 4-39, 6-1, 75, 7-17 Compile (guidance) 6-11 Convert 4-20, 4-34 Convert OP 25 for OP 27 (example) 4-39 Create 4-10 Create for OP 37 (example) 4-38 Create new project 4-33 fundamentals of creating 4-4 Open 4-34 Test 6-1 Project Info 4-30 Project language 5-207 Project languages 5-223 Project management 7-4 With integrated operation 7-4 Project management with integrated operation 7-4 Project Manager 7-15 Work with 7-15 Project window 4-9 Objects 4-9 Projektdatei 6-2 Projektsprachen 5-224 Prompting the operator 5-188 Properties of tags 5-55 ProTool 1-10, 2-3, 3-1, 3-3 Device family 1-10 Getting Started 2-3 Integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 3-1 Overview 1-1 ProTool for graphics displays 1-13 ProTool for text-based displays 1-14 ProTool for Windows-based systems 1-11 ProTool Project 4-8 components 4-8 ProTool version 4-30 Providing Help information on the operating unit 5-189 Providing Help text 5-189 Providing Help text (Instructions) 5-198 Providing information text 5-189
I-6
Release 12/02
Index
Providing information text (Instructions) PU
5-198 9-140
R
RAM 9-140 Read in alphanumeric values 5-31, 5-32, 5-42, 5-43 Read in numeric values 5-31, 5-32, 5-42, 5-43 Read in symbolic values 5-31, 5-32, 5-41 Read in values 5-31, 5-32, 5-41, 5-42, 5-43 Read out alphanumeric values 5-18, 5-25 Read out numeric values 5-18, 5-25 Read out symbolic values 5-26 Read out values 5-18, 5-25, 5-26 Realtime trend 5-19, 5-87 Recipe 5-171 Configure 5-174 Configure (example) 5-180 Data mailbox 5-174 Data record 5-171 Example 5-171 Set structure 5-174 Standard screens 5-174 Recipes 5-171 Redo 4-24, 4-27 Redoing the last action 4-24, 4-27 Reference language 5-207 Reference text 5-214 Reference text for multilingual projects 5-214 Relay 5-99 Report operating states 5-96 Reset Bit (function) 9-69 Reset Bit in Word (function) 9-70 Reset BOOL Tag (function) 9-72 Resource consumption of messages 5-126 Restore 7-18 Restoring a backup (instructions) 7-18 Restoring a project (instructions) 7-18 Restoring backup (instructions) 7-18 Restoring project (instructions) 7-18
S
Scaling Linear 2 (function) Scaling Square 1 (function) Scaling Square 2 (function) Screen editor Screen number PROFIBUS Screen objects 9-76 9-78 9-80 5-2 5-51 5-51 5-5
Screen partitioning on the operating unit 4-14 Screens 5-2 Components of a screen 5-2 Example 5-2 Overview 5-2 Select screen 5-2 Setting the start screen 5-9 Scroll 9-82, 9-83 Scroll DOWN (function) 9-82 Scroll UP (function) 9-83 Searching 4-29 Searching for errors using CrossReference functions 4-29 Select 5-134 Display classes 5-134 Select Previous Screen (function) 9-84 Select Screen 5-48 Select Screen (function) 9-41 Select Screen (PLC job No. 51) 9-116 Selecting a printer on the operating unit (example) 5-146 Selecting available languages on the operating unit (Instructions) 5-225 Selecting display (Instructions) 5-134 Selecting display classes for diagnostics 5-134 Selecting languages available (Instructions) 5-225 Serial transfer (guidance) 6-14 Set Bit (function) 9-86 Set Bit in Word (function) 9-87 Set Bit When Key Is Pressed (function)9-89 Set BOOL Tag (function) 9-92 Set Date (BCD-Coded) (PLC job No. 15) 9-116 Set Date and Time 5-159 Set field panel 5-7 Set Initial Tag Value (function) 9-94 Set intensity 5-7 Set Password Level (PLC job No. 23)9-117 Set Time (BCD-Coded) (PLC job No. 14) 9-117 Set zoom factor 5-7 Set/Reset Bit 5-49 Set/Reset Bit (function) 9-96 Set/Reset Bit in Word (function) 9-97 Setting contrast 5-7 Setting the acquisition cycle (Example)5-61 Setting the degree of detail on a printout (instruction) 7-12 Setting the layout of a printout (instructions) 7-13 Setting the standard clock pulse (Example) 5-61 Setting the start screen (Instructions) 5-9
I-7
Index
Release 12/02
Setting the zoom factor 5-7 Setting touch panels 5-7 Settings for message classes 5-103 Short Message Page Screen (function) 9-99 Show/hide invincible buttons 5-7 Showing and hiding objects 5-191 Showing objects 5-191 Showing objects (Instructions) 5-199 SIMATIC HMI device family 1-10 SIMATIC Manager 7-4 Size 5-86 OLE object 5-86 Vector graphics 5-84 Smoothing 4-20, 5-16, 5-80 Soft key 5-33 Special characters 5-228 Special characters for multilingulal projects 5-228 SSet Date (BCD-Coded) (PLC job No. 15) 9-116 Standard clock pulse tag 5-61 Standard screens 9-120 Languages 5-210 Recipe 5-174 Start screen 5-2 Start/Stop Print Screen (function) 9-101 Starting ProTool 2-2 Starting ProTool in SIMATIC STEP 7 3-3 Static text 5-23 Status tag 6-5 Steps to creating a multilingual project 5-215 Structure of the interface area for nonSIMATIC PLCs 9-123 Switch buffer 5-19, 5-87 Switching the editing language (Instructions) 5-226 System key 5-201 Evaluate key operation (guidance) 5-201 System messages 5-104 Languages 5-210 System messages (example) 5-147 System requirements For foreign languages 5-206
T
Tag Address Multiplexing (guidance) Set Value (function) Set Value (function) Status/Force Value Minus/Plus (function) 5-65 5-65 5-75 9-102 9-102 6-5 9-103
Tag scaling (example) 5-62 Tag use in several fields 8-7 Tags 5-52, 5-55, 5-57, 5-59, 5-62, 5-64 Create 5-55 Decimal places 5-64 Define 5-55 Recipe 5-174 Update 5-55, 5-57 Tags for integrated operation 5-55 Tags with configured decimal places 8-8 Testing projects 6-1 Tests 6-1 Text 5-24 Character graphics 5-15, 5-24 Export 5-217, 5-229 Import 5-217, 5-231 Static 5-14, 5-23 Text displays 1-10 Text lists 5-79 Text or graphic list 5-79 Recipe 5-174 Text or graphic lists 5-79 Text-based displays 1-10 Time Display/Edit (function) 9-105 Tips on touch panel 8-9 Tips on touch panels 8-9 Touch Calibration (function) 9-106 Touch panel 1-10, 4-17, 8-9 Button 5-35 Light indicator 5-21, 5-29 Select Screen 5-48 Set/Reset Bit 5-49 TP 9-140 Transfer 6-2 Data records: 5-177 Transfer Date/Time to PLC (PLC job No. 41) 9-118 Transfer LED Area Directly to Operating Unit (PLC job No. 47) 9-118 Transfer Recipe Data Record from PLC to TP/OP (PLC job No. 69) 9-119 Transfer Recipe Data Record from TP/OP to PLC (PLC job No. 70) 9-119 Transfer the project file 6-2 Transfer the project file (guidance) 6-13 Translating projects 5-217 Translating texts for multilingual projects 5-217 Trend 5-19 Trend tag 5-75 Multiplexing (guidance) 5-75 Trends 5-87, 5-94 Interrupt data plotting 5-94 Multiplexing (guidance) 5-74 Trigger (functions) 9-3 Triggering 5-19
I-8
Release 12/02
Index
Trends Triggering functions Triggering trends Type Types of tags
5-19, 5-87 5-152 5-92 5-65 5-65
U
Undo 4-24, 4-26 Undo actions 4-24 Undo buffer 4-29 Undoing the last action 4-26 Update symbol table 3-1 Update tags 5-57 Updating the operating unit 5-125 Use of resources 5-126 User areas for non-SIMATIC PLCs 9-122, 9-125 Interface area 9-123 Keyboard assignment 9-131 LED assignment 9-134 User interface language 5-207 Using 5-38 Using functions 5-150 Using the PROFIBUS Screen Number function 5-51 Using the reference for languages (Instructions) 5-227 Using the reference language for multilingual projects (Instrcutions) 5-227
V
Value Minus/Plus (Function) Vector graphics Size Version Virtual key 9-103 5-84 5-84 4-30 5-35
W
What 5-15, 5-18, 5-19, 5-20, 5-21, 5-31 What are buttons 5-35 What is static text? 5-14 Windows-based systems 1-10 Working with function keys 5-46 Working with grouped screen objects (Instructions) 5-10 Working with several screen objects (Instructions) 5-11 Working with the reference language (Instructions) 5-227
I-9
Index
Release 12/02
I-10

Protool Gop

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Protool Gop

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIMATIC HMI ProTool V6.

0 Service Pack 2 How to configure graphicsbased units

Siemens AG 2002 Technical data subject to change.

Customer and Technical Support

Nuremberg Johnson City Singapore

SIMATIC Customer Support Online Services

In the Internet under http://www.siemens.com/simatic

In the Internet under http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support

Other Sources of Assistance

First steps in ProTool................................................................................ 2-1

ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7 ................................................ 3-1

Creating and editing projects ................................................................. 4-3

Configuration techniques ........................................................................ 5-1

Testing projects.......................................................................................... 6-1

Documenting and managing projects .................................................. 7-1

Tips for efficient configuration............................................................... 8-1

Example of the structure:

Example of PC as configuration computer and OP 37 as operating unit

How to work with ProTool online Help

From direct Help

How to work with direct Help

Overview of the documentation

ProTool for the whole SIMATIC HMI device family

ProTool for Windows-based systems

ProTool for graphics displays

C7-626 (OP 25 with integrated S7-CPU)

ProTool for text-based displays

First steps in ProTool

First steps in ProTool

First steps in ProTool

ProSave v. 6.0 Opens ProSave as a stand-alone application.

First steps in ProTool

Configuring graphics displays

First steps in ProTool

Notes on the configuration computer

ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7

ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7

ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7

ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7

How to start ProTool in SIMATIC STEP 7

Example of the "New" dialog box for integrating STEP 7

ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7

ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7

How to restore the symbolic tag connections

ProTool integrated in SIMATIC STEP 7

Creating and editing projects

Creating and editing projects

Creating and editing projects

Fundamental considerations when creating a project

Creating and editing projects

Creating and editing projects

Defining an operating philosophy

Creating and editing projects

Creating and editing projects

Components of a ProTool project

Example of a project window with tags

Creating and editing projects

Objects in the project window

Creating and editing projects

Steps to be taken when creating a project

Creating and editing projects

Creating and editing projects

Creating and editing projects

Area pointers Trend transfer area 1